CEEQUAL v6 - International Projects Technical Manual-0.1

CEEQUAL Version 6
Technical Manual | International Projects

SD6053:0.1
© BRE Global Ltd 2020

BLANK PAGE
CEEQUAL Version 6 | International Projects Terms and conditions
Terms and conditions
Disclaimer
This document is the property of BRE Global Limited and is made publicly available for information purposes only.
Any testing, assessment, certification or approval activities relating to this Scheme Document ("the Activities") must
be conducted in accordance with BRE Global Limited's approved processes, where the Activities are undertaken by
authorised employees, agents, and associates of Building Research Establishment Limited ("BRE"), BRE Global
Limited, or approved Activities providers.
For the avoidance of doubt, anyone wishing to use of reproduce this Scheme Document to offer testing, assessment,
certification or approval services, must apply to BRE Global Limited for the right to offer such services.
BRE Global Limited accepts no responsibility for any unauthorised use or distribution by others of this document and
may take legal action where unauthorised use is discovered.
Copyright
Save where BRE Global Limited has acknowledged third party-owned sources, the copyright in this document is
owned by BRE Global Limited.
The Scheme Document may be downloaded and reproduced only where:
l the reproduction is for academic and other non-commercial purposes;

l the Scheme Document is reproduced in full; and
l BRE Global Limited's copyright in the Scheme Document is acknowledged.
Any other use of the document shall be subject to specific agreements with BRE Global Limited.
Trademarks
"BRE", "BRE Global Limited", "BREEAM", "CEEQUAL", "SmartWaste", and "The Green Guide" are all trademarks,
whether registered or unregistered, and are owned by either BRE or BRE Global Limited, and may not be used
without written permission from BRE or BRE Global Limited.
SD6053 | Issue: 0.1 | Issue date: 19/11/2020 Page 3 of 187

Acknowledgements CEEQUAL Version 6 | International Projects
Acknowledgements
This technical manual has been made possible through the continued efforts of many dedicated BRE Group staff
members, CEEQUAL's Infrastructure Working Group, the BRE Global Limited Governing Body, Assessors, Verifiers,
BREEAM Infrastructure Pilot users, and those who have responded to our requests for feedback in other ways.
BRE Global Limited also extends its gratitude to clients who support CEEQUAL by continuing to specify and apply the
method and contribute towards our shared mission to building a better world together.
Cover images
Left column, top to bottom:
l Spårväg City - Linje 7 (courtesy of Skanska Sverige AB)

l A82 Pulpit Rock (courtesy of McLaughlin & Harvey)
l St Peter's Square Public Realm Development (courtesy of AECOM)
l Crossrail South East Section Abbey Wood (courtesy of Crossrail and Network Rail)
Right column, top to bottom:
l Northern Line Extension (courtesy of Transport for London)

l Colwyn Bay Waterfront Project - Phase 2 (courtesy of Conwy County Borough Council)
l Frodsham Windfarm (courtesy of Cheetham Hill Construction Limited)
l Queensferry Crossing (courtesy of Transport Scotland)
Page 4 of 187 SD6053 | Issue: 0.1 | Issue date: 19/11/2020

CEEQUAL Version 6 | International Projects Contents
Contents
CEEQUAL Version 6 1
Terms and conditions 3
Acknowledgements 4
Contents 5
About BRE Global Limited 7
About this document 8
Introduction 9
About CEEQUAL 9
Objectives of CEEQUAL 9
Other CEEQUAL schemes 9
Other BREEAM schemes 9
Using this document 10
Categories and assessment issues in CEEQUAL 11
Scope 12
Project types 12
Assessment stages 12
Assessment types 13
Verification and certification points 14
Subprojects 14
System boundaries 15
Scoring and rating 16
Rating levels 16
Minimum standards 16
Category weightings 17
Assessment issues and credits 17
Prerequisites 18
Innovation credits 18
Evidence requirements 18
Calculating a CEEQUAL rating 19
1 Management 20
1.1 Sustainability leadership 21
1.2 Environmental management 26
1.3 Responsible construction management 32
1.4 Staff and supply chain social governance 34
1.5 Whole life costing 37

Contents CEEQUAL Version 6 | International Projects
2 Resilience 38
2.1 Risk assessment and mitigation 39
2.2 Flooding and surface water run-off 46
2.3 Future needs 50
3 Communities and stakeholders 54
3.1 Consultation and engagement 55
3.2 Wider social benefits 60
3.3 Wider economic benefits 65
4 Land use and ecology 68
4.1 Land use and value 69
4.2 Land contamination and remediation 75
4.3 Protection of biodiversity 81
4.4 Change and enhancement of biodiversity 89
4.5 Long-term management of biodiversity 93
5 Landscape and historic environment 95
5.1 Landscape and visual impact 96
5.2 Heritage assets 103
6 Pollution 111
6.1 Water pollution 112
6.2 Air, noise and light pollution 116
7 Resources 122
7.1 Strategy for resource efficiency 123
7.2 Reducing whole life carbon emissions 130
7.3 Environmental impact of construction products 134
7.4 Circular use of construction products 140
7.5 Responsible sourcing of construction products 150
7.6 Construction waste management 154
7.7 Energy use 160
7.8 Water use 167
8 Transport 173
8.1 Transport networks 174
8.2 Construction logistics 178
Innovation 184
Innovation 185
Glossary 187

CEEQUAL Version 6 | International Projects About BRE Global Limited
About BRE Global Limited

BRE Global Limited (part of the BRE Group) is an independent third-party approvals body offering certification of fire,
security, and sustainability products and services to an international market.
BRE Global Limited's mission is to 'Protect People, Property and the Planet'.
We aim to achieve this by:
1. Researching and writing standards.

2. Testing and certification in the areas of fire, electronics, security, and sustainability.
3. Developing world-leading sustainability assessment methods.
4. Undertaking research and consultancy for clients and regulators.
5. Promulgating standards and knowledge throughout the industry through publications and events.
6. Developing and delivering training.
BRE Global Limited's product testing and approvals are carried out by recognised experts in our world-renowned
testing laboratories.
BRE Global Limited is custodian of a number of world-leading brands including:
l BREEAM - the world's leading environmental assessment method for buildings.

l CEEQUAL - the evidence-based sustainability assessment, rating and certification scheme for civil
engineering, infrastructure, landscaping and public realm works.
l Loss Prevention Certification Board (LPCB) - for approval of fire and security products and services.
BRE Global Limited is a trading subsidiary of the BRE Trust, the registered research and education charity which owns
the BRE Group.
BRE Global Limited
Bucknalls Lane
Watford
Hertfordshire
WD25 9XX
T +44 (0)333 321 8811

F +44 (0)1923 664 910
[email protected]
www.breglobal.com
www.greenbooklive.com

About this document CEEQUAL Version 6 | International Projects
About this document

This document is the technical manual for CEEQUAL for Projects. It describes a sustainability performance standard
against which civil engineering, infrastructure, landscaping, and public realm projects outside the UK and Ireland can
be assessed for a CEEQUAL rating.
This document is intended for use by trained and qualified CEEQUAL Assessors and Verifiers in accordance with the
procedural and operational requirements of CEEQUAL.
This technical manual replaces CEEQUAL for Projects Version 5.2 (issued on 23 December 2015).
Issues and revisions

This document is subject to revision and can be re-issued from time to time by BRE Global Limited. A schedule of the
publication date for each issue is provided below.
Document reference Issue number Issue date

SD6053 0.0 30/09/2019
0.1 (current) 19/11/2020
Schedule of changes
Issue 0.1
Section Description of change
All New online format and revised PDF format
Corrected typographical errors
Corrected or removed broken links
About this document Deleted section: 'Status of CEEQUAL Version 6'

CEEQUAL Version 6 | International Projects Introduction
Introduction
About CEEQUAL
CEEQUAL is the sustainability assessment and rating methodology initiated by the Institution of Civil Engineers (ICE)
for the assessment of all types of civil engineering, infrastructure, landscaping and public realm projects and
contracts. CEEQUAL was launched publicly in 2003 with Version 2 of the methodology and has been progressively
updated and upgraded to broaden and deepen the assessments.
As of 1 November 2015, CEEQUAL Ltd. was acquired by BRE Global Limited and CEEQUAL is now part of the
BREEAM family of schemes.
Objectives of CEEQUAL
The objectives of CEEQUAL are to:
l Create a climate of sustainability awareness - and of continuous improvement - in the profession and
industry.
l Promote the importance of setting and delivering a sustainability-driven strategy for the project or contract
being assessed.
l Promote improved sustainability performance in project or contract specification, design and construction.
l Recognise and promote the attainment of high economic, environmental and social performance in all forms
of civil engineering - infrastructure, landscaping and the public realm works.
Other CEEQUAL schemes

CEEQUAL is available as two schemes:
l CEEQUAL for Projects for civil engineering, infrastructure, landscaping and public realm works.
l CEEQUAL for Term Contracts for maintenance of infrastructure networks and assets.
CEEQUAL for Projects is divided into two editions:
l UK & Ireland
l International
Other BREEAM schemes

BRE Global Limited is the scheme operator of BREEAM, HQM, and CEEQUAL in the UK. We develop and operate
schemes designed to assess the sustainability performance of buildings or infrastructure assets at various stages in
the life cycle. These include:
l BREEAM Communities for the master-planning of a larger community of buildings.

l BREEAM New Construction for new build non-domestic buildings.
l BREEAM In-Use for existing non-domestic buildings in-use.
l BREEAM Refurbishment and Fit-Out for domestic and non-domestic building fit-outs and refurbishments.
l HQM for new build domestic buildings

Introduction CEEQUAL Version 6 | International Projects
Using this document

This document is structured in three main parts:
l Scope: describes the types of infrastructure project that this version of the CEEQUAL scheme can be applied
to. The scope section can be used by clients and Assessors to check whether this is the correct scheme to use
for their project.
l Scoring and rating: describes how the CEEQUAL rating is calculated and includes information on the rating
level benchmarks, minimum standards, and category weightings.
l Categories and assessment issues: presents the assessment issues in CEEQUAL organised by category. Each
issue defines a level of performance (the assessment criteria) against which the assessed project
demonstrates compliance (using appropriate project information, i.e. evidence) in order to achieve CEEQUAL
credits.
Each assessment issue contains:
l Aim: outlines the objective of the issue and the impact it measures or mitigates.
l Assessment scope: indicates how to apply the issue for different types of assessment and project-specific
circumstances.
l Credit summary: indicates the number of credits available for each assessment criteria at each assessment
stage (strategy, design, construction).
l Assessment criteria: the requirements of the issue and the means by which the issue aim is achieved. Where
the project complies with all or some of the relevant criteria, as determined by the Assessor, the associated
number of credits can be awarded.
l Guidance: provides supporting information on the interpretation and application of the assessment criteria.
The guidance is informative only and the exact approach taken will depend on the nature, complexity and
context of the project.
l Evidence: suggests types of project information that could be provided to demonstrate performance against
the assessment criteria and justify the credits awarded. This guidance is informative only, given the range of
assets to which CEEQUAL can be applied, the exact evidence types could be different to those stated.
Where necessary, some assessment issues also include:
l Definitions: any specific definition of terms used in the assessment issue.

l Additional information: sources of additional information that may be of use in addressing the issue.

CEEQUAL Version 6 | International Projects Introduction
Categories and assessment issues in CEEQUAL

The CEEQUAL Version 6 technical manual contains thirty assessment issues arranged in eight categories, as shown in
Table 1 below.
Table 1 Categories and assessment issues in CEEQUAL Version 6

Category Assessment issues
1 Management 1.1 Sustainability leadership
1.2 Environmental management
1.3 Responsible construction management
1.4 Staff and supply chain social governance
1.5 Whole life costing
2 Resilience 2.1 Risk assessment and mitigation
2.2 Flooding and surface water run-off
2.3 Future needs
3 Communities and stakeholders 3.1 Consultation and engagement
3.2 Wider social benefits
3.3 Wider economic benefits
4 Land use and ecology 4.1 Land use and value
4.2 Land contamination and remediation
4.3 Protection of biodiversity
4.4 Change and enhancement of biodiversity
4.5 Long-term management of biodiversity
5 Landscape and historic 5.1 Landscape and visual impact
environment 5.2 Heritage assets
6 Pollution 6.1 Water pollution
6.2 Air, noise and light pollution
7 Resources 7.1 Strategy for resource efficiency
7.2 Reducing whole life carbon emissions
7.3 Environmental impact of construction products
7.4 Circular use of construction products
7.5 Responsible sourcing of construction products
7.6 Construction waste management
7.7 Energy use
7.8 Water use
8 Transport 8.1 Transport networks
8.2 Construction logistics

Scope CEEQUAL Version 6 | International Projects
Scope
Project types
CEEQUAL for Projects can be used on any infrastructure project that involves the construction of new assets or
refurbishment of existing assets. It does not include assessment at the operation or maintenance stage. CEEQUAL for
Term Contracts should be used to assess the maintenance of assets or the construction of small repetitive works.
CEEQUAL for Projects can be used on any type of civil engineering, infrastructure, landscaping or public realm
project. This includes the construction or refurbishment of assets such as roads, railways, ports, wind farms, flood
alleviation schemes, wastewater treatment works, and utilities, plus specialist projects such as demolition or
remediation works.
Where an infrastructure project includes occupied buildings, these buildings should be assessed using an
appropriate BREEAM scheme unless the building is deemed to be an ancillary part of an infrastructure project (e.g. a
waiting room on a station platform). Structures that cover industrial or process plants are not deemed to be
buildings. If in doubt, please contact the CEEQUAL team at [email protected].
This International edition is designed for use on projects anywhere outside the UK and Ireland.
Assessment stages
CEEQUAL Version 6 can be used to assess and rate the sustainability performance of infrastructure projects at the
following stages:
l Strategy
l Design, or Interim Design
l Construction
The requirements that are assessed at each stage, and the credits available, are detailed in the 'Scoring' tables at the
beginning of each assessment issue. The requirements at each stage are broadly intended to align with the project
stages shown in Figure 1 below.
The exact timing of the assessment, verification, and certification of each stage is not fixed and can be chosen based
on the project's requirements and procurement route. Where there are actions given in the scheme that must be
completed within a specific timeframe then these are stated as part of the assessment criteria.
Figure 1 Assessment stages in CEEQUAL Version 6 against typical project stages (from the UK BIM Task Group Digital
Plan of Work)

CEEQUAL Version 6 | International Projects Scope
Assessment types
There are five different assessment types that can be conducted using CEEQUAL Version 6. The assessment stages
included within the scope of each of the five assessment types is shown in Table 2 below.
Table 2 Assessment types in CEEQUAL Version 6

Assessment type Assessment stages included in scope of assessment
Strategy Design Construction
Whole Project
Strategy & Design
Design only
Design & Construction
Construction only
Whole Project
The Whole Project assessment is applied for jointly by of on behalf of the Client, Designer and Principal Contractor
(s), with the final verification and certification completed a the end of construction. This assessment type should be
used whenever a client specifies that a CEEQUAL assessment be undertaken so that their role in the project can be
assessed alongside those of the Designer and Contractor. Whole Project assessments can also optionally include
assessments of the strategy stage, design stage, or interim design stage.
Strategy & Design
The Strategy & Design assessment is for a joint application by the Client and Designer and is available before
construction has started. This could be in a situation where approval for the construction stage has not yet been
secured or where the contractor does not wish to participate in a Whole Project assessment.
Design only
The Design only assessment is intended for lead Designer(s) and enables the Designer to secure experience of
CEEQUAL without the involvement of the other parties to the project or where the Designer wishes to gain
recognition for their contribution to a project when the Client and Contractor do not wish to participate.
Design & Construction
The Design & construction assessment is for a joint application by the lead Contractor(s) and the project Designer(s)
and can be used where the Designer and Contractor wish to gain recognition for their contribution to a project
when the Client does not wish to participate.
Construction only
The Construction only assessment is intended for lead Contractor(s) and enables a Contractor to secure experience
of CEEQUAL without the involvement of the other parties to the contract or where the Contractor wishes to gain
recognition for their contribution to a project when the Client and Designer do not wish to participate.

Scope CEEQUAL Version 6 | International Projects
Verification and certification points

As a minimum, a project must be verified once at the end of its scope for an assessment to be certified. This
mandatory verification will cover all assessment stages within the scope of the assessment. For example, a Design
only assessment must be verified at end of design and a Whole Project assessment must be verified at the end of
construction.
All the other verification points are optional. These optional verification points are designed to allow projects to
measure performance over the course of the project or at key milestones, including planning, tendering, or the end
of detailed design. As an example, a Whole Project assessment can be optionally verified at the end of design, with
both the strategy and design stages included in the verification, and then complete the mandatory verification at the
end of construction (which would cover the construction stage only).
Table 3 below shows the different mandatory and optional verification points for each type of assessment in
CEEQUAL Version 6.
Interim Design stage certification is only available as part of a Whole Project assessment. The Interim Design
assessment is flexible and can be completed at any point during the design stage. It is intended to be undertaken at
the point a client lets a tender for a design and construct contract. With the Interim Design certification, it is possible
to defer design credits to the final design stage to cover design activities that will be part of the tendered contract.
Table 3 Verification points in CEEQUAL Version 6 (O - Optional, M - Mandatory)

Assessment type Assessment stage
Whole Project O (interim) O O M
Strategy & Design O M
Design only M
Design & Construction O M
Construction only M
Subprojects
For many infrastructure projects the criteria in the scheme can be applied to a whole project to give a single overall
score and rating. However, for other infrastructure projects, such as some nationally significant infrastructure
projects, it may be more appropriate to split the project into a series of subprojects and assess these individually.
When a project uses the latter approach, the strategy criteria should still be assessed for the whole project. The score
achieved at the strategy stage is transferred to each subproject and the design and construction criteria assessed at a
subproject level. The strategy stage score for the whole project is then added to the scores at the design and
construction stages for the subproject resulting in an overall score for the subproject assessment. Whole projects
may be split where the sustainability outcomes for different subprojects may be different. For example, where:
1. Different project teams or contractors are developing sections of the project and therefore are approaching
design or construction in a different way across the project.
2. The project is assessed across numerous sites (e.g. linear projects) where the impacts of the project will have
varying impact on the sustainability issues covered within this scheme.
Where a client wishes to split their project for a reason not listed above (for example in the case of separately
tendered enabling works), BRE Global Limited should be contacted.
Once a project is completed all subproject scores are amalgamated based on contract values to give a rating for the
overall project.

CEEQUAL Version 6 | International Projects Scope
System boundaries
Infrastructure assets exist as part of a complex system-of-systems and this means that the boundary of a CEEQUAL
assessment - what is included or excluded - is not always immediately obvious. It is necessary to establish this system
boundary for CEEQUAL assessments to provide a fair, accurate, and comparable assessment of the design and
construction of new infrastructure assets.
Due to the variety of activities and impacts that are addressed within the scheme, CEEQUAL does not define a single,
overall boundary for a project (or subproject). Instead, the necessary boundaries vary by assessment issue. These are
defined within the technical requirements of the scheme by one or more of the following:
l Explicit geographical, temporal, or functional limits

l National or international standards
l National industry or government best practice guidance
l Specific CEEQUAL methodologies
l Specific minimum requirements for content or activities
l Consultation with relevant stakeholders
l Deferral to the judgement of a suitably qualified professional
l The judgement of the CEEQUAL Assessor and project team with verification from the CEEQUAL Verifier.
The adopted boundaries are designed to support the individual issue aims and the overall aims and objectives of this
CEEQUAL scheme. In some cases, there is greater flexibility in the definitions so that assessments remain feasible or
so that unforeseen scenarios are not inappropriately excluded.
Where judgement is required to establish a boundary, either from a CEEQUAL Assessor or a suitably qualified
professional, then the following questions should be considered:
l Does including this within the assessment support the issue aim?
l Will including this provide a more accurate reflection of how the assessment demonstrates achievement of
this issue?
l Is the inclusion of this feasible, justifiable, and proportional?
In some cases, it is appropriate to simplify boundaries to ensure that an assessment remains proportional to the
scale of a project and its associated impacts. The boundaries as currently defined within CEEQUAL are often scalable
in this way, including where the decision has been deferred to the judgement of a suitably qualified professional. In
some instances, the method of establishing the boundary can be particularly complex or challenging (e.g. require
specialist expertise) and alternative requirements are given for projects where this level of complexity is not
appropriate.

Scoring and rating CEEQUAL Version 6 | International Projects
Scoring and rating
Rating levels
The rating levels for projects assessed using CEEQUAL Version 6 are given in Table 4 below. This is the first version of
CEEQUAL to include an Outstanding rating.
Table 4 Rating levels in CEEQUAL Version 6

CEEQUAL rating Overall score, %
Outstanding ≥ 90
Excellent ≥ 75
Very Good ≥ 60
Good ≥ 45
Pass ≥ 30
Unclassified ˂ 30
Minimum standards
CEEQUAL Version 6 introduces minimum standards of performance to ensure fundamental issues are not
overlooked in the achievement of specific ratings. Where applicable, minimum standards must be met for a given
rating to be awarded. The minimum standards in CEEQUAL Version 6 are currently limited to the Outstanding rating
only and are given in Table 5 below.
This is the first version of CEEQUAL to include minimum standards and more will be considered in later versions.
Table 5 Minimum standards in CEEQUAL Version 6

Rating level Assessment issue Assessment criteria Minimum standard
Outstanding 2.1 Risk assessment and 2.1.2 Identifying All credits for 2.1.2 and
mitigation dependencies (fixed) 2.1.3 achieved (84 credits)
2.1.3 Communicating
dependencies (fixed)
4.4 Change and 4.4.1 Change in ecological No net loss of ecological
enhancement of value value (20 credits)
biodiversity
7.2 Reducing whole life 7.2.2 Independent third- Carbon management
carbon emissions party certification of process independently
carbon management third-party certified to PAS
2080 (9/18/27 credits)
7.4 Circular use of 7.4.2 Business models for At least one business
construction products a circular economy – model has been
implemented implemented (2 credits)

CEEQUAL Version 6 | International Projects Scoring and rating
Category weightings
Weightings are a fundamental part of any sustainability assessment method. They provide a means of defining and
ranking the relative impact of different sustainability categories by taking account of the scale of impact and
influence that projects under assessment typically have on various sustainability issues. CEEQUAL uses an explicit
weighting system to determine the overall CEEQUAL score. The credits given in each of the assessment issues within
this document include the weightings shown in Table 6 below.
The weightings have been derived from an assessment of both CEEQUAL Version 5 and BREEAM Infrastructure (Pilot)
weightings with adjustments based on how the scope of each section has changed in CEEQUAL Version 6.
Where necessary, these weightings may be adjusted to suit specific national or regional contexts through completion
of a formal weightings exercise. For more details please contact BRE Global Limited.
Table 6 Category weightings in CEEQUAL Version 6

Category Category weighting, %
Management 11
Resilience 12
Communities and stakeholders 11
Land use and ecology 12
Landscape and historic environment 9
Pollution 8
Resources
Materials, including waste 16
Energy and carbon (operational) 4
Energy and carbon (construction) 5
Water use 4
Transport 8
Assessment issues and credits

The CEEQUAL Version 6 technical manual consists of thirty assessment issues arranged in eight categories. Each
assessment issue addresses a specific sustainability issue.
There are 5000 credits in total within the scheme. The number of credits available in each assessment issue varies
and this generally reflects the importance of mitigating the impact of the assessment issue relative to the other
issues in the category. For some criteria, the number of credits available is based on a sliding scale (or benchmark)
with progressively higher standards of performance rewarded with a higher number of credits.
In addition to category scores, the overall score, and the final CEEQUAL rating, verified against individual assessment
issues also provides users with a credible set of key performance indicators for a range of impacts across the project
life cycle.

Scoring and rating CEEQUAL Version 6 | International Projects
Prerequisites
Prerequisites are included at the start of some CEEQUAL assessment issues and must be achieved in order to award
any credits within that assessment issue.
Prerequisites differ from minimum standards in that they do not directly influence the overall CEEQUAL rating, but
they do influence the achievement of credits within an assessment issue.
Table 7 Prerequisites in CEEQUAL Version 6

Category Assessment issue Prerequisite
4 Land use and 4.3 Protection of biodiversity 4.3.1 Prerequisite: Surveys for protected species
ecology 4.3.2 Prerequisite: Injurious or invasive species
7 Resources 7.5 Responsible sourcing of 7.5.1 Prerequisite: Legal and sustainable timber
construction products
7.6 Construction waste 7.6.1 Prerequisite: Duty of care (fixed)
management 7.6.2 Prerequisite: Permitting for waste treated or used
on site
7.6.3 Prerequisite: Hazardous waste
Innovation credits
CEEQUAL seeks to support innovation within the construction industry and its supply chain. One way it does this is
through the availability of additional credits to recognise sustainability related benefits or performance levels not
currently recognised by standard CEEQUAL assessment issues and criteria. This rewards developments that go
beyond best practice in a particular aspect of sustainability.
Awarding credits for innovation enables clients and project teams to add to their overall CEEQUAL score and helps to
support the market for new innovative technologies, design, or construction practices.
Innovation credits can be achieved by the CEEQUAL Assessor applying to BRE Global Limited to have a technology,
feature, design, product, construction method, or process recognised as 'innovative'. If the application is successful,
and compliance is subsequently demonstrated, then an innovation credit may be awarded.
Each innovation credit achieved adds 1% to an asset's overall score. The maximum number of innovation credits that
can be awarded for any one asset is 10. Therefore, the maximum additional score available from innovation credits is
10%.
Innovation credits can be awarded regardless of the final CEEQUAL rating (i.e. they can be awarded at any CEEQUAL
rating level) however the overall rating will be capped at 100%.
Evidence requirements
For credits to be awarded in CEEQUAL, evidence must be provided to demonstrate that all relevant criteria in the
scheme have been met. Example evidence sources are listed in each assessment issue for guidance. Appropriate
evidence for a project may be agreed between the CEEQUAL Assessor and Verifier.

CEEQUAL Version 6 | International Projects Scoring and rating
Calculating a CEEQUAL rating

CEEQUAL ratings must be determined by CEEQUAL Assessors using the appropriate assessment tool. Only certified
assessments can claim a CEEQUAL rating.
An example CEEQUAL score and rating calculation is given in Table 8 below.
Table 8 Example score and rating calculation for CEEQUAL Version 6

Category Category Credits Credits Credits Credits
weighting, % available available achieved achieved, %
(max.) (scoping)
Management 11% 550 492 411 83.5%
Resilience 12% 600 526 453 86.1%
Communities and stakeholders 11% 550 480 445 92.7%
Land use and ecology 12% 600 550 502 91.3%
Landscape and historic environment 9% 450 212 212 100%
Pollution 8% 400 369 340 92.1%
Resources
Materials, including waste 16% 800 725 703 97.0%
Energy and carbon (operational) 4% 200 101 92 91.1%
Energy and carbon (construction) 5% 250 188 173 92.0%
Water use 4% 200 138 122 88.4%
Transport 8% 400 341 267 78.3%
TOTAL 100% 5000 4122 3720 90.2%
Innovation 500 - - 2.00%
CEEQUAL score 92.2%
Minimum standards achieved Yes
CEEQUAL rating Outstanding

1 Management CEEQUAL Version 6 | International Projects
1 Management
Summary
The Management category considers how sustainability issues are incorporated into the overall management of the
project. It covers the principles of sustainable development and the management of environmental and social
performance throughout the planning, design and construction of a project.
Category summary table

Assessment issues Credits available
1.1 Sustainability leadership 173
1.2 Environmental management 254
1.3 Responsible construction management 36
1.4 Staff and supply chain social governance 60
1.5 Whole life costing 27
550

CEEQUAL Version 6 | International Projects 1 Management
1.1 Sustainability leadership
Aim
To ensure the adoption of sustainable development principles and the consideration of environmental and social
issues throughout project planning, design, and construction.
Assessment scope
Only criteria listed in the table below can be scoped out of assessments. All other criteria are fixed.
Assessment criteria Scoping guidance

1.1.3 Selection process for Scope out for Design Only Assessments where the Designer has no input to the
designers and contractors Contractor selection process.
1.1.6 Environmental targets for There may be circumstances where it is appropriate to scope out this criteria, for
key sub-contractors example if there are no sub-contractors involved.
1.1.7 Sustainability targets for Scope out if the scheme concerned is intrinsically not 'operable', such as flood
operation defence banks.
1.1.8 Workforce consultation on The decision to scope out will depend on the nature, scale, location and context
sustainability performance of the project. And on the interests and responsibilities of the parties to the
project.
1.1.9 Communicating best The decision to scope out will depend on the nature, scale, location and context
practice of the project. And on the interests and responsibilities of the parties to the
project.
Credit summary
Assessment criteria Strategy Design Construction
1.1.1 Principles of sustainable development (fixed) 19 12 4
1.1.2 Construction management strategy (fixed) 5 6
(up to)
1.1.3 Selection process for designers and contractors 24 12
1.1.4 Environmental and social performance in contracts 20
(fixed)
1.1.5 Sustainability targets for construction (fixed) 12 (up to)
1.1.6 Environmental targets for key sub-contractors 12 (up to)
1.1.7 Sustainability targets for operation 16
1.1.8 Workforce consultation on sustainability performance 16
1.1.9 Communicating best practice 5 5 5
Assessment criteria
1.1.1 Principles of sustainable development (fixed) Str Des Con
1.1.1.1 The project team has actively considered the principles of sustainable 19 12 4
development in the planning, design and construction of the project.
1.1.2 Construction management strategy (fixed) Str Des Con

1.1.2.1 The project team has actively adopted a sustainability-driven approach 5 6
to the development of the construction management plan for the project.

1.1.3 Selection process for designers and contractors Str Des Con
1.1.3.1 The selection process for (i) the principal Designer, (ii) the principal 24 (up to) 12
Contractor, and (iii) the key sub-constractor(s) included past environmental and
social performance as one of the evaluation criteria.
Role appointed by selection process Credits (each) Assessment

stage
(i) Principal Designer 12 Strategy or
(ii) Principal Contractor 12 Design
(iii) Key sub-contractor(s) 12 Construction
(fixed)
1.1.4 Environmental and social performance in contracts Str Des Con
1.1.4.1 The contract requirements for the Designers and Contractors expressly 20
included:
a. achievement of specified environmental and social performance; and

b. a requirement to monitor and report on environmental and social
performance during the contract.
1.1.5 Sustainability targets for construction (fixed) Str Des Con

1.1.5.1 During the concept and design process, specific targets have been set 12 (up to)
for the environmental and social performance of the project during
construction.
1.1.5.2 During the construction stage, progress towards the targets has been monitored, reported, and shared with
the staff and workforce.
Sustainability targets for construction Credits

(a) Targets set, but no formal monitoring in place. 6
(b) Targets set and progress monitored, reported, and shared at the construction stage. 12
1.1.6 Environmental targets for key sub-contractors Str Des Con

1.1.6.1 Relevant key environmental objectives and performance targets have 12 (up to)
been set for key sub-constractors and they have been monitored against
performance.
Environmental targets for key sub-contractors Credits

(a) Targets set, but no formal monitoring in place. 6
(b) Targets set and progress monitored, reported, and shared with the staff. 12
1.1.7 Sustainability targets for operation Str Des Con

1.1.7.1 During the design process, specific targets have been set for the 16
environmental and social performance of the project during operation and
there is a monitoring programme in place for the operational phase.
1.1.8 Workforce consultation on sustainability performance Str Des Con

1.1.8.1 Ongoing engagement or two-way dialogue between project staff and 16
the construction workforce has been undertaken with regards to management
of environmental and social issues and the suggestions from these discussions
have been considered in the construction stage.

1.1.9 Communicating best practice Str Des Con

1.1.9.1 At each project stage, the project team has shared any innovation or 5 5 5
best practice in sustainability-driven management and practice with other parts
of the civil engineering sector or other relevant sectors.
Guidance
Principles of sustainable development (fixed) (1.1.1)
The incorporation of sustainable development principles within a project requires the consideration of a number of
different issues. These can include effects of the project on the local environment, impacts on society and the
economic impacts of a project on the local community, both during the construction of the project and its
subsequent operation and eventual decommissioning. A number of these issues are covered in more detail by other
requirements within CEEQUAL, so what this criterion is looking for is whether there is an overarching objective
within the project team to consider the broader concepts of sustainable development within the project decision-
making.
Further guidance on the principles of sustainable development can be found in the Royal Academy of Engineering's
guide Engineering for Sustainable Development: Guiding principles (2005), which is available online at
https://www.raeng.org.uk/publications/reports/engineering-for-sustainable-development.
Construction management strategy (fixed) (1.1.2)

The incorporation of sustainability-driven principles for a construction management strategy requires the
consideration of a number of different but inter-related issues. These can include but are not limited to:
l effects of the construction processes on the environment and neighbours;

l materials selection and sourcing;
l transport of people and physical resources;
l wider impacts on the community locally or regionally, depending on the project's geographic scale and
timescale; and
l the economic impacts of a project on the local or regional community.
Development of the strategy should start during the development of the project and be incorporated into the
outline Construction Sustainability (or Environmental) Management Plan that should be handed over by the Client
and Designer to the chosen Contractor for further development.
A number of these issues are covered in more detail by other criteria in other sections within CEEQUAL. This criterion
requires an overarching approach within the project team to consider and adopt appropriately the broader concepts
of sustainability and sustainable development in planning the execution of the construction stage.
Further guidance on the principles of sustainable development can be found in the Royal Academy of Engineering’s
guide Engineering for Sustainable Development: Guiding principles (2005), which is available online at
https://www.raeng.org.uk/publications/reports/engineering-for-sustainable-development.
Environmental and social performance in contracts (fixed) (1.1.4)

It is well known that different forms of contract can significantly influence the behaviour of the contracting parties,
especially to those issues that are implied as being necessary rather than expressly stated. What is being sought here
is that environmental and social performance requirements are expressly stated so that there is no doubt as to those
requirements and the Designers and Contractors are properly resourced to deliver them.
Social performance could relate to a wide variety of issues, but some generic examples could include:
l levels of engagement with the local community on consultation issues;

l engagement with local schools to raise awareness of civil engineering;
l contribution to the local economy, for instance through use of local labour on the project;
l enhancement to community facilities as part of the contract;
l requiring express commitments to minimising nuisance to neighbours within the constraints of the necessary
construction processes.

Note that this question only requires evidence that the Client is specifying environmental and social performance
issues in contract requirements. Opportunities for the Designer and Contractor to score for their own setting of
targets is covered in 1.1.5 and 1.1.6. Actual monitoring and reporting mechanisms are also covered in 1.1.5 and
1.1.6. Achievement is covered in other sections of this manual.
Sustainability targets for construction (fixed) (1.1.5)

Targets should be quantifiable and where possible refer to timescales (i.e. SMART targets: Specific, Measurable,
Achievable, Realistic, Timely).
Best practice suggests that environmental and social performance is highest if the Client is involved in setting the
requirements for the contract. However, if the Client does not specify this then there are still opportunities for the
Designer to influence what happens during the construction stage.
It should be noted that the Client requirement is covered in 1.1.4. If this has been scored, then this requirement is
about evidencing that the contract requirements have been translated into practice on the project and
communicated. If 1.1.4 has not been scored, then evidence for this requirement also needs to demonstrate that
appropriate targets are being set in relation to the significant aspects identified in 1.1.4.
Sustainability targets for operation (1.1.7)

Targets have to be set for operating the completed works and a monitoring programme, to be undertaken once
construction is complete, must be in place in order to score. Target setting without monitoring progress is
considered to be of little or no use.
Operational targets are likely to relate to quantifiable measures, such as waste production, energy consumption,
carbon dioxide production, natural resource consumption or pollution prevention. For example, an operational
target might state that 50% of waste produced in tonnes during the first year of operation is to be recovered
through either re-use, recycling or composting. Targets may also cover maintenance issues such as paints to be used
or how to deal with waste arising from maintenance. Note that compliance with legislation cannot be regarded as an
appropriate operational target.
Common minimal levels include targets for waste management and energy/CO2 reduction in design or in use.
Targets need to be 'measurable' so that they can be monitored and measured against. Evidence needs to
demonstrate that these have been 'signed up to' by those responsible for the project during operation. This could be
completed during a formal meeting or similar, which could be evidenced by meeting minutes.
Workforce consultation on sustainability performance (1.1.8)

Experience so far on CEEQUAL-assessed projects indicates that the CEEQUAL process often triggers improvements to
practice during both design and construction. This criterion focuses on steps at the construction stage within the
project team for dialogue between project staff and the construction workforce that is aimed at identifying and
communicating the lessons learnt and at seeking out further improvements that can be made.
Communicating best practice (1.1.9)

This is not aimed at trying to persuade project team members to disclose commercially competitive information
freely. Rather, it is aimed at rewarding project team members who prepare papers in professional journals or report
innovation in case studies prepared for CEEQUAL or other websites that promote innovation in construction, so that
at least the principles of the best practice or innovation are made more widely known and therefore potentially
exploitable by other project teams.
The aim is to encourage and reward CEEQUAL users that:
l report and demonstrate a practice that has gone beyond current engineering practice; and
l is widely distributed and can be picked up by other parties and applied.
For innovation, the project team needs to demonstrate that a practice is being done for the first time rather than
'best practice' that is a further application of actions that have been carried out once.
For the credits to be scored, it is not necessary to demonstrate that the method reported is being used by other
parties, but that effective dissemination has been achieved.

Evidence
Assessment criteria Evidence guidance
1.1.1 Principles of sustainable Evidence could be a sustainable development policy that cascades into a project
development (fixed) sustainability framework for the project. Further evidence that this has received
active consideration could include design team meeting records, or a
sustainability assessment or appraisal report.
1.1.2 Construction management Evidence is likely to be the whole construction plan or specific parts of it, in
strategy (fixed) meeting records, or a sustainability assessment or appraisal report on the
construction stage.
1.1.3 Selection process for Evidence could include supplier appraisals, quality submissions information on
designers and contractors environmental and social issues during tender stage.
1.1.4 Environmental and social Evidence could include output from any contract strategy meetings or reports
performance in contracts (fixed) that show consideration of environmental and social issues as a factor in the
choice of procurement method. Evidence could also include key environmental
and social performance targets within contract and monitoring/reporting
requirements. Simply specifying that a project has applied for a CEEQUAL
assessment, or that a specific rating is achieved, is not considered appropriate
evidence.
1.1.5 Sustainability targets for Evidence could include the setting of targets for achieving or exceeding target
construction (fixed) levels (such as water quality targets) or specifying targets for completion of
work elements to avoid ‘closed’ seasons (such as nesting birds). Evidence must
also be provided to demonstrate that the targets were regularly monitored for
the credits to be awarded.
1.1.6 Environmental targets for Evidence for monitoring of targets could include inspection of sub-contractors
key sub-contractors and continued good performance, toolbox talks, or actual measures such as
waste produced or number of environmental incidents.
1.1.7 Sustainability targets for Evidence needs to demonstrate that such targets have been positively adopted
operation by the design team, for example through project team meeting minutes or
equivalent. Although an Environmental Statement (ES) may include targets or
equivalent statements on a wide range of issues such as operational noise or air
pollution control, the presence of the ES is not considered sufficient evidence
here. Evidence could include targets that set numerical figures to manage and
reduce carbon and energy emissions during the lifetime of the project, commit
to an effective lifecycle waste management, and manage and reduce water use.
Other targets could be set for increasing biodiversity or commitments to
improve social transport links.
1.1.8 Workforce consultation on Evidence could include records of meetings, forums, or toolbox talks, plus site
sustainability performance posters, environmental close calls, good practice reporting, or case studies.
1.1.9 Communicating best Evidence could include briefing sheet(s) published either internally or in
practice industry publications, or presentations to other companies or professional
bodies, or involvement with universities and students in related disciplines. All
parties can get full credits if the project team has created a single joint case
study that meets the criteria.

1.2 Environmental management
Aim
To ensure social and environmental risks or opportunities are identified and appropriately managed throughout
planning, design, and construction.
Assessment scope

1.2.2 Implementing It is unlikely that 1.2.2 and 1.2.3 will ever be scoped out but it is possible that
environmental enhancements and Environmental Statement may not contain any promises of enhancements
1.2.3 Supporting environmental and produce no matters that need including in contract documentation.
benefits in contracts
Credit summary
1.2.1 Environmental impacts and benefits assessment (fixed) 8
1.2.2 Implementing environmental enhancements 24 (up to )
1.2.3 Supporting environmental benefits in contracts 8
1.2.4 Environmental impacts during construction (fixed) 25 (up to)
1.2.5 Environmental and social aspects assessment (fixed) 8 4 4
1.2.6 Co-ordination of environment and social aspects (fixed) 8 8 8
(up to) (up to)
1.2.7 Identification and prioritisation of impacts (fixed) 13 13 13 (up to)
1.2.8 Sustainability management mechanisms (fixed) 4 8 8
1.2.9 Implementation of mechanisms (fixed) 4 8 8
1.2.10 Success of the mechanisms (fixed) 4 8 8
1.2.11 Sustainability training (fixed) 10 10 10
1.2.12 Project team communications (fixed) 4 8 8
Assessment criteria
1.2.1 Environmental impacts and benefits assessment (fixed) Str Des Con
1.2.1.1 The Client or the Designers have undertaken an environmental impacts 8
and benefits assessment of the project on a wider scope than just the project
owners’ interests and appropriate to the nature, scale, design life and location
of the project, including assessments of possible enhancements to the local
environment.
1.2.2 Implementing environmental enhancements Str Des Con

1.2.2.1 The enhancements identified in the environmental impacts and 24 (up to)
benefits assessment have been delivered in the design alongside those for
environmental mitigation and compensation.

Percentage of identified enhancements delivered Credits

(a) 25% or more 6
(b) 50% or more 12
(c) 75% or more 18
(d) 90% or more 24
1.2.3 Supporting environmental benefits in contracts Str Des Con

1.2.3.1 Where appropriate, actions to support the results of the environmental 8
impacts and benefits assessments have been included within relevant contract
documentation.
1.2.4 Environmental impacts during construction (fixed) Str Des Con

1.2.4.1 The Construction Team have undertaken an environmental impacts 25 (up to)
and benefits assessment of the construction stage of the project and used the
results in the development and implementation of the construction
management plan (CMP).
Environmental impacts during construction Credits

(a) Results from an environmental impacts and benefits assessment have been used in the 9
development of the construction management plan.
(b) Environmental aspects of the developed construction management plan have been 25
implemented.
1.2.5 Environmental and social aspects assessment (fixed) Str Des Con
1.2.5.1 There was a documented commitment to consider and assess the 8 4 4
environmental and social aspects of the project.
(fixed)
1.2.6 Co-ordination of environment and social aspects Str Des Con
1.2.6.1 There is clear evidence that a member of the project team was 8 8 8
appointed as responsible for co-ordinating the management of the
environmental and social aspects of the project and was aware of the duties
and responsibilities involved.
(fixed)
1.2.7 Identification and prioritisation of impacts Str Des Con
1.2.7.1 The environmental risks, impacts, and opportunities for environmental 13 (up to) 13 (up to) 13 (up to)
enhancements, and the associated social issues, have been (a) identified and
clearly recorded for each stage and (b) prioritised according to significance.
Identification and prioritisation of impacts Credits (per

stage)
(a) Identified and clearly recorded for each stage 8
(b) Prioritised according to significance 13
(fixed)
1.2.8 Sustainability management mechanisms Str Des Con
1.2.8.1 Appropriate mechanisms have been put in place to manage the 4 8 8
project’s environmental and social risks, impacts and opportunities.
(fixed)
1.2.9 Implementation of mechanisms Str Des Con
1.2.9.1 Regular checks have been made to ensure that the sustainability 4 8 8
management mechanisms have been implemented.

(fixed)
1.2.10 Success of the mechanisms Str Des Con
1.2.10.1 The results (success or otherwise) of the implementation of the 4 8 8
sustainability management mechanisms have been assessed.
1.2.11 Sustainability training (fixed) Str Des Con

1.2.11.1 At each project stage, there has been a programme of training on 10 10 10
environmental and social issues relevant to the project delivered at an
appropriate level for those engaged in the project.
(fixed)
1.2.12 Project team communications Str Des Con
1.2.12.1 At each project stage, all those directly engaged in the project have 4 8 8
been informed of the significant environmental impacts and opportunities, and
associated social issues, of their part or stage of the project.
Guidance
Environmental impacts and benefits assessment (1.2.1)
In many areas of the world, project teams are required by regulations to undertake formal Environmental Impact
Assessments (EIAs) as part of the consents process. However, this is not always a statutory requirement and the
distances beyond the boundaries of the project site within which impacts are assessed can vary widely from one EIA
to another.
It is vital to securing the best sustainability-driven project decisions that EIAs, whether statutorily required or not, are
undertaken within the most appropriate time and geographical boundaries. This is to minimise the chances of
significant adverse impacts that occur remotely from the project being ignored, and to maximise the chances of
environmental enhancements associated with the project being realisable.
Environmental impacts during construction (fixed) (1.2.4)

This criterion is seeking for the Contractor to have actively assessed in advance the environmental aspects and
impacts of the works, including those generated by their supply chain, and planned the works accordingly. Issues
that need to be addressed in such an assessment include but are not necessarily limited to:
l impacts of the production of materials used in the works;

l minimising the use of any hazardous materials to be used in the construction stage;
l minimising water use during construction (consistent with other requirements such as dust control);
l energy consumption and carbon emissions during the construction stage;
l pollution prevention, especially of any water bodies near or under the site;
l impacts on flora and fauna;
l dealing with any contaminated soils or other materials and components on the site;
l dealing with excavation arisings and wastes from the works.
Guidance on these issues is available in the appropriate sections of this manual.
Environmental and social aspects assessment (fixed) (1.2.5)

It is considered vital for the successful management of the environmental and social aspects of a project for the
commitment to their consideration, assessment and delivery to not only be made by the senior management of each
major party to the project but also written down so that it can be readily communicated to project team members
and stakeholders.
Co-ordination of environment and social aspects (fixed) (1.2.6)

Every project, irrespective of size, should have someone designated as being responsible for its environmental and
social aspects. On smaller projects, a member of the project team may be responsible for this along with their other
duties. On larger-scale projects, it is likely to be a dedicated Sustainability or Environmental Manager or Coordinator.
On partnership projects, it may be the same person at each stage.

For the score to be awarded detailed duties and responsibilities in relation to the project must have been set out on
appointment.
Identification and prioritisation of impacts (fixed) (1.2.7)

All adverse environmental risks and impacts of the project – and the associated social issues – should be identified,
as well as positive impacts and opportunities for environmental and social improvements resulting from the project.
The significance of adverse impacts is usually assessed by a combination of the potential severity and the likelihood
of the impact occurring if no action is taken to avoid it. The result of this assessment then enables prioritisation of
risks and impacts according to significance, which assists in setting the priorities for mitigation measures.
The significance of positive impacts and opportunities is similarly assessed according to the expected environmental
benefit and the likelihood of their occurring or being able to be carried out as part of the project. This will then
guide decisions on which of the opportunities the project team should concentrate.
Sustainability management mechanisms (fixed) (1.2.8)

At design stage, ‘appropriate mechanisms’ could be in the form of a Project Environmental Management Plan (PEMP)
or Action Plan with active monitoring of progress against that Plan. However, the fact that an EIA was undertaken for
the project is not regarded as evidence that mechanisms for the management of issues identified in such a study are
being operated effectively and appropriately.
At construction stage, ‘appropriate mechanisms’ could be in the form of a Site Environmental Management Plan
(SEMP) or an Integrated Site Management Plan that includes coverage and management of environmental and social
issues again with active monitoring of progress against that Plan. Such a plan would cover the management of all
significant environmental and social aspects of the construction process and would be drawn up specifically for the
relevant site and project. It should address issues such as minimising nuisance to neighbours, the management of
sub-contractors’ and suppliers’ environmental performance, and training requirements. It should also include
procedures for monitoring its implementation, emergency response plans, and operational control procedures (for
example, for waste disposal and spill prevention).
It is very important that Designers positively seek information on, and get copies of, agreements, commitments and
undertakings made during the consents process and integrate their contents into the design process. Equally,
Contractors need to secure and act on similar information from the consents and design processes that relate to the
construction stage to ensure that commitments made earlier in the project are adhered to and that inappropriate
actions are avoided.
Implementation of mechanisms (fixed) (1.2.9)

Interpretation of ‘regular’ depends on the size of the project and, in particular, the length of time it is predicted to
take. On the majority of projects, a review on a three-monthly basis would be acceptable, but this should be more
frequent on projects or project phases of 6 months or less. If the review period is longer, and this is still considered
acceptable, then it should be justified. In any case, it is essential that the extent of the reviews should be appropriate
to the environmental risks and scale of the project.
On longer-duration or larger projects these checks are likely to include formal internal environmental audits.
However, these may not be appropriate on smaller or shorter duration projects.
The important thing to demonstrate for this criterion is that some form of checking has taken place to ensure the
mechanisms referred to in 1.2.8 have been implemented and are effective. On smaller projects, this could, for
instance, simply be records of reviews in weekly meeting minutes.
Success of the mechanisms (fixed) (1.2.10)

As opposed to the regular checks of implementation referred to in 1.2.9, this criterion asks about the review of the
results of implementation, which implies a further step and a more proactive review, looking at the outcome of the
implemented mechanisms, not just whether they have been undertaken.
Sustainability training (fixed) (1.2.11)

Project-specific environmental training should at a minimum cover the significant environmental impacts and
opportunities identified (see 1.2.7), as well as instructions on how to deal with them. It can also include the issues of
Site Waste Management Plans (SWMP), waste reduction, material resource efficiency, energy performance over the

whole life of the completed works, and water consumption minimisation. These issues can be dealt with in a wide
range of training sessions, including formal courses for project team members, sessions within project team
meetings, or via site inductions and toolbox talks. Resources such as the CIRIA’s Environmental good practice on site
guide (C741, 2015) and its associated pocket book (C762, 2016) provide useful information to support site
environmental management. Records of the should be available.
Project team communications (fixed) (1.2.12)

Assessment of impacts and opportunities (see 1.2.7) must have been carried out to be able to score here.
This would cover the outcome of any EIA or any similar assessment undertaken and can be relayed via contract
documents and invitations to bid, project environmental management plans, method statements, start-up and
progress meetings, or work instructions.
‘All those directly engaged in the project’ includes project management, design team, Contractors and sub-
contractors, and anyone else actively engaged, but not extractive or factory or office sites of suppliers of materials or
services.
Evidence
1.2.1 Environmental impacts and Evidence of the analysis could be in the form of an Environmental Statement
benefits assessment (fixed) (ES) or Environmental Commentary prepared during development of the project
and submitted for the planning and consents processes. It will be necessary to
demonstrate that the scoping and boundary setting for the assessments were
carefully set to maximise the chances of significant adverse impacts that occur
remotely from the project being included.
1.2.2 Implementing Evidence is likely to be in the form of design drawings and design details but
environmental enhancements will also need to be linked to the environmental impacts and benefits
assessment and demonstrate that the design incorporates the enhancements
identified.
1.2.3 Supporting environmental Evidence will be relevant contract clauses.
benefits in contracts
1.2.4 Environmental impacts Evidence will be in the reports of the assessments and in the CMP or equivalent.
during construction (fixed)
1.2.5 Environmental and social Evidence could include a written commitment from the Project’s Directors, a
aspects assessment (fixed) Project Environmental Policy Statement, a Project Sustainability Statement, or
objectives and targets. However, a general Company Environmental Policy
Statement is not sufficient, unless it includes a specific commitment to consider
and assess environmental and social aspects for every project. Additionally,
specifying that a project has applied for a CEEQUAL assessment is not
considered appropriate evidence.
1.2.6 Co-ordination of Evidence could be a formal note of the appointment; records of meetings
environment and social aspects where the role is clearly set out; reports from the identified person to the
(fixed) project team; or an organogram or similar identifying roles and responsibilities
within the project team or project management structure.
1.2.7 Identification and Evidence could be a report on the impact and opportunity assessments,
prioritisation of impacts (fixed) minutes of project team meetings at which the process was undertaken, or the
charts prepared after such discussions. Evidence for the score in the Strategy
and Design columns in a Whole Project Assessment or Strategy & Design
Assessment must demonstrate that this work has been undertaken or specified
by the Client and the outcomes accepted by them.


1.2.8 Sustainability management Evidence could be procedures, flowcharts, checklists or documented control
mechanisms (fixed) measures, and would form part of an Environmental Management System
(EMS) if there were one in place. However, an EMS is not a prerequisite and, in
smaller companies or projects, evidence could be minutes of meetings at which
these issues, and the mechanisms to be used, are discussed and agreed.
Appropriate mechanisms could have been put in place without the existence of
a full EMS. However, they do need to be documented in some form and should
clearly state the steps to be taken and any roles and responsibilities to be
assumed. They also need to match the level of complexity of environmental
issues relevant to the project. The output from an environmental impact
assessment (EIA) that included discussion of how the project’s environmental
issues, impacts and opportunities are to be managed would not be sufficient
evidence to gain the credits for this requirement. Evidence is required that such
EIA outputs have been translated into action.
1.2.9 Implementation of Evidence could be site review meeting minutes, site inspections, checklists, or
mechanisms (fixed) audit reports.
1.2.10 Success of the Evidence could include actions shown as closed off in minutes, close-out of
mechanisms (fixed) audit non-conformance reports, or other evidence demonstrating completion
of actions arising from site inspections as well as evidence that a review that
took place routinely as opposed to being only as a result of a check that has
taken place in 1.2.9. For instance, a standing item in project progress meetings
or reports, which routinely review environmental and social performance and
the success of control mechanisms established, would be acceptable. Evidence
could also include the achievement of appropriate project targets set for
environmental and social performance.
1.2.11 Sustainability training Evidence could include records of site inductions or toolbox talks, more- formal
(fixed) training workshops for the project, briefings or other training on specific issues
for the project (such as on otter holt construction or use of new equipment),
plus workshops with the Client, Designer and project team members to review
and establish environmental risk.
1.2.12 Project team Evidence for the Client could include communication of environmental and
communications (fixed) social impacts and opportunities within tender documents or specifications. For
the Designer, this could include how they have briefed their team on the
environmental and social issues that require consideration or provision of
information in the design drawings, risk register. For the Contractor, it could
include the incorporation of environmental mitigation actions in method
statements, toolbox talks or other site briefings or inductions communicating
the requirements of the SEMP, information posted via site information boards
or similar. For any stage, it could also include more project workshops, such as
on value management and value engineering, that includes consideration of
the environmental and social impacts and opportunities on the project.

1.3 Responsible construction management
Aim
To avoid adverse effects on neighbours and local communities during construction.
Assessment scope

1.3.2 Independent assessment It may be appropriate in limited circumstances to scope out 1.3.2, for example
of considerate behaviour on very short duration projects.
Credit summary
1.3.1 Considerate behaviour (fixed) 16
1.3.2 Independent assessment of considerate behaviour 5
1.3.3 Visual impact during construction (fixed) 15
Assessment criteria
1.3.1 Considerate behaviour (fixed) Str Des Con
1.3.1.1 The project has a policy or code of practice regarding considerate 16
behaviour by construction companies and the policy has been:
a. Communicated to all appropriate people working on the project.

b. Embedded in the project's management system.
1.3.2 Independent assessment of considerate behaviour Str Des Con

1.3.2.1 The implementation of the project's policy or code of practice 5
regarding considerate behaviour has been independently assessed and judged
to be at least satisfactory.
1.3.3 Visual impact during construction (fixed) Str Des Con

1.3.3.1 Measures have been taken to minimise the adverse visual impact of the 15
site during the construction stage.
Guidance
Considerate behaviour (1.3.1, 1.3.2)
If the Contractor has their own policy or Code of Practice, then it needs to cover, at a minimum:
l relations with neighbours;

l communications to neighbours;
l good housekeeping;
l presentation of the site;
l relations with other stakeholders;
l complaints procedures;
l auditing process; and
l commitment to thorough and systematic implementation of the policy.

There is little value in having a policy if it is not then communicated, implemented and monitored. Communication
should be both within the project team and externally to interested stakeholders.
Visual impact during construction (fixed) (1.3.3)

A common complaint about construction sites is that they look a mess. Materials are too often scattered all over the
place along with various items of litter. Proper storage of materials can result not only in a tidier site that is visually
less unpleasant but also in a safer site and can also significantly reduce wastage. Regular clearance of litter makes
the site look tidier and enhances a culture of environmental care amongst staff.
Example measures include appropriate site screening, allocation of stacking areas, tidy storage of materials, a regular
site inspection, litter-pick and site tidy-up, and inspection and cleaning of site hoardings.
Evidence
1.3.1 Considerate behaviour Evidence could be a Code of Practice or Policy statement, registration with an
(fixed) appropriate third-party scheme, plus assessment results.
1.3.2 Independent assessment
of considerate behaviour
1.3.3 Visual impact during These measures could be laid out as part of a SEMP or equivalent. Other
construction (fixed) evidence is required to identify the measures taken and verify their
implementation, for example, site records, photographic evidence, or audit
reports commenting on the site's appearance.

1.4 Staff and supply chain social governance
Aim
To promote ethical employment procedures and processes within organisations across the supply chain.
Assessment scope

- -
Credit summary
1.4.1 Organisational plans and policies for ethical labour 4 4 4
practices (fixed)
1.4.2 Application of ethical labour plans and policies to the 8 (up to) 10
project (fixed)
1.4.3 Monitoring ethical labour practices during construction 18
(fixed)
1.4.4 Independent verification or certification of ethical 4 4 4
labour plans and policies (fixed)
Assessment criteria
1.4.1 Organisational plans and policies for ethical labour practices Str Des Con
(fixed)
4 4 4
1.4.1.1 The project team organisations (client, design team, principal
contractor) each have corporate plans and policies regarding ethical labour
practices.
1.4.1.2 The plans and policies:
a. Are publicly available.

b. Have been signed-off by the company directors (or equivalent).
c. Cover all individuals working permanently or temporarily for the organisation and, in the case of the client
and principal contractor, all workers on the project construction site(s).
d. Include a named individual with specific responsibilities regarding ethical labour practices.
e. Include specific commitments to improve ethical labour practices year on year.
1.4.1.3 Progress against commitments to improve ethical labour practices is regularly reported and made publicly
available.
1.4.2 Application of ethical labour plans and policies to the Str Des Con
project (fixed) 8 (up to) 10
1.4.2.1 The selection process for (i) the design team, (ii) the principal
contractor, and (iii) sub-contractor(s) included performance against their ethical
labour plans and policies as one of the evaluation criteria.
1.4.2.2 The contract requirements for (i) the lead designer(s), (ii) the principal contractor, and (iii) sub-contractor(s)
expressly include achievement of their ethical labour plans and policies on the project.

Application of ethical labour plans and policies Credits Assessment

stage
(i) The client's procurement of design team organisations 2 Strategy or
(ii) The client's procurement of the principal contractor 6 Design
(iii) The principal contractor's procurement of sub-contractors 10 Construction
1.4.3 Monitoring ethical labour practices during construction (fixed) Str Des Con
1.4.3.1 The principal contractor's plans and policies regarding ethical labour 18
practices have been implemented and performance against them has been
regularly monitored throughout the construction stage.
1.4.4 Independent verification or certification of ethical labour Str Des Con

plans and policies (fixed) 4 4 4
1.4.4.1 The project team organisations (client, design team, principal
contractor) have each been verified or certified by an independent third party to
a recognised ethical labour scheme.
1.4.4.2 A summary of the verification or certification report by the independent third party is publicly available.
Guidance
Organisational plans and policies for ethical labour practices (fixed) (1.4.1)
As a minimum, the following items - taken from the Ethical Trading Initiative (ETI) Base Code should be reflected in
the organisation’s plans, policies, or procedures regarding labour practices:
1. Employment is freely chosen

2. Freedom of association and the right to collective bargaining are respected
3. Working conditions are safe and hygienic
4. Child labour shall not be used
5. Living wages are paid
6. Working hours are not excessive
7. No discrimination is practiced
8. Regular employment is provided
9. No harsh or inhumane treatment is allowed
And the following additional items, not included in the ETI Base Code, should also be included as a minimum:
a. Avoidance of bribery and corruption

b. Promotion and support for learning and development
c. Flexible working practices to encourage and allow a healthy and practical life balance
The ETI Base Code is founded on the conventions of the International Labour Organisation (ILO) and is an
internationally recognised code of good labour practice. For more information about the ETI Base Code visit
https://www.ethicaltrade.org/eti-base-code.
The organisation's plans and policies must define how the organisation has interpreted each of the above items and
how they will be monitored and enforced for each country/region it operates in.
The named individual will be someone senior enough within the organisation to be able to act to monitor and
rectify non-compliance. They must be named, and their specific responsibilities defined in the plans and policies.
Application of ethical labour plans and policies to the project (fixed) (1.4.2)
During the selection process for the design team and principal contractor, the clients should require potential project
team organisations to provide an implementation plan showing how their relevant plans and policies (see 1.4.1) will
be specifically met on the project. The organisation(s) implementation plan(s) should then be included in their
appointment contract.

At the construction stage, the principal contractor should require potential sub-contractor organisations to provide
an implementation plan showing how the principal contractor's relevant plans and policies (see 1.4.1) will be
specifically met on the project. The sub-contractor(s) implementation plan(s) should then be included in their
appointment contract.
Monitoring ethical labour practices during construction (fixed) (1.4.3)

As a minimum, the principal contractor must monitor performance against their plans and policies for ethical labour
practices for all workers on site during construction.
These credits can only be awarded if the construction stage credits in 1.4.1 have been awarded.
Independent verification or certification of ethical labour plans and policies (fixed) (1.4.4)
Third party verification or certification at an organisational level is considered best practice and provides assurance
that policies are likely to be applied at a project level.
CEEQUAL currently recognises the ethical labour schemes listed in the table below. If an organisation is verified or
certified to an ethical labour scheme not listed below, please contact BRE Global Limited as soon as possible to apply
for recognition.
Location Scheme name Minimum level

UK BES 6002 Ethical Labour Sourcing Standard Baseline Maturity in all 12 issue areas
Evidence
1.4.1 Organisational plans and Evidence is likely to be found in company policies, reports, and action plans.
policies for ethical labour Evidence could also be an ETI principles of implementation report or a self-
practices (fixed) assessment using the Ethical Labour Sourcing Standard (ELS). Evidence must
demonstrate that the organisation's plans and policies cover all the items listed
in the guidance (as a minimum).
1.4.2 Application of ethical Evidence will be in the form of tender specification documents outlining the
labour plans and policies to the requirements tenderers should demonstrate, evaluation documents that show
project (fixed) how consideration has been given to ethical labour issues, and contractual
requirements for appointed organisations.
1.4.3 Monitoring ethical labour Evidence is likely to be in the form of routine data gathering and reporting.
practices during construction
(fixed)
1.4.4 Independent verification or Evidence could include an organisation's statement of verification against the
certification of ethical labour Ethical Labour Sourcing Standard (ELS) or an issued certificate.
plans and policies (fixed)
Additional information
BES 6002 Ethical Labour Sourcing Standard
The Ethical Labour Sourcing Standard, BES 6002, is a mechanism for demonstrating, via an independent third party,
the maturity of an organisation's ethical labour practices and the organisation's commitment to continuous
improvement. For more information about the ELS visit https://www.bregroup.com/services/standards/ethical-labour-
sourcing-standard/.

1.5 Whole life costing
Aim
To deliver whole life value by ensuring consideration of whole life costing principles throughout planning, design,
and construction.
Assessment scope

- -
Credit summary
1.5.1 Whole life costing (fixed) 8 19
Assessment criteria
1.5.1 Whole life costing (fixed) Str Des Con
1.5.1.1 The Client and the design team have completed a whole life cost 8 19
assessment for the project in line with ISO 15686-5:2017 (or country specific
equivalents).
1.5.1.2 The whole life cost assessment has influenced the design of the project.
Guidance
Whole life costing (fixed) (1.5.1)
The principles of life-cycle costing for construction are set out in the International Standard ISO 15686-5 Buildings
and constructed assets. Service life planning. Life-cycle costing. Where available, projects may use national
implementations of ISO 15686-5.
Having carried out a study, additional credits may follow from appropriate design to allow for efficient or reduced
levels of maintenance, and for ease of deconstruction and recycling at the end of life. These aspects are assessed in
Resources.
Evidence
1.5.1 Whole life costing (fixed) Evidence will need to be in the form of a report from the process, plus evidence
of how this has influenced the design of the project.

2 Resilience CEEQUAL Version 6 | International Projects
2 Resilience
Summary
The Resilience category encourages proactive hazard identification, risk evaluation and risk management for the
asset and the infrastructure system within which it sits. Issues include assessing and mitigating risks from natural
hazards, intentional threats, and climate change plus designing for future needs. The section considers the risks to
the asset and its dependencies and consequently the required asset resilience. Specific environmental risks resulting
from the asset's construction and operation are covered separately in Pollution.

2.1 Risk assessment and mitigation 269
2.2 Flooding and surface water run-off 229
2.3 Future needs 102
600

CEEQUAL Version 6 | International Projects 2 Resilience
2.1 Risk assessment and mitigation
Aim
To assess and mitigate the risks and negative impacts associated with natural hazards, intentional threats and
climate change over the design life of the asset.
Assessment scope

- -
Credit summary
2.1.1 Identifying resilience requirements (fixed) 17
2.1.2 Identifying dependencies (fixed) 21 21
2.1.3 Communicating dependencies (fixed) 21 21
(up to)
2.1.4 Identifying and assessing risks (fixed) 42 21 (up to) 14 (up to)
2.1.5 Communicating risks (fixed) 9 9 9
2.1.6 Resilience plan (fixed) 32 32
Assessment criteria
(fixed)
2.1.1 Identifying resilience requirements Str Des Con
2.1.1.1 Before the end of the strategy stage, the relevant resilience 17
requirements for the project have been identified based on a current risk
assessment for the project (see 2.1.4) and consultation with relevant experts.
(fixed)
2.1.2 Identifying dependencies Str Des Con
2.1.2.1 At strategy and design stages, relevant stakeholders have identified (or 21 21
reviewed):
a. Dependencies associated with the asset and its function(s)

b. The criticality of the asset and its components
(fixed)
2.1.3 Communicating dependencies Str Des Con
2.1.3.1 At each applicable project stage, the identified dependencies and the 21 21
criticality of the asset have been appropriately communicated to relevant
project team members.
(fixed)
2.1.4 Identifying and assessing risks Str Des Con
2.1.4.1 At each project stage, using current project information, risks and 42 (up to) 21 (up to) 14 (up to)
impacts have been identified and assessed (or reviewed and updated) for one
or more resilience topics in accordance with the guidance.

Resilience topic Credits available at each assessment stage

(i) Natural hazards 14 7 7
(ii) Climate change 14 7 -
(iii) Security 14 7 7
(fixed)
2.1.5 Communicating risks Str Des Con
2.1.5.1 At each project stage, the risks and impacts identified in the current 9 9 9
risk assessment have been appropriately communicated to relevant project
team members.
2.1.6 Resilience plan (fixed) Str Des Con

2.1.6.1 During design and construction, using current project information, a 32 32
resilience plan has been developed (or updated) based on a current risk
assessment(s) and an appraisal of potential solutions to enhance resilience and
meet the resilience requirements for the project.
2.1.6.2 The resilience plan has been:
a. Distributed to all relevant stakeholders

b. Updated, if needed (for example due to changes in the design or construction process)
c. Implemented during design and construction
2.1.6.3 Any deviation from the risk assessment or resilience plan has been supported by written justification.
2.1.6.4 Where necessary, any realised risk event has been reported with appropriate and proportional weight or
focus to relevant national, local, or project specific authorities.
Guidance
Identifying resilience requirements (fixed) (2.1.1)
Resilience requirements for the project could include:
l Minimum regulatory requirements relating to resilience

l Corporate requirements relating to resilience
l Business dependencies that influence the project development process
l Recommendations made by relevant experts
This cannot be scored if no score has been achieved at the strategy stage for 2.1.4.
Identifying dependencies (fixed) (2.1.2)

Dependencies must be identified using an industry recognised approach (methodology, tool, or model), where
available and suitable. Methodologies must involve relevant stakeholders (for example, through structured
workshops); tools and models must be independent or peer reviewed. If no suitable approach exists then a bespoke
methodology, tool, or model for the project must be devised and justified by relevant stakeholders. As a minimum,
the approach must:
l Consider direct 'one tier up or down' dependencies (i.e. parts of the system that, if impacted, would have a
direct effect on the asset such as the energy supply or communication system).
l Be current and up-to-date.
The criticality of the asset and its components (for example, national, regional, or local) should be identified by the
project team, including the owner or operator. The criticality of assets will vary by national infrastructure sector and
not every asset within a given sector will be judged to be 'critical'. Critical National Infrastructure is defined in the
Definitions section.

Communicating dependencies (fixed) (2.1.3)

As a minimum, relevant information regarding the identified dependencies and criticality of the asset must be
communicated to the:
l design team during concept design

l construction team before the start of construction.
Identifying and assessing risks (fixed) (2.1.4)

The risk assessment process should:
1. Formulate a series of disruptive events to determine risks associated with the asset during its whole life (i.e.
construction, operation, and end of life).
2. Assess and grade the likelihood and severity of risks.
3. Establish the maximum tolerable levels of risk for the project.
4. Identify how risks can be reduced through planning, design, construction, and operation to an agreed
tolerable level or as low as reasonably practicable (ALARP).
5. Identify how any residual risks can be managed.
Further guidance for managing risk is available in ISO 31000:2018 Risk management – Guidelines.
Scope (of risk assessments)

Risk assessments must include the scale and duration of the risk associated with:
l Health and safety of operators, users, or others.

l Commercial or economic losses (for example, failure to meet contractual obligations, physical damage,
destruction).
l Reputational damage (for example, negative media coverage, loss of trust).
l Business disruption (for example, loss of essential services).
l Regulatory action (for example, from loss of life, serious injury, or environmental damage).
l The environment (for example, damage to the natural environment).
Disruptive events (for risk assessments)

All disruptive events (see Definitions) must:
l Be informed by consultation and advice from:

a. Relevant experts (see Definitions)
b. Relevant stakeholders (see Definitions)
l Address high probability low impact events and low probability high impact events
l Consider events over the whole life of the asset.
Data sources (for risk assessments)

As a minimum, the data sources used must:
l Be independent and have been subject to peer review

l Include the national risk register, if available
l Include sector specific resilience plans
Additional guidance on data sources for specific risk assessments is provided in the table below.
Topic Guidance on data sources for specific risk assessments

Natural hazards Data sources for natural hazards could include strategic level risk assessments.
Climate change Data sources for climate change could include national or international
projections for climate change.
Where major investment in long term infrastructure is being considered, results
from international climate modelling centres should be referred to. Results
from the Intergovernmental Panel on Climate Change models can be viewed
using the IPCC Data Distribution Centre visualisation tools (http://apps.ipcc-
data.org/maps/).
Security Data sources for security and intentional threats could include local police
statistics, national crime statistics, insurance claim data, corporate expenditure
on maintenance and repair.

Communicating risks (fixed) (2.1.5)

As a minimum, relevant information regarding the identified risks must be communicated to the:
l Design team during concept design (for example, through a project brief or equivalent)
l Construction team before the start of construction (for example, through the project documents)
l Owner/operator before the end of handover (for example, in formal operation and maintenance
documentation)
Resilience plan (fixed) (2.1.6)

The resilience plan must outline:
l How the design and construction teams address the identified risks
l The role of people and procedures in addressing the identified risks
l The performance requirements of proposed resilience measures
l Management measures required to mitigate the impact of potential hazards
When appraising options to enhance resilience, the following could be considered:
l Effectiveness in reducing risks

l Proportionality given the risks
l Whole life costs and the service life of the asset including maintenance, replacement, upgrades and
operational costs
l Impacts on dependencies
l The balance between investment in the infrastructure and investment in emergency response and recovery
capabilities
l Uncertainties over the life of the asset
Evidence
2.1.1 Identifying resilience Project brief, specification.
requirements (fixed)
2.1.2 Identifying dependencies Meeting records, risk assessment information.
(fixed)
2.1.3 Communicating Project brief, specification. Design documentation. Operation and maintenance
dependencies (fixed) documentation.
2.1.4 Identifying and assessing Risk assessment documentation, meeting records, list of consultees.
risks (fixed)
2.1.5 Communicating risks Project brief, specification, risk assessment. Design drawings, risk assessment.
(fixed) As built drawings, handover documentation, contingency plans, operation and
maintenance manuals, commissioning testing reports.
2.1.6 Resilience plan (fixed) Resilience plan.
Definitions
Critical National Infrastructure
For the purpose of this assessment issue, Critical National Infrastructure (CNI) is defined as:
"Those critical elements of infrastructure (namely assets, facilities, systems, networks or processes and the essential
workers that operate and facilitate them), the loss or compromise of which could result in:
a. Major detrimental impact on the availability, integrity or delivery of essential services – including those
services whose integrity, if compromised, could result in significant loss of life or casualties – taking into
account significant economic or social impacts; and/or
b. Significant impact on national security, national defence, or the functioning of the state."

From Summary of the 2015-16 Sector Resilience Plans (Cabinet Office, 2016) available online at
https://assets.publishing.service.gov.uk/government/uploads/system/uploads/attachment_data/file/526351/2015_
16_summary_of_the_srp.pdf
Dependencies
A dependency is a relationship between two products or services in which one product or service is required for
generating the other product or service (or both are interdependent on each other). In the context of infrastructure
projects, dependencies can be defined as other assets, the community, or the environment that would be impacted if
the asset was to fail or not function as intended.
A dependency may be:
l Digital: A cyber connection between infrastructure assets or a shared dependency by two or more elements
on the transfer of information from a third party.
l Geographical: The proximity of infrastructure assets, systems or networks makes them susceptible to the
same incident.
l Organisational: Shared ownership, governance, financing mechanisms 'soft' infrastructure.
l Physical: A physical connection between different infrastructure assets, systems, or networks (for example,
one asset uses fuel supplied by another).
A dependency may fall upstream or downstream of the asset location:
l Downstream: Where the infrastructure asset provides a product or service to another infrastructure asset
which is dependent on that service.
l Upstream: Where the infrastructure asset is dependent on a product or service provided by other
infrastructure
When considering infrastructure assets, interdependencies should also be considered. Interdependency is a mutual
reliance among infrastructure owners and operators on products or services from other suppliers.
Disruptive events
Events established to predict risks over the life of the asset.
In this issue, there are two types of disruptive event:
l Design Basis Events: A series of disruptive events based on natural hazards (including the effects of climate
change).
l Design Basis Threats: A series of disruptive events based on intentional threats.
Intentional threats
Man-made threats including fire and crime (theft, arson, vandalism, terrorist attacks, cybersecurity etc.). These are not
usefully informed by historical data due to their nature and are best assessed using a series of credible threat events
to allow risk analysis and assessment of asset vulnerability.
Natural hazards
A natural process or phenomenon that may cause loss of life, injury or other health impacts, property damage, loss
of livelihoods and services, social and economic disruption, or environmental damage.
Natural hazards include:
l Flooding
l Hazards of geological origin (such as volcanic eruptions, earthquakes and landslides)
l Hazards of climatic or meteorological origin (such as extreme rainfall events, average and extreme
temperatures, droughts, avalanches, wave surges including tsunamis and tidal waves, and wind storms
including cyclones, hurricanes, tornadoes, tropical storms and typhoons)
l Wildfires
The relevance of different natural hazards will be dependent on local geography, geology, hydrology and climate
factors. The assessment of natural hazards tends to be based on historical data but should also consider climate
scenarios and potential future risk.

Relevant experts
l For natural hazards, relevant experts have technical and professional experience in determining:
l the possible natural hazards in the region,
l the likely impacts on the project, and
l appropriate mitigation measures for the project.
l For climate change, relevant experts have technical and professional experience in predicting and
understanding the impacts of climate change on the built environment and advising on mitigation measures.
l For security (or intentional threats), relevant experts have technical and professional experience in designing
appropriate security measures and hold a relevant professional qualification.
Relevant stakeholders
For the purposes of this issue, relevant stakeholders include as a minimum:
l The owner/operator
l Representatives from local public services, including the emergency services, local authorities, health services
and environmental agencies.
l Stakeholders upstream and downstream of the project reasonably considered to be at risk of (i) impacts
arising from the project or (ii) having an impact on the project.
Additional relevant stakeholders for specific resilience topics are given below.
l When considering natural hazards or climate change, additional relevant stakeholders could include:
l Recognised leaders in the resilience sector
l Climate change experts
l Owners or operators of other similar infrastructure assets
l Customers
l Members of the public, where affected
l Local interest groups
l When considering security or intentional threats, additional relevant stakeholders could include:
l Corporate ICT and cybersecurity specialists
l National security organisations
l Police forces
l Security specialists
Resilience
The ability of assets, networks and systems to anticipate, absorb, adapt or rapidly recover from a disruptive event.
Resilience can be considered in a range of ways including:
l Resistance: Designing the asset to withstand predicted impacts, e.g. barriers to prevent water entering the
asset or walls with the strength to withstand the impact of flood water.
l Reliability: the asset or systems required to operate under a range of set conditions for a specified period,
this might include raising critical components above the design flood level, or using specifications that
address identified risks, e.g. burglar alarms or anti-graffiti coatings. It can also include non-technical items
such as flood warning schemes, staff training and good practice guidance to ensure that staff can respond to
events to ensure continuity of service in a safe manner.
l Redundancy: The availability of backup installations or spare capacity within a system to enable operations
to be switched or diverted to alternative parts of the system in the event of disruption to ensure continuity of
service. The resilience of networks reduces when running at or near capacity, although in some sectors or
organisations it is recognised that it may not always be feasible to operate with significant spare capacity
within the network.
l Recovery: Preparations for fast and effective response and recovery from disruptive events and will include
processes for dealing with an event if it occurs to ensure that the asset can continue to operate.
In the context of flood risk, resistance and resilience are often used as follows:
l Resistance: where measures prevent water from being in contact with the asset.
l Resilience: where the asset is designed to withstand contact with the water.
Resilience topics
The table below defines the scope of the three resilience topics within the context of this issue.

Topic Guidance on scope

Natural hazards Any natural hazard that could damage or compromise the asset or its critical
functions. See the definition of natural hazards.
Climate change Climate change events that could damage or compromise the asset or its critical
functions (for example, flooding, surface water runoff, temperature
fluctuations, weather volatility, water resource strain, ground condition
changes).
Security Any threats that could damage or compromise the asset or its critical functions
(for example, physical, cyber, personnel).
Confidentiality or national security
The information assessed as part of this assessment issue may have specific requirements related to confidentiality or
national security. Where relevant, please contact us for more information on conducting the assessment and
demonstrating compliance.
SABRE – Security assessment standard for buildings and built infrastructure assets
SABRE is a security assessment and certification scheme for buildings and built infrastructure assets operated and
maintained by BRE Global. The scheme provides owners, occupiers, and interested parties with:
l an independently assessed security risk management rating for a facility

l the ability to measure, compare and evaluate the security performance of a facility against a range of credible
security threats.
For more information about SABRE visit www.bregroup.com/sabre.

2.2 Flooding and surface water run-off
Aim
To minimise the negative effects of flooding.
Assessment scope

2.2.2 Flood risk based Scope out if an appropriate flood risk assessment has been carried out and did
enhancements not require any measures to be taken. This cannot be scoped out if 2.2.1 has
failed to score.
2.2.3 Sustainable drainage Scope out only for marine and offshore projects, where there is clearly no
systems prospect of SuDS being applicable, and on refurbishment projects where
drainage is not part of the scope of works.
2.2.4 Long-term flood resilience The decision to scope out will depend on the nature, scale, location and context
and adaptation of the project.
2.2.5 Implementation of flood- Scope out if an appropriate assessment has been carried out to satisfy 2.2.2
risk-based enhancements and this did not require any measures to be taken.
2.2.6 Implementation of Scope out only if credits have been scored on 2.2.3 and SuDS have been
sustainable drainage systems deemed inappropriate for the project (for example, on a river wall
strengthening project).
2.2.7 Managing run-off at Scope out only for marine and offshore projects or if infiltration has been
source deemed inappropriate by the assessment carried in 2.2.3 (for example, due to
poor infiltration potential or ground contamination risks).
Credit summary
2.2.1 Flood risk assessment (fixed) 18
2.2.2 Flood risk based enhancements 56
2.2.3 Sustainable drainage systems 5
2.2.4 Long-term flood resilience and adaptation 56
2.2.5 Implementation of flood-risk-based enhancements 56 (up to)
2.2.6 Implementation of sustainable drainage systems 14
2.2.7 Managing run-off at source 24 (up to)
Assessment criteria
2.2.1 Flood risk assessment (fixed) Str Des Con
2.2.1.1 The run-off, flood risk, and potential increased flood risk elsewhere as 18
a result of the completed works have all been assessed over their expected
working life, and appropriate flood management measures included in the
design.

2.2.2 Flood risk based enhancements Str Des Con

2.2.2.1 The design team has actively considered opportunities for providing 56
enhancements as part of the flood risk management measures and/or the
merits of designing for a larger event or for greater flood resilience than
required by planning regulations or guidance.
2.2.3 Sustainable drainage systems Str Des Con

2.2.3.1 The use of SuDS has been considered for incorporation into the 5
design.
2.2.4 Long-term flood resilience and adaptation Str Des Con

2.2.4.1 The project team has designed for long-term flood resilience and 56
adaptation.
2.2.5 Implementation of flood-risk-based enhancements Str Des Con

2.2.5.1 The proposals recommended in 2.2.2 have been included in the design 56 (up to)
and incorporated in the project.
Outcome Credits
(a) Proposals included in the design 28
(b) Proposals incorporated in the project 56
2.2.6 Implementation of sustainable drainage systems Str Des Con

2.2.6.1 SuDS have been incorporated into the project where appropriate. 14
2.2.7 Managing run-off at source Str Des Con

2.2.7.1 A percentage of total surface water run-off from the completed project 24 (up to)
has been managed at source through infiltration.
Percentage of total surface water run-off managed at source Credits

(a) Up to 30% 6
(b) Up to 60% 12
(c) Up to 90% 18
(d) Above 90% 24
Guidance
Flood risk assessment (fixed) (2.2.1)
Any assessment has to be in line with the requirements of planning policy guidance or its equivalent.
Any development, whether or not situated in a floodplain, can contribute to increased flood risk. Creating additional
sealed surfaces on previously open ground will increase run-off, which, if fed into existing rivers or sewerage
systems, adds to the existing load. Climate change has been predicted to lead to increased rainfall, increased
intensities and increased numbers of incidences of extremely heavy rains, the type of events that cause flooding as a
result of sewerage systems and rivers not being able to cope with the sudden volume of water run-off.
For new developments, run-off should be controlled such that it is no larger than would be the case from a
Greenfield site of the same size. Increased flood risk elsewhere as a result of the development should be minimised,
and appropriate flood management measures should be included in the design.
Note also that even refurbishment projects may create additional sealed surfaces and a run-off assessment should be
carried out in any case, to ensure that run-off does not exceed the capacity of existing systems.

Appropriate flood risk management measures could materially affect the overall design of the project, for example
raising the level of a road so that flood risk is reduced, with culverts incorporated to allow water to flow under it.
Flood risk based enhancements (2.2.2)

Opportunities for improving existing or future flood risk conditions can be explored for any project that has a flood-
risk impact. What CEEQUAL defines here as enhancements in a flood-risk context could be achieved through
reducing surface water run-off to rates below those currently experienced or designing for a greater increase in
rainfall intensity due to climate change effects than the minimum required by regulatory bodies. Designing for larger
events or for greater flood resilience may be appropriate for particular sites that are very sensitive to intense rainfall,
or run-off from nearby sites, or greater resilience may be appropriate for regional or national strategic assets such as
power stations or grid facilities, water treatment works or wastewater treatment works.
By reducing surface water run-off beyond current conditions (or beyond the minimum required by the regulatory
bodies), downstream flood risks and flood risks associated with smaller flood events could be improved. Similarly,
designing for a greater increase in rainfall intensity could improve the whole-life performance of the system and
provide more on-site attenuation to cater for extreme events.
Sustainable drainage systems (2.2.3)

For example, rainwater retention, balancing ponds, reedbed systems, and/or grass roofs.
For guidance on SuDS refer to CIRIA Publications:
l The SuDS Manual (C753, 2015).

l Site handbook for the construction of SuDS (C698, 2007).
l Retrofitting to manage surface water (C713, 2012).
l Managing urban flooding from heavy rainfall – encouraging the uptake of designing for exceedance (C738,
2014).
The incorporation of SuDS must be actively considered. If the project generates no additional run-off, or if after
consultation with the local authority SuDS are found not to be beneficial or to be inappropriate in a particular case –
this should be a conscious and informed decision – then 2.2.6 can be scoped out.
Long-term flood resilience and adaptation (2.2.4)

Even when flood risks are taken into consideration during the design of a new development, some residual flood
risk will still exist. This could be a result of an extreme storm event beyond that considered in 2.2.1, breach in flood
defences or from overland flow caused by blockages in the surface water management systems. The potential effects
of climate change could also increase storm intensity to beyond that currently experienced and for which existing
drainage systems are designed.
Management of these residual risks can be achieved in a number of ways. For example, new developments can be
built using materials that are suited to inundation, or that can be easily repaired after a flood event. Electrical
installations can be positioned above the line of the predicted flood level.
Implementation of flood-risk-based enhancements (2.2.5)

See guidance for 2.2.2.
Implementation of sustainable drainage systems (2.2.6)

The score is shown across the Design and Construction columns, which means that the Designer not only has to
have incorporated SuDS into the design but for the score to be gained in a Whole Project Award the SuDS need to
have actually been constructed (not just designed).
Managing run-off at source (2.2.7)

Calculations to be based on the 1 in 30 annual probability event.
The use of SuDS can provide numerous benefits to flood risk, water quality and water resource availability. Many
SuDS will attenuate flow and provide water treatment through entrapment or settlement and the use of these
systems are addressed in 2.2.3 and 2.2.6. This criterion specifically relates to managing surface water run-off
through infiltration. Infiltration of surface water run-off can provide betterment in terms of flood risk from the
receiving watercourse and can aid with aquifer recharge.

Evidence
2.2.1 Flood risk assessment Evidence is likely to need to include a review of existing flood risk from all
(fixed) sources that have the potential to affect the project and a summary of proposed
flood management measures, if deemed required. On certain types of projects,
especially small ones – for example small bridges over a river or canal or
strengthening of a river or canal bank – a qualitative assessment may be
sufficient evidence. For example, the assessment may have been made at and
recorded in minutes of a design meeting. For risks associated with surface water
run-off, evidence would include assessment or calculations of run-off or, for
larger projects, consultants' reports and/or evidence of consultations with
appropriate regulators.
2.2.2 Flood risk based Evidence should show what measures (such as the ones mentioned above) have
enhancements been incorporated into the design. This could be in the form of drawings,
specifications or other design output documents.
2.2.3 Sustainable drainage Evidence should be provided to demonstrate that SuDS have been considered.
systems This could be notes from a design meeting or part of the Client's brief.
2.2.4 Long-term flood resilience Evidence could be provided in the form of a technical note or drawings that
and adaptation demonstrate incorporation of measures.
2.2.5 Implementation of flood- Evidence should show that the measures identified for 2.2.2 have been
risk-based enhancements incorporated into the final works. This could be in the form of drawings,
specifications or other design output documents, and construction records or
photographs to demonstrate their construction.
2.2.6 Implementation of Evidence should be provided to demonstrate that SuDS have been implemented
sustainable drainage systems where appropriate. Evidence may include drawings or specifications showing
the incorporation of SuDS.
2.2.7 Managing run-off at Evidence would include calculations demonstrating management of surface
source water run-off and plans illustrating the areas of the site that drain to infiltration
systems.

2.3 Future needs
Aim
To encourage appropriate adaptability for future needs in a way that avoids unnecessary disruption, inconvenience,
and cost.
Assessment scope

- -
Credit summary
2.3.1 Identifying future needs (fixed) 19 9
2.3.2 Opportunities to address future needs (fixed) 25 12
2.3.3 Designing for future needs (fixed) 37
Assessment criteria
(fixed)
2.3.1 Identifying future needs Str Des Con
2.3.1.1 During strategy and design, the expected future needs of the asset 19 9
have been identified (or reviewed and updated) by:
a. Assessing predicted changes that are expected to be critical to the

sector or asset
b. Using robust data to support predictions
c. Consulting relevant stakeholders
2.3.1.2 Before the start of design, the expected future needs of the asset have been communicated to the design
team.
(fixed)
2.3.2 Opportunities to address future needs Str Des Con
2.3.2.1 During strategy and design, the project team have identified (or 25 12
reviewed and updated) opportunities to adapt the design to address or more
easily accommodate the expected future needs of the asset.
2.3.2.2 A qualitative assessment of the predicted costs and benefits of adapting the design to address the expected
future needs of the asset has been completed (or reviewed and updated).
2.3.2.3 Before the start of design, the client has communicated to the design team through a project brief (or
equivalent):
a. Any identified opportunities to address or accommodate future needs

b. Any requirements to address or accommodate future needs
(fixed)
2.3.3 Designing for future needs Str Des Con
2.3.3.1 The design has incorporated opportunities to address or more easily 37
accommodate the expected future needs of the asset in one or more areas
identified as most critical for the sector or asset.

2.3.3.2 The design allows the expected future needs to be accommodated without destruction of the asset and with
minimal disruption.
Guidance
Identifying future needs (fixed) (2.3.1)
When assessing predicted changes, the project team should consider:
l Population growth
l Changing demographic
l Customer expectations
l Integrated systems
l Resource availability
l New and existing technology
l Flexibility of the asset
l Industry changes
Potential considerations for each of these topics are given in the table below.
Topic Potential considerations

Population growth Predicted future demand and capacity including potential future expansion and
upgrades, whether further assets will be required to meet predicted needs, how
future growth or adaptation can be safeguarded or incorporated into the
current design to allow future needs to be more easily met, how innovation
could be used to meet the demands of a growing population. Potential future
functional changes. Potential future access requirements.
Changing demographic Age (children, young people, older people and the ageing population).
Disability. Gender and sexual orientation. Religion or belief. Race. Deprivation
(this includes income, employment, health and disability, education, barriers to
housing and services, crime, and the living environment). Health (life
expectancy, obesity, physical activity, mortality associated with illnesses,
dementia, depression, mental health). Employment (sectors, incomes,
businesses, working patterns, economic activity, unemployment). Education,
skills and training. Population projections.
The current demographic profile should be available from the local authority
and census data.
Customer expectations How customers will interact with the asset in the next 5, 10, 20(+) years.
Improved cost efficiency over the life of the asset. Meeting increasing customer
expectations for reliability, comfort, safety, security and information (where
relevant). Accessibility of services for future upgrades.
Integrated systems The asset as part of the system within which it operates now and over its life.
How technical aspects of the asset interact with (potentially changing)
operational aspects over the life of the asset (for example, telecommunications,
energy sectors). Opportunities for current or future interconnections to other
assets of the same sector or different sector (for example, water/water,
energy/water). Potential shared facilities, energy and infrastructure (for example,
sustainable drainage systems, amenity spaces and cables). Working with other
organisations, through multi-agency communication and coordination. Future
dependencies (upstream and downstream) and also interdependencies through
use of tools, models, and consultation with (upstream and downstream)
stakeholders. Being aware and planning for potential dependency is crucial to
designing for future needs; if these dependencies are not taken into account,
the measures taken to design for future needs will be at best limited and at
worst totally ineffective.

Topic Potential considerations

Resource availability Future demand of resources needed by the asset over its life and delivered by
the project over its life including: materials requirements over the life of the
asset in terms of robustness and predicted or possible changes in material
supply; energy and water requirements over the life of the asset and predicted
or possible changes in supply, demand, and type.
New and existing technology Smart technology for operation and maintenance purposes (for example,
intelligent distribution networks that automatically reroute when equipment
fails and smart metering to allow customers to make informed decisions about
when to use their power). Techniques and technologies that could be
implemented to meet predicted future needs (for example, dual use for an asset
such as a road tunnel that can act as storm water storage at times of high
rainfall).
Flexibility of the asset Flexibility of the asset or system (for example, through identifying a diverse set
of solutions to meet customer and operator needs). Layered fall-back
arrangements to mitigate unavailability. Implementing ideas which will allow
projects to be self-sufficient (for example, generate more of their own energy or
have dual functionality). How to ensure the functionality of the asset is not
compromised based on future predictions. Whether the asset can be designed
to be part of a flexible system now and in the future (possibly more relevant for
energy and communications sectors).
Industry changes How legislation is likely to change and what effect this will have on the service
provided by the asset. Predicted changes to the infrastructure industry and how
might this affect the service provision of the asset.
Opportunities to address future needs (fixed) (2.3.2)

This can only be scored if credits have been achieved for 2.3.1 at the current or previous assessment stage.
Designing for future needs (fixed) (2.3.3)

This can only be scored if credits have been achieved for both 2.3.1 and 2.3.2 at the current or previous assessment
stage.
An acceptable level of minimal disruption cannot be absolutely defined and will vary by project. There must be
evidence that disruption to the asset and future users has been appropriately considered within the design and
mitigated where possible.
Evidence
2.3.1 Identifying future needs Assessment of future needs, meeting records, list of consultees, data sources.
(fixed)
2.3.2 Opportunities to address Meeting records, results of qualitative assessment, design drawings,
future needs (fixed) specification. Project brief.
2.3.3 Designing for future needs Design drawings, as built drawings, meeting notes, list of recommendations,
(fixed) handover documentation.
Definitions
Relevant stakeholders (future needs)
For the purpose of this issue, relevant stakeholders are knowledgeable and representative and include as a
minimum:

l The owner/operator, where known

l Individuals with:
l Experience in operating similar assets
l Specialist knowledge and experience of the sector
l An understanding of how the sector is likely to evolve in the future
l An understanding of new and relevant technologies
l An understanding of sector specific dependencies, e.g. energy, communications
l An understanding of the asset's resource requirements and availability, e.g. energy, water

3 Communities and stakeholders CEEQUAL Version 6 | International Projects
3 Communities and stakeholders
Summary
This category addresses issues regarding the wider social and economic effects of a project on local communities and
other relevant stakeholders who might be impacted directly or indirectly by a project's delivery and/or operation. It
covers initial and subsequent engagement and consultation on the proposed project through inception, design and
construction – and how it might impact on wider community issues – to maximise the wider social and economic
benefits that a project can achieve.

3.1 Consultation and engagement 225
3.2 Wider social benefits 242
3.3 Wider economic benefits 83
550

CEEQUAL Version 6 | International Projects 3 Communities and stakeholders
3.1 Consultation and engagement
Aim
To establish effective engagement with communities and stakeholders throughout planning, design, and
construction to identify and monitor stakeholder concerns and opportunities, so promoting 'ownership' and project
buy-in across the affected communities.
Assessment scope

3.1.2 Further community If the initial consultation established that there are no interested parties, then
consultation this can be scoped out for design and construction.
3.1.4 Assessing community The decision to scope out depends on the nature, scale, location and context of
demographics the project.
3.1.6 Community engagement It will be very unusual for this requirement to be scoped out. There may be very
rare circumstances where no interested parties have been identified during the
initial consultation and therefore a continuing community engagement
programme might be considered unnecessary. However, it can be argued there
is always opportunity and potential benefit for a project team to engage with
local communities or other stakeholders (see Guidance).
3.1.7 Recording community The decision to scope out depends on the nature, scale, location and context of
comments the project.
3.1.8 Assessing community The decision to scope out depends on the nature, scale, location and context of
comments during design the project.
3.1.9 Assessing community Scope out if the community engagement programme was organised and
comments during construction managed by others and the Contractor was not involved separately from other
members of the team in considering the responses from the programme. This
requirement can also be scoped out where the community engagement
programme is the sole responsibility of the Client.
Credit summary
3.1.1 Initial community consultation (fixed) 10
3.1.2 Further community consultation 11 5
3.1.3 Stakeholder consultation on effects during construction 16
and operation (fixed)
3.1.4 Assessing community demographics 33
3.1.5 Responsibility for ongoing community consultation 3 3 3
(fixed)
3.1.6 Community engagement 11 11 11
3.1.7 Recording community comments 4 4 4
(up to)
3.1.8 Assessing community comments during design 48
3.1.9 Assessing community comments during construction 48 (up to)

Assessment criteria
3.1.1 Initial community consultation (fixed) Str Des Con
3.1.1.1 A community consultation exercise has been carried out by the Client 10
and the results have been passed to appropriate members of the project team
and, as and where appropriate, the results fed back to consultees.
3.1.2 Further community consultation Str Des Con

3.1.2.1 A community consultation exercise has been carried out at the design 11 5
and construction stages of the project and the results have been passed to
appropriate members of the project team and, as and where appropriate, the
results fed back to consultees.
3.1.3 Stakeholder consultation on effects during construction and Str Des Con
operation (fixed) 16
3.1.3.1 All relevant stakeholders have been consulted regarding the effects on
neighbours that are expected to occur during both the construction stage and
operation of the completed works.
3.1.4 Assessing community demographics Str Des Con

3.1.4.1 Community demographics have been assessed to ensure that 33
communications are appropriately targeted during community consultation
exercises or any ongoing community engagement.
3.1.5 Responsibility for ongoing community consultation (fixed) Str Des Con
3.1.5.1 A member of the project team has been made responsible for ongoing 3 3 3
community consultation.
3.1.6 Community engagement Str Des Con

3.1.6.1 There has been a continuing community engagement programme 11 11 11
covering all relevant project stages.
3.1.7 Recording community comments Str Des Con

3.1.7.1 There has been a mechanism to ensure that all comments from the 4 4 4
local community were recorded.
3.1.8 Assessing community comments during design Str Des Con

3.1.8.1 The Client and design team have assessed all the responses from the 48 (up to)
community engagement programme and taken appropriate action within the
project decision making and design.
Outcome Credits
(a) Responses assessed by the Client and design team 10
(b) Plus, appropriate action taken within the project decision making and design 24
(c) Plus, feedback provided to relevant stakeholders 38
(d) Plus, stakeholders satisfied with feedback 48
3.1.9 Assessing community comments during construction Str Des Con

3.1.9.1 The construction team has assessed the responses from the community 48 (up to)
engagement programme and taken appropriate action within the construction
stage.

Outcome Credits
(a) Responses assessed by the construction team 10
(b) Plus, appropriate action taken within the construction stage 24
(c) Plus, feedback provided to relevant stakeholders 38
(d) Plus, stakeholders satisfied with feedback 48
Guidance
Initial community consultation (fixed) (3.1.1)
Ideally, consultation should be carried out early for each stage of the overall process (for example, at planning
proposal stage, during design and before construction starts). Consultation exercises can take the form of a simple
public meeting or a full action-planning event, depending on the scale and profile of the project. Other methods can
be door-to-door surveys, leaflet drops and newsletters, though the latter should mainly be a way of following up
consultation that has already taken place. Increasingly, such exercises are regarded as the start of an 'Engagement
Strategy' with the local community rather than a community consultation.
It is important to bear in mind that simply providing information does not constitute consultation. True consultation
will offer other stakeholders the opportunity to become involved – at least to a certain extent – in decision-making.
Any kind of consultation exercise must therefore include a 'feedback loop' allowing the community to respond and
their comments to be taken into account as and where appropriate.
This requirement cannot be scoped out because even for a remote location with no immediate neighbourhood there
may be other stakeholder groups that ought to be consulted. This could include local or regional authorities, local or
national interest organisations, or national environment agencies.
Stakeholder consultation on effects during construction and operation (fixed) (3.1.3)

Relevant stakeholders could include:
l Local community (including residents, business owners, or schools)

l Local authorities
l Local interest groups or organisations
l National authorities or agencies
This must be scored before credits can be awarded for 6.2.3 Mitigating effects on neighbours in operation and 6.2.5
Mitigating effects on neighbours in construction because the designed mitigation should have been discussed with
relevant stakeholders.
Assessing community demographics (3.1.4)

In a community where the majority of residents are pensioners, a website and emails may not be the most effective
form of communication. Equally, holding public meetings and open days during working hours is likely to exclude a
certain demographic of the community. It is important to arrange project communications to reflect the
demographics to maximise its reach and benefit.
Responsibility for ongoing community consultation (fixed) (3.1.5)

For each project there should be someone nominated to be responsible for ongoing community consultation, even if
it is merely to handle enquiries from interested parties.
Community engagement (3.1.6)

Whereas a community consultation exercise is a specific milestone event – which may be carried out at more than
one stage of a project – a community engagement programme is an ongoing effort to maintain a dialogue with all
community stakeholders throughout the planning, design and construction processes. It should not be just a
mechanism for handling complaints; it should be a two-way engagement with the community.
A thorough and effective community engagement programme should consider environmental, social and economic
effects including, for example, the following elements:

l the significant environmental impacts of the final constructed asset

l the significant environmental impacts of the construction stage
l transportation impacts
l livelihood impacts of the construction process
l timing and programme of the works for design and construction stages
l employment and skill development opportunities during the works and resulting from the final project
These effects may have been identified as part of an Environmental Impact Assessment (EIA) or Transport Impact
Assessment (TIA).
An effective community engagement programme should also manage the expectations of the consultees. In other
words, consultation should not lead to unrealistic expectations of the project.
If no interested parties have been identified during the initial consultation (and therefore a continuing community
engagement programme might be regarded as unnecessary) it is important to recognise four main issues that may
arise:
l The initial consultation may not have reached a representative sample of the community.
l Sensitivities are not always flushed out at the start – it can take a very long time for all interested parties to
catch on to the proposal for or existence of a project.
l However remote the site, change to it could affect neighbours in ways not obvious to the project team.
l Even if the community is generally supportive, sensitivities and opportunities may only become apparent
further into the project lifespan.
Metric guidance
Assessment of this issue can be assisted by carrying out demographic surveys or desk studies of the affected
community, ideally in the very early stages of the project, to identify the community demographic distributions and
groups. Examples of these different groups include minority ethnic groups, gender, local business owners and
employees, different age groups, senior citizens, disabled people, religion groups and social-economic groups.
The effectiveness of the community engagement program and consultation exercises may be measured and reported
through a metric such as:
Percentage of the population of each identified demographic group within the affected community that has
participated, using a formula such as:
Assessing community comments during design (3.1.8)

There is no intent with this criterion for the Client and design team to always accede to actions requested in the
responses, only to have a process for incorporating them into project decision-making and the design team, and for
feeding outcomes back to relevant stakeholder(s).
Assessing community comments during construction (3.1.9)

There is no intent with this criterion for changes to be made that the project team judge are needless or pointless
just to score credits.
Evidence
3.1.1 Initial community Evidence could be reports or minutes of meetings with appropriate groups that
consultation (fixed) are carried out at appropriate stages of the project. Evidence should also be
3.1.2 Further community provided to show how information from these exercises is then communicated
consultation to the project team.
3.1.3 Stakeholder consultation Evidence could be reports or minutes of meetings with appropriate groups that
on effects during construction are carried out at appropriate stages of the project.
and operation (fixed)


3.1.4 Assessing community Evidence could include a communication strategy that identified the
demographics demographics of the local community and how communications should be
targeted accordingly. Evidence could alternatively include the calculation and
reporting of the metric-based guidance.
3.1.5 Responsibility for ongoing Evidence could be in the form of a letter appointing someone to be responsible
community consultation (fixed) or it could be included in a Project Management Plan. In either case,
responsibilities need to be defined.
3.1.6 Community engagement Evidence needs to show a programme of community engagement activities
carried out. These could include leaflet drops, press releases, websites,
documentation of open evenings, minutes from regular liaison group
meetings. However the programme is constructed it must include two-way
dialogue. Evidence needs to show these activities taking place and the relevant
groups having been invited or taking part. This could be in the form of meeting
minutes, correspondence, or attendance lists.
3.1.7 Recording community Evidence could be in the form of meeting minutes with liaison groups. A
comments complaints procedure may also provide evidence, but the definition of a
complaint may restrict what is recorded.
3.1.8 Assessing community Appropriate evidence could show how comments from the community have
comments during design been assessed and taken into account in the decision-making process or
design, such as a Consultation Report or Statement of Community Involvement.
Feedback and evidence of stakeholders' satisfaction may be through feedback
questionnaires and surveys.
3.1.9 Assessing community Evidence could be any amendments to proposals or designs as a result of
comments during construction comments from consultation with the community. There should be a record of
any consultation that has taken place and changes or arrangements as a result
of this (for example, changing the alignment of an access road), as well as the
record of complaints or comments and what action was taken as a result.

3.2 Wider social benefits
Aim
To identify and implement actions that minimise negative social impacts and increase wider social benefits during
the project's construction and operation.
Assessment scope

3.2.3 Supporting social benefits Scope out only if there are genuinely no issues to be addressed from 3.2.1.
in contracts
3.2.4 Wider social benefits It is unlikely that 3.2.4 will be scoped out often and is likely to be justified only
on very small projects, but it is possible, particularly on small projects, that the
social impacts will be judged to be not significant enough to warrant a formal
social impacts assessment. Therefore, the decision to scope out will depend on
the nature, scale, location and context of the project.
3.2.6 Community diversity Can be scoped out on projects where there are no identifiable occupiers or
users.
3.2.7 Enhancement beyond This can only be scoped out if 3.2.4 has been scoped out.
functional requirements
3.2.10 Implementing Only scope out on Design & Construction or Construction Only assessments
partnership links during where it can be demonstrated that the responsibility for implementing
construction partnership links are controlled by the client and the contractor is not permitted
to establish alternative partnership links.
Credit summary
3.2.1 Social impacts and benefits assessment (fixed) 10
3.2.2 Significant social benefits (fixed) 28 (up to)
3.2.3 Supporting social benefits in contracts 11
3.2.4 Wider social benefits 18 14
3.2.5 Health and wellbeing of future users or neighbours 14 11
(fixed)
3.2.6 Community diversity 19 19
3.2.7 Enhancement beyond functional requirements 10 16 6
3.2.8 Partnership links (fixed) 13
3.2.9 Social impacts and benefits during construction (fixed) 24 (up to)
3.2.10 Implementing partnership links during construction 29 (up to)

Assessment criteria
3.2.1 Social impacts and benefits assessment (fixed) Str Des Con
3.2.1.1 The Client and/or the Designers have undertaken a social impacts and 10
benefits assessment of the project on a wider scope than just the project
owners' interests.
(fixed)
3.2.2 Significant social benefits Str Des Con
3.2.2.1 The assessment demonstrates significant social benefits of the project 28 (up to)
to wider society on the following or similar issues that are relevant to the
project:
Outcome Credits (each)

(i) Renewal and revitalisation of the social fabric of the community in which the project is 7 for each
placed feature (up to a
(ii) Enhancement of community quality of life maximum of 4
features)
(iii) Developing local skills and capabilities
(iv) Provision of amenity features or community resources
(v) Reduction of flood risk
(vi) Improving local air quality
(vii) Reducing crime risks
Or, if fewer than four features apply to the project being assessed and significant social 28
benefits of the project to wider society are demonstrated on all of them
3.2.3 Supporting social benefits in contracts Str Des Con

3.2.3.1 Where appropriate, actions to support the results of the social impacts 11
and benefits assessments have been included within relevant contract
documentation.
3.2.4 Wider social benefits Str Des Con

3.2.4.1 Due consideration has been given, during the project's feasibility stage 18 14
and during design, to wider social benefits of the project during construction
and operation, and to the effects of the completed project on the human
environment.
(fixed)
3.2.5 Health and wellbeing of future users or neighbours Str Des Con
3.2.5.1 Potential impacts of the project on the health and wellbeing of any 14 11
future occupants, users, neighbours or operational staff have been considered,
and the design modified as a result.
3.2.6 Community diversity Str Des Con

3.2.6.1 The diversity of the local community has been considered and 19 19
respected in the design solution to promote equal access for all (for example,
disabled, elderly people, and different cultures and religions) and the
specification achieved in the completed project.

3.2.7 Enhancement beyond functional requirements Str Des Con

3.2.7.1 Consideration has been given to enhancing the project design 10 16 6
features, user enjoyment and additional facilities for the benefit of users
beyond functional requirements of the facility and this has been fully achieved
in the construction stage.
(fixed)
3.2.8 Partnership links Str Des Con
3.2.8.1 Partnership links have been actively pursued through the design 13
process and promoted for the construction stage.
3.2.9 Social impacts and benefits during construction (fixed) Str Des Con
3.2.9.1 The Construction Team has undertaken a social impacts and benefits 24 (up to)
assessment of the construction stage of the project and used the results in the
development and implementation of the construction management plan.
Outcome Credits
(a) Results from a social impacts and benefits assessment have been used in the 8
development of the construction management plan.
(b) Plus, social aspects of the developed construction management plan have been 24
implemented.
3.2.10 Implementing partnership links during construction Str Des Con

3.2.10.1 The Contractor has implemented partnership links identified by the 29 (up to)
Client, or significant links that the Client has not identified.
Percentage of Client-identified partnership links implemented Credits

(a) 25% 6
(b) 50% 12
(c) 75% 18
(d) 100% 24
Alternative partnership links have been established that the Client did not identify Additional 5
Guidance
Social impacts and benefits assessment (fixed) (3.2.1)
The analysis of direct benefits to the Client arising from their project is not a matter assessed by CEEQUAL. However,
the non-economic aspects of the project justification, and therefore decision-making about whether to proceed with
a project have a wider context.
There is an increasing view that project teams should seek to deliver genuine benefits to a wider group than just the
Client's narrow interests, socially as well as economically and environmentally. A social impacts and benefits analysis
and assessment of the project on a wider scope than just the project owners' interests is likely to lead to
identification of opportunities to deliver enhanced social benefits to the community in which the project is
constructed and will operate.
Issues that such an analysis is likely to have to cover to be of significance to the project and community are listed in
3.2.2 but need not be limited to the aspects listed. The aim should be for the study to be in scale with the nature,
location, context and size of the project and seek the greatest social good for the investment involved, without
detracting from – and more likely enhancing – the Client's case to the planning authority. Equality impact
assessments should be included.

Significant social benefits (fixed) (3.2.2)

The issues addressed should match the project being assessed. For example, a chemical works or power station will
not usually reduce flood risk directly.
Wider social benefits (3.2.4)

There are three main issues to be considered for this criterion and 3.2.5:
l social impacts during construction on the workforce and on the local community, for example facilities for
the workforce, increased traffic, congestion, influx of the workforce into the local community, and potential
severance through the location of, and arrangement for, site access;
l social impacts on the local community as a result of the existence of the finished project, for example,
severing communities (by a road scheme), linking communities (bridge), increased traffic, greater mobility,
improved services, and/or increased employment; and
l social impacts on users and/or occupiers of the completed project, which are influenced by its design.
Health and wellbeing of future users or neighbours (fixed) (3.2.5)

These measures must be beyond the legislation requirements of health and safety regulations. These
recommendations may come from a Health Impact Assessment (HIA).
Whilst Health and Safety Plans do require consideration of the health of operators, this requirement is looking for
the less tangible health issues that are not covered by legal requirements. Examples include the provision of natural
light within buildings (such as covered wastewater treatment works), provision of planters for growing fruit and
vegetables, or facilities for sports and outdoor games which will indirectly improve the wellbeing of operators. If the
recommendations of a HIA for the project have been incorporated into the design, credits can be awarded.
Community diversity (3.2.6)

In terms of the needs of disabled people and the elderly, consideration needs to be given to the needs of people
with non-physical impairments such as sensory impairments. The detailed execution at the construction stage is key
to the usability of a project by people with disabilities – such as if health and safety requirements result in a toilet
door being hung the opposite way it may result in the toilet being unusable by a wheelchair user. With regards to
different cultures, consideration should be given to using clear visual messages and using different languages in
signage.
Enhancement beyond functional requirements (3.2.7)

Example measures could include providing viewing points, picnic areas and lay-bys with toilets on road projects and
bridges, viewing points and picnic/leisure areas on dams and reservoirs, footpath access to river frontages after new
flood defence schemes are built, or providing additional moorings on a waterway embankment protection project.
For the construction stage, measures could include high quality screening.
A key aspect that can affect what is often termed 'joy in use' is the detailed execution at the construction stage. Poor
detailing can negate the best design by either adding a point of visual dysfunction or result in the project being less
user-friendly. Examples can be the late addition of ventilation units to a structure due to poor specification or
inappropriate design changes, or pathways that make sudden turns to avoid other infrastructure. Alternatively,
positive changes during the construction stage can improve 'joy in use'.
Partnership links (fixed) (3.2.8)

For every project, at the design and construction stage, even in remote locations or on small projects, there is likely to
be potential to establish links with local schools, residents or community groups, or other organisations that could
benefit from an exchange of skills or donation of material or knowledge. Examples of links could include donation
of surplus materials to community organisations (such as local construction colleges, or voluntary groups), physical
improvement of community infrastructure (such as repairs to village halls, community centres or parks) or links with
schools to raise awareness of the role of civil engineering in society and the career paths it has to offer.
Social impacts and benefits during construction (fixed) (3.2.9)

This is seeking for the Contractor to have actively assessed in advance all of the effects of the works on neighbours
and the local community and compared them to the background conditions. The assessments need to include those
generated by their supply chain, and the works planned accordingly. Issues that need to be addressed in such an

assessment include but are not necessarily limited to:
l Nuisances such as noise, dust, vibration, odour, light pollution and blown waste.
l Impacts on traffic and available road space from delivery of materials and components, collection of wastes,
and staff travel.
l Visual impact of the site and its boundary fencing.
l Vibration effects on neighbouring buildings.
l Effects on nearby historic assets.
l The potential increase in flood risk to others arising from the construction stage, especially of temporary
works.
l Respect shown to neighbours and passers-by by the staff and workforce.
l Opportunities for work on the project by local people.
l Management of access to or viability of local businesses or community facilities.
Guidance on these issues is available in the appropriate sections of this manual.
Implementing partnership links during construction (3.2.10)

For Design & Construction Assessments or Construction Only Assessments where the Client has not identified any
partnership links, the Designer or Contractor may identify partnership links in place of the Client.
Evidence
3.2.1 Social impacts and benefits Evidence could be a document entitled 'Social Impacts and Benefits Analysis' or
assessment (fixed) similar with the attributes indicated in 3.2.2 and the guidance. Alternatively, it
3.2.2 Significant social benefits could be a series of less-broad analyses that, taken together, provide the high-
(fixed) level, strategic overview that can provide significant input to the project concept
and design. Note that evidence for 3.2.1, 3.2.2 and 3.2.3 could be found in the
3.2.3 Supporting social benefits results of a combined economic and social impacts and benefits study.
in contracts
3.2.4 Wider social benefits Evidence could be in the form of meeting minutes with liaison groups. A
complaints procedure may also provide evidence, but the definition of a
complaint may restrict what is recorded.
3.2.5 Health and wellbeing of Evidence could include the design brief, meeting minutes, and reports from
future users or neighbours assessments and/or consultation. A Health and Safety Plan, Construction Phase
(fixed) Plan and/or Health and Safety Records File prepared for health and safety
regulations that does not expressly also include future users and occupants of
the completed project is not sufficient.
3.2.6 Community diversity Evidence would be in the design brief, design team meeting minutes, civic
awards, or code of construction practice.
3.2.7 Enhancement beyond Evidence can be in the form of briefs, specifications and other documents that
functional requirements demonstrate inclusion of features that give benefit to occupiers and/or users. At
design stage, design records or drawings could show incorporation of these
features. At the construction stage, photographs or 'as complete' drawings
which demonstrate how the design concept has been met or exceeded.
3.2.8 Partnership links (fixed) Evidence of partnership links that have been identified and promoted, for
example in reports or records of meetings.
3.2.9 Social impacts and benefits Evidence will be in the reports of the assessments and in the CMP or equivalent.
during construction (fixed)
3.2.10 Implementing Appropriate evidence needs to be provided to show the relationships formed
partnership links during and how extensive they are in relation to the scale of the project.
construction

3.3 Wider economic benefits
Aim
To identify and implement actions that minimise negative economic impacts and increase wider economic benefits
during the project's construction and operation.
Assessment scope

3.3.3 Supporting economic This can be scoped out only if there are genuinely no issues to be addressed
benefits in contracts from 3.3.2.
Credit summary
3.3.1 Economic impacts and benefits assessment (fixed) 10
3.3.2 Significant economic benefits (fixed) 28 (up to)
3.3.3 Supporting economic benefits in contracts 11
3.3.4 Involvement of local firms (fixed) 17 17
Assessment criteria
3.3.1 Economic impacts and benefits assessment (fixed) Str Des Con
3.3.1.1 The Client and/or Designers have undertaken an economic impacts and 10
benefits assessment of the project on a wider scope than just the project
owners' interests.
(fixed)
3.3.2 Significant economic benefits Str Des Con
3.3.2.1 The assessment demonstrates significant economic benefits of the 28 (up to)
project to wider society on the following or similar issues that are relevant to
the project:

(i) Promoting other beneficial development 7 for each
(ii) Economic renewal and revitalisation of the community in which the project is placed feature (up to a
maximum of 4
(iii) Creation of new construction jobs, skills, apprenticeships or work experience features)
opportunities
(iv) Creation of long-term, post-construction jobs and/or skills enhancements
(v) Reduction of travel times
(vi) Increased export opportunities
(vii) Efficiency improvements that have wide application
Or, if fewer than four features apply to the project being assessed and significant 28
economic benefits of the project to wider society are demonstrated on all of them

3.3.3 Supporting economic benefits in contracts Str Des Con

3.3.3.1 Where appropriate, actions to support the results of these economic 11
impacts and benefits assessments have been included within relevant contract
documentation.
(fixed)
3.3.4 Involvement of local firms Str Des Con
3.3.4.1 The Client has specific plans or targets to actively encourage local firms 17 17
to quote for work, competitively or otherwise. These plans or targets have been
implemented or achieved during construction. Or evidence is provided showing
why local firms are not appropriate.
Guidance
Economic impacts and benefits assessment (fixed) (3.3.1)
CEEQUAL leaves to the Client their own economic analysis, justification and decision-making about whether to
proceed with a project – it is the Client's business and CEEQUAL does not seek to make judgements about that
aspect of project development. However, there is an increasing view that project teams should seek to deliver
genuine benefits to a wider group than just the Client's narrow interests. An economic benefits assessment of the
project on a wider scope than just the project owners' interests is likely to lead to identification of opportunities to
deliver enhanced value to the community in which the project is constructed and will operate.
Issues that such an analysis is likely to have to cover to be of significance to the project and community are listed in
3.3.2 but need not be limited to the aspects listed. The aim should be for the study to be in scale with the nature,
location, context and size of the project and seek the greatest social and environmental good for the investment
involved, without detracting from the Client's economic case and benefits.
Significant economic benefits (fixed) (3.3.2)

The issues addressed should match the project being assessed. For example, a water treatment works will not usually
reduce journey times.
Involvement of local firms (fixed) (3.3.4)

Plans or targets for showing active encouragement does not mean asking specific companies to bid based on their
location. It simply means giving every company an opportunity. Making sure the opportunity is advertised in the
right places (e.g. local papers as well as the European Union (EU) Journal) is an example of showing active
encouragement. Competition rules may prevent selection on grounds of location or proximity, but do not prevent
encouraging local firms to bid for work on the same terms as any other bidder.
Encouraging local companies to work on the project is part of thinking more broadly about how the project can
provide additional value to the local community, from a combined economic, social and environmental perspective.
Following on from a review of the economic, social and environmental impacts, the use of local skills and labour can
have additional benefits in community pride and perceived ownership. For supply of specialist items or services, local
may mean neighbouring countries, as opposed to remote countries in other continents.
Metric guidance
Metrics or targets set by the Client may include the proportion of materials and services sourced from within a
certain radius of the projects (such as 40 km) or a defined geographical area (such as local authority boundary). The
benefits of setting aspirational targets to source materials and services locally include community engagement and
'ownership' of the scheme, providing jobs to the local community, reducing transportation costs and use of fossil
fuel.
The aspirational targets set and measures of how the targets have been met will require a justifiable geographic
definition of the chosen local boundaries of the project. An example of a measure for reporting achievement may be:
Proportion of local firms or suppliers that have quoted for appropriate work packages, calculated using a formula
such as:

Evidence
3.3.1 Economic impacts and Evidence could be a document entitled 'Economic Benefits Analysis' or similar,
benefits assessment (fixed) with the attributes indicated in 3.3.2 and the guidance. Alternatively, it could
be a series of less-broad analyses that, taken together, provide the high-level,
3.3.2 Significant economic
strategic overview that can provide significant input to the project concept and
benefits (fixed)
design. Note that evidence for this criterion and 3.2.1, 3.2.2, 3.2.3 could be
3.3.3 Supporting economic found in the results of a combined economic and social impacts and benefits
benefits in contracts study.
3.3.4 Involvement of local firms Evidence could be a copy of the Client's requirements to encourage local firms
(fixed) to apply for work and a summary of materials or services to procure in line with
these requirements. The mere fact that one or two suppliers happened to have
been local cannot be considered as sufficient evidence. Evidence could
alternatively include the calculation and reporting of the metric-based
guidance.

4 Land use and ecology CEEQUAL Version 6 | International Projects
4 Land use and ecology
Summary
This category aims to promote the reuse of previously disturbed land so minimising negative impacts on biodiversity
and the natural environment generally. It promotes outcomes that enhance ecological value through protection and
enhancement of habitat in support of biodiversity whilst also promoting the enhancement of associated social and
health value wherever possible.

4.1 Land use and value 187
4.2 Land contamination and remediation 186
4.3 Protection of biodiversity 92
4.4 Change and enhancement of biodiversity 90
4.5 Long-term management of biodiversity 45
600

CEEQUAL Version 6 | International Projects 4 Land use and ecology
4.1 Land use and value
Aim
To encourage the efficient use of land, minimise the use of undeveloped land, and enhance land value on and
around the project site.
Assessment scope

4.1.1 Land use strategy This can be scoped out if there are genuinely no new uses of land associated
with the project (for example the creation of an offshore wind farm that uses
only existing on-land facilities).
4.1.2 Project location alternatives This can only be scoped out in situations where the Client can demonstrate that
they had absolutely no choice about the project's location, for projects that
involve structures that are necessary for health and safety (for example,
4.1.3 Consideration of project navigation equipment along coastlines or in the sea, or improvements to waste-
location alternatives water treatment plants) or to enable access to a site for public education or
enjoyment.
4.1.4 Site suitability This can only be scoped out on projects that can demonstrate site suitability is
4.1.5 Justification of site not relevant, such as land remediation works.
suitability
4.1.6 Land use efficiency Scope out for refurbishment projects that do not involve any change to the land
take or seabed use of the facilities to be refurbished, and for projects where the
project team genuinely has no ability to consider land take.
4.1.7 Selecting temporary land Scope out only if the project team can demonstrate that no land is used for
temporary facilities. An example could be an offshore wind farm where all land-
4.1.8 Temporary land use based activities use existing facilities such as factories, roads and ports.
4.1.9 Previous use of the site Scope out only for marine and offshore projects where there is no use of land
on shore.
4.1.10 Conservation of soils and The decision to scope out will depend on the nature, scale, location and context
other on-site resources of the project.
Credit summary
4.1.1 Land use strategy 3
4.1.2 Project location alternatives 27
4.1.3 Consideration of project location alternatives 27
4.1.4 Site suitability 27 (up to)
4.1.5 Justification of site suitability 27
4.1.6 Land use efficiency 26
4.1.7 Selecting temporary land 2 2 4
4.1.8 Temporary land use 8
(up to)
4.1.9 Previous use of the site 20
4.1.10 Conservation of soils and other on-site resources 14

Assessment criteria
4.1.1 Land use strategy Str Des Con
4.1.1.1 The project brief includes instructions to consider how to balance land 3
use efficiency with other priorities.
4.1.2 Project location alternatives Str Des Con

4.1.2.1 The Client has collected sufficient, relevant information to be able to 27
make appropriate and positive decisions on the project's location.
4.1.3 Consideration of project location alternatives Str Des Con

4.1.3.1 There was a demonstrable process for considering the relative merits of 27
the project location alternatives.
4.1.4 Site suitability Str Des Con

4.1.4.1 Desk and site studies have been undertaken that assisted the Client in 27 (up to)
confirming that their chosen site was suitable.
Outcome Credits
(a) Comprehensive desk study. 19
(b) Comprehensive information, thorough desk study, and site walkover. 27
4.1.5 Justification of site suitability Str Des Con

4.1.5.1 There was a clear process for the evaluation of the key risks and 27
opportunities of the site.
4.1.6 Land use efficiency Str Des Con

4.1.6.1 The land-take of different scheme designs, process designs and layouts 26
of the planned works has been calculated, and these calculations have
influenced the design process and the land-use efficiency of the final design.
4.1.7 Selecting temporary land Str Des Con

4.1.7.1 A formal process for selecting temporary land for construction has 2 2 4
been employed.
4.1.8 Temporary land use Str Des Con

4.1.8.1 The construction team has made effective use of land resources made 8
available to them and minimised the long-term adverse impacts of the
temporary greenfield land take during construction.
4.1.9 Previous use of the site Str Des Con

4.1.9.1 The site has been previously used for built development. 20 (up to)
Outcome Credits
(a) 25% or more previously developed 4
(b) 50% or more previously developed 12
(c) 75% or more previously developed 20
(d) Refurbishment project 20

4.1.10 Conservation of soils and other on-site resources Str Des Con
4.1.10.1 Apart from the actual land take, the site selection and design of the 14
project also took into consideration the conservation of topsoils, subsoil,
seabed surface geology, and conservation or use of on-site mineral resources.
Guidance
Project location alternatives (4.1.2)
In civil engineering, there is often little or no choice of project location – for example a remodelling of a motorway or
railway junction. However, there are projects where there are opportunities for an active choice of site location to be
made on a range of grounds – for example lighthouses, canal-side or riverside marinas, water treatment works or a
new reservoir – so this is challenging Clients to actively consider issues of site characteristics, environmental issues
and flood risk in their selection of the most appropriate location for their project.
Site suitability (4.1.4)

In addition to site visits, information on past land or seabed uses may have been collected through research of
historic maps and charts. Site condition reports that summarise a range of previously collected data are commercially
available in some countries. National government departments or agencies may also provide background
information on site sensitivities and land condition.
Studies should also include consideration of current planning policies or resource development policies.
Justification of site suitability (4.1.5)

The collected information from 4.1.4 must be systematically analysed to establish the key risks and opportunities of
the site. This may or may not have included attributing scores or weight to different areas but understanding the
character of the site is key to designing an appropriate development. Such a study may result in a different site
selection, i.e. the current site may be different from the original site proposed as a result of this process.
Land use efficiency (4.1.6)

Although it is always important to use land efficiently, it is increasingly clear that in certain circumstances minimising
the use of land increases adverse impacts in other areas of environmental and social concern. For example, in Ireland,
there is increasing use of constructed wetlands for wastewater treatment works.
These 'consume' land for the constructed beds, but are created in such a way that the paths around them can be
used for recreation, and the energy consumption of the 'works' is as low as 6kW total installed capacity, which runs a
few hours each day. This solution 'trades' the use of land for reduced energy consumption and is regarded as a
more-sustainable solution that conventional works when the land and topography suits the need.
Selecting temporary land (4.1.7)

Contractors are sometimes left with the responsibility of obtaining additional land for construction compounds;
spoil storage sites and stocking yards. Primarily this will relate to temporary land use, in particular whether selection
and use of site compounds and material storage areas have considered the environment, and to any efforts made to
minimise land take for temporary compounds and works.
Metric guidance
This may be assessed by calculation of the land take of temporary works, in relation to total land take of both
permanent and temporary works, through a metric such as:
Percentage of temporary (construction works) land take to total temporary and permanent land take of all civil
engineering works, using a formula such as:
The resultant value of this measure should be as small as possible and evidence of measures taken to reduce it
should be provided. This calculation can also be complemented by classification of the previous use of the land

taken for temporary works. Like permanent land take, temporary land take should not use land with high biodiversity
nor should it obstruct or consume public pathways or active social spaces.
Previous use of the site (4.1.9)

Construction of civil engineering projects on previously developed sites assists with regeneration, potentially
revitalising local communities and conserving un-developed land (called 'Greenfield land' or 'Greenfield sites' by
many references). Land re-use is in line with government policy, current thinking on planning, and compatible with
the principles of sustainable development.
However, such previously developed sites (called 'Brownfield' or 'derelict' land or sites by many references),
particularly in industrial or urban areas, may also have special ecological and/or historical interest. They may provide
temporary open space that is especially valued in a neighbourhood and may need to be replaced with permanent
open space rather than be developed. To take account of this, for the purposes of this document, the definitions of
the terms 'Greenfield' (undeveloped) and 'Brownfield' (previously developed) have been adapted accordingly and are
given in the definitions below.
Integral areas of infrastructure that are 'green', such as grass verges or embankments that are included in the project
area or site boundary, should be considered in the scoring and if, for example, they make up 45% of site then score
as >50% previously-developed but not >75%.
If a site is being developed that falls under the exclusions given below in the definition of "previously developed",
then it should be treated as an undeveloped ('Greenfield') site and awarded zero credits.
Conservation of soils and other on-site resources (4.1.10)

The emphasis of this criterion is on the avoidance of the highest value and/or most productive soils. Soils can be of
high value because of the habitats they support, the role they play in wider environmental quality, the carbon they
contain or simply highly valued in their own right. Lack of use of soils and minerals due to poor quality of these
materials can still score credits, but evidence of this must be presented – 'best use' can be the non-use of soils and
minerals, which also minimises the environmental impacts of excavation, transport and/or disposal of the excavated
material.
Note: Further credits for the preparation and implementation of a soil management plan and for the re-use of
subsoil and topsoil are available in 7.4 Circular use of construction products.
Evidence
4.1.1 Land use strategy Evidence could be a document entitled 'Project Resources Strategy' with the
attributes indicated in the guidance or could be a series of less-broad analyses
that, taken together, provide the high-level, strategic overview that can provide
significant input to the project concept and design. The evidence must be in
scale to the nature, location, context and size of the project. A two-page
summary report would be insufficient for a multi-million-pound project, yet a
100-page detailed analysis is very unlikely to be appropriate for projects in the
region of £1M.
4.1.2 Project location alternatives Evidence must be provided to demonstrate that genuine consideration of
4.1.3 Consideration of project options has been undertaken.
location alternatives


4.1.4 Site suitability Evidence would ideally be in the form a single comprehensive desk study. It may
be that the information is a collation of existing site assessment, investigation
and evaluation reports, such as archaeological, geotechnical reports and data
searches. The desk study will contain information that is relevant to other
sections of the CEEQUAL Assessment. Alternatively, desk studies could identify
4.1.5 Justification of site issues from previously completed investigations. It is possible that the EIA could
suitability provide some of the information. Note that to score as 'comprehensive' the
reports should include not just geo-environmental information but a general
assessment of the site with regard to engineering, environmental and planning
policies. The report should identify shortfalls in available information.
4.1.6 Land use efficiency Evidence must be provided to demonstrate that specific attention, above
normal practice, has been given to the scheme design with the express
intention of enhancing land-take efficiency
4.1.7 Selecting temporary land Evidence could be found in evaluation of options: calculations derived from
alternative site layouts, including identified environmental constraints;
comparisons between land made available to the construction team and land
actually used; plans; site guidelines; a method statement for set-up of the
compound; and photographs. Evidence could also cover the areas of temporary
4.1.8 Temporary land use land take that have been avoided to prevent disturbance, such as cordoning off
woodlands or grass verges from the site. Photographs may also provide
evidence of land use. Evidence could alternatively include the calculation and
4.1.9 Previous use of the site Evidence could include calculations derived from site layouts or information
contained in the EIA, historic photos and maps. Photographs may also provide
evidence of existing land use.
4.1.10 Conservation of soils and Evidence could be in the form of a Soils Resource Plan, documented statements
other on-site resources in appropriate reports or meeting notes about the optimal use of soils.
Definitions
Previously developed (or 'Brownfield')
Previously developed (or 'Brownfield') land or sites are those that have been used for built development, and this use
is still evident in the form of buildings or structures or their remains, a significant cover of made ground, or soil or
groundwater pollution from activities conducted on the site. They may or may not be contaminated. Brownfield sites
are sites which, according to the Concerted Action on Brownfield and Economic Regeneration Network (CABERNET)
(2007):
l have been affected by former uses of the site or surrounding land;

l are derelict or under-used;
l are mainly in fully or partly developed urban areas;
l may have real or perceived contamination problems; and/or
l require intervention to bring them back to beneficial use.
In respect of development on previously used land, a useful definition is:
"Previously-developed land is that which is or was occupied by a permanent structure, including the curtilage of the
developed land and any associated fixed surface infrastructure."
Exclusions to 'previously developed land' include:
l Land that is or has been occupied by agricultural or forestry buildings.

l Land that has been developed for minerals extraction or waste disposal by landfill purposes where provision
for restoration has been made through development control procedures.
l Land in built-up areas such as parks, recreation grounds and allotments, which, although it may feature
paths, pavilions and other buildings, has not been previously developed.

l Land that was previously developed but where the remains of the permanent structure or fixed surface
structure have blended into the landscape in the process of time (to the extent that it can reasonably be
considered as part of the natural surroundings).
If land is being developed that falls under the above exclusions, then it should be treated as undeveloped
('Greenfield') land.
Undeveloped (or 'Greenfield')

Undeveloped (or 'Greenfield') land or sites are defined as those that are essentially covered in vegetation whether
natural or cultivated, with no evidence of substantive recent built development remaining (although they could
encompass sites of archaeological importance), or where uses have been essentially restricted to agriculture, gardens,
parkland or playing fields.

4.2 Land contamination and remediation
Aim
To encourage the appropriate use of land affected by contamination and to promote sustainable land and ground
water remediation.
Assessment scope

4.2.2 Further assessment of This can be scoped out only if the formal study in 4.2.1 indicated that these
contamination additional studies would be unnecessary or inappropriate.
4.2.3 Land contamination If no study(ies) has taken place as part of 4.2.1, then it is unlikely that this can
specialists be scoped out. The decision to scope out will depend on the outcome of the
formal study in 4.2.1 or on the nature, scale, location and context of the project
4.2.4 Land contamination If no study(ies) has taken place as part of 4.2.1, then it is unlikely that this can
management procedures be scoped out. The decision to scope out will depend on the outcome of the
formal study in 4.2.1 or on the nature, scale, location and context of the project
4.2.5 Evaluation of remediation Scope out if remediation was not part of the scope of work being assessed. If
options no study(ies) has taken place as part of 4.2.1, then it is unlikely that this can be
scoped out. The decision to scope out will depend on the outcome of the
formal study in 4.2.1 or on the nature, scale, location and context of the
project.
4.2.6 Ground-generated gases Scope out if the studies answering 4.2.1 show that no ground-generated gases
were present. If no study(ies) has taken place as part of 4.2.1, then it is unlikely
that this can be scoped out. The decision to scope out will depend on the
outcome of the formal study in 4.2.1 or on the nature, scale, location and
context of the project.
4.2.7 Implementation of The decision to scope out will depend on the nature, scale, location and context
remedial solution of the project
4.2.8 Long-term effectiveness of The decision to scope out will depend on the nature, scale, location and context
remedial solution of the project
4.2.9 Prevention of future This can be scoped out if no on-site contamination had been identified and
contamination therefore no remediation was necessary and there is no new or existing use on
or near the site involving any potential contaminants.
Credit summary
4.2.1 Contamination risk assessment (fixed) 8
4.2.2 Further assessment of contamination 14 (up to)
4.2.3 Land contamination specialists 27
4.2.4 Land contamination management procedures 14 (up to)
4.2.5 Evaluation of remediation options 38 (up to)
4.2.6 Ground-generated gases 27 (up to)
4.2.7 Implementation of remedial solution 17


(up to)
4.2.8 Long-term effectiveness of remedial solution 30
4.2.9 Prevention of future contamination 11
Assessment criteria
4.2.1 Contamination risk assessment (fixed) Str Des Con
4.2.1.1 The desk study covered by 4.1.4 was a formal study assessing risk and 8
implications that may be associated with the land or seabed. It includes issues
related to soil, groundwater, gas, residual man-made structures and
surrounding land uses, or it has been extended into such a suitably formal and
detailed study. The study required for this may not be the same one used in
4.1.4.
4.2.2 Further assessment of contamination Str Des Con

4.2.2.1 The study goes beyond the requirements of 4.2.1 to provide additional 14 (up to)
input to project decision-making.
Outcome Credits
(a) Comprehensive information through desk study, site walkover or subsea survey, and 6
adequacy of information assessed against risk.
(b) The desk study additionally includes visual and descriptive illustrations of the links 14
between contaminant source, pollution pathways and receptors on site.
4.2.3 Land contamination specialists Str Des Con

4.2.3.1 If the studies mentioned in 4.2.1 and 4.2.2 have suggested that 27
contamination may be present on site, then a suitably experienced chartered
land contamination specialist has been consulted.
4.2.4 Land contamination management procedures Str Des Con

4.2.4.1 If contamination was present on site, the site was assessed in line with 14 (up to)
appropriate local procedures for the management of land contamination or,
where not available, in accordance with other internationally recognised best
practice.
Outcome Credits
(a) A report defining risk assessment 9
(b) A report evaluating feasible remediation options and determining the most appropriate 14
remediation strategy for the site
4.2.5 Evaluation of remediation options Str Des Con

4.2.5.1 If the site had been contaminated, and remediation was part of the 38 (up to)
scope of work being assessed, there is evidence that one of the following
outcomes has been achieved.
Outcome Credits
(a) Feasible remediation options have been evaluated and the most appropriate 18
remediation strategy determined for the site as agreed by an appropriate expert.

Outcome Credits
(b) The remedial solution removed or eliminated the need to landfill and material removed 28
in the remediation was utilised in other construction projects (other than landfill
construction or cover).
(c) If the remediation options were evaluated and agreed by an appropriate expert, the 38
selected remedial solution was above the minimum requirements of the regulatory
authority and either used innovative technology or innovative application of existing
technology or increased the potential utility of the project site beyond the immediate
project.
4.2.6 Ground-generated gases Str Des Con

4.2.6.1 If ground-generated gases were present, there is evidence of risk 27 (up to)
reduction and management in place and fully implemented.
Outcome Credits
(a) Yes 11
(b) Yes, and design and implementation was not reliant on management and intervention 27
that was 'fit and forget'.
4.2.7 Implementation of remedial solution Str Des Con

4.2.7.1 The impacts of the implementation of the remedial solution have been 17
assessed and appropriate control measures been put in place.
4.2.8 Long-term effectiveness of remedial solution Str Des Con

4.2.8.1 The effectiveness and durability of the remedial solution, and 30 (up to)
maintenance and monitoring, have been considered over the lifetime of the
project and beyond, and operational information conveyed to the operator..
Outcome Credits
(a) Some evidence 10
(b) Evidence is captured in a Validation Report and Operations Manuals 25
(c) If warranties and insurance are in place in addition to having a Validation Report and 30
Operations Manuals
4.2.9 Prevention of future contamination Str Des Con

4.2.9.1 Pollution control measures are in place to prevent any future 11
contamination occurring in relation to the site.
Guidance
Contamination risk assessment (fixed) (4.2.1)
This is addressed once a site has been chosen for the project. A suitable formal desk study has to be carried out in
order to establish whether there is a potential for a site to be contaminated.
A formal desk study will involve a review of published data and site surveys and should cover at least the following
aspects:
l Identification of the regulatory regime for the site or area

l Review of historical maps
l Review of the underlying geology and hydro-geological regime
l Walk-over survey of the site

The study should include a preliminary qualitative risk assessment based on the above data followed by an overall
identification of potential environmental liabilities associated with the site.
The information identified in the study covered by 4.1.4 will be drawn on but the adequacy of the information may
be insufficient to allow confidence in the risk assessment and more work may need to be undertaken.
Note that in some cases, 4.1.4 and 4.2.1 may be answered by the same study – it will depend upon how the project
development has been organised and upon the site options available to the Client.
Further assessment of contamination (4.2.2)

Physical inspection of the site in a form of a walkover is important in understanding the dynamics of the site. The
walkover and investigation has to be carried out before the design process commences so that the design can take
the results into account.
Land contamination specialists (4.2.3)

A suitably experienced chartered land contamination specialist will be a recognised professional and have
appropriate relevant professional land contamination experience.
Land contamination management procedures (4.2.4)

No specific guidance provided.
Evaluation of remediation options (4.2.5)

Use of soil (bio) treatment centres is welcomed but the product must be put back into the chain of utility and not
simply used to provide cover or construction materials for landfill projects.
An innovative technology or innovative application is one where, for example:
l it can be defined as a new application in the country or region; and

l there is other substantial information such as reported research to demonstrate innovation.
Which technology is most appropriate will depend on the site conditions, the type and extent of contamination, and
the intended use. 'Dig and encapsulate on site' includes cover layers and vertical barriers such as slurry walls, which
can contain, but do not destroy, contaminants. Cement-based technologies (stabilisation or solidification) can
immobilise contaminants for several decades or longer. Physical remedial processes can result in concentrated
residues or transfer of contaminants to an alternative media (for example, soil washing, and soil vapour extraction).
Biological remedial processes breakdown or change organic contaminants in soil or groundwater into less mobile or
less harmful form (bioremediation). Chemical remedial methods involve the addition of chemicals to soil or
groundwater to make contaminants less harmful.
In each case, the most sustainable remediation solution should be identified through an appraisal of options.
Ground-generated gases (4.2.6)

This includes protective measures in the ground or in buildings and structures.
Protection from hazardous gases can be achieved through creating barriers to prevent migration into buildings or
between sites, or to create preferential pathways through which gases can be safely vented.
Verification may be required through long-term monitoring of potential pathways or accepted compliance points to
ensure no further increase in the levels of contamination (for example from 'bounce-back' from some remediation
processes) and/or confirm reducing pollutant values, which is a particular requirement for monitored natural
attenuation.
Externally verified validation of remediation is often not conducted, and there is still little information on the long-
term performance of many remediation technologies.
Implementation of remedial solution (4.2.7)

All appropriate control measures should have been in place for noise, dust and pollution control during the
remediation phase. For example, for transport of contaminated soil off-site, this would include wheel washing,
sheeting and the provision of relevant documentation. On-site measures may include fencing off and signposting
the contamination, as well as ensuring that no migration of the contamination is taking place. No significant

negative impacts should result from the remediation process.
Storage of material on site prior to disposal may fall under the relevant waste management controls and therefore
the appropriate permits, licenses or exemptions will be required. The management of waste is covered in Resources,
but activities involving the storage and collection of waste should also be recorded in the Site Waste Management
Plan.
Long-term effectiveness of remedial solution (4.2.8)

Evidence should be available regarding the longevity of the remedial solution and normal maintenance
requirements. The projected lifetime of the development must not be greater than the lifetime of the remedial
solution. Long-term monitoring is required to ensure the continued effectiveness of some solutions, including
natural attenuation, permeable reactive barriers, slurry walls, ongoing process-based treatments for groundwater.
Monitoring arrangements will depend on the type of remediation method chosen and its projected lifetime. Where
monitoring is necessary, there should also be contingency plans in case monitoring data should demonstrate any
fault or deterioration in the remedial solution
Prevention of future contamination (4.2.9)

This applies to any possible contamination resulting from the new use of the site or any other potentially
contaminating use adjacent to the site. How likely this is, how severe any potential contamination would be, and
what kind of preventative measures should have been taken, depends on the nature of the project and should be
assessed accordingly.
For example, in the design of new facilities such as offshore pipelines and oil and gas production facilities, fuel
tanks, waste storage areas, chemical stores or processes that include chemical use, new infrastructure should be built
to current standards to prevent future contamination of ground and groundwater. Where the subject site has been
cleaned up, but the neighbouring site is potentially contaminated and there is a risk of migration onto the site
resulting in recontamination, evidence should be available to demonstrate that measures have been taken to control
the risk.
Evidence
4.2.1 Contamination risk Evidence should include an outline study including a risk assessment of
assessment (fixed) contamination affecting current and future receptors including consideration of
how the outline proposals will affect any source-pathway-receptor linkages.
4.2.2 Further assessment of
contamination This is best represented in an outline conceptual site model.
4.2.3 Land contamination Evidence could include further reports or notes of discussions with a specialist
specialists or even a specialist in land condition verifying the initial findings and where
appropriate identifying strategies to deal with contamination.
4.2.4 Land contamination Evidence could be in the form of a remediation strategy outlining the methods
management procedures and values to be achieved.
4.2.5 Evaluation of remediation Evidence could again be in the form of a remediation strategy and action plan,
options which has been approved by a relevant local or national government
department, agency, or regulator. Evidence is also required of any relevant
permits, licenses or exemptions. To award full credits the innovative technology
must fit the criteria specified above.
4.2.6 Ground-generated gases Evidence will be likely to include design details and a monitoring plan.
4.2.7 Implementation of Control measures, monitoring data, regulatory visits and actions and waste
remedial solution disposal activities should all be documented, and this documentation should
be available to demonstrate that this was the case, for example a SWMP, other
site records (photographic or otherwise), delivery, transfer or consignment
notes, or invoices.


4.2.8 Long-term effectiveness of Evidence should demonstrate that the remedial solution appropriately meets
remedial solution the requirements outlined in the guidance above.
4.2.9 Prevention of future Evidence could show the implementation of recommendations from any
contamination remediation strategy, including provision of appropriate monitoring facilities.
Evidence could be drawings or photographs showing the installed features.

4.3 Protection of biodiversity
Aim
To avoid biodiversity loss wherever possible and limit negative impacts on biodiversity arising as a result of the
project where these are unavoidable.
Assessment scope

4.3.1 Prerequisite: Surveys for The decision to scope out will depend on the nature, scale, location and context
protected species of the project.
4.3.2 Prerequisite: Injurious or If no surveys have taken place to identify injurious or invasive species, then it is
invasive species unlikely that this can be scoped out. The decision to scope out will depend on
the outcome of the surveys or on the nature, scale, location and context of the
project.
4.3.3 Survey and evaluation of The decision to scope out will depend on the nature, scale, location and context
ecological value of the project.
4.3.5 Further consultation with If the initial consultation in 4.3.4 has established that there are no nature
nature conservation conservation matters to consider, then 4.3.5 may be scoped out for design and
organisations construction.
4.3.6 Land of high ecological This can only be scoped out if the project involves structures that are necessary
value for health and safety (for example, navigation equipment along coastlines), to
enable access to a site for public education or enjoyment, or for refurbishment
projects that happen to be in areas of high ecological value. In addition, for a
Design Only Assessment or for town/city centre works in public spaces schemes,
this can be scoped out in situations where the Designer had no influence over
the choice of location. Evidence for this would be in the brief.
4.3.8 Managing negative This can only be scoped out if surveys have shown there are no existing
impacts on existing ecological ecological features on site.
value
4.3.9 Monitoring protection, This can only be scoped out if surveys have shown there are no existing
mitigation, and compensation ecological features on site.
measures
4.3.10 Success of protection, Scope out if timescale of the assessment does not allow for gathering of
mitigation, and compensation conclusive monitoring data.
measures
Credit summary
4.3.1 Prerequisite: Surveys for protected species -
4.3.2 Prerequisite: Injurious or invasive species -
4.3.3 Survey and evaluation of ecological value 18
4.3.4 Initial consultation with nature conservation 4
organisations (fixed)


4.3.5 Further consultation with nature conservation 2 2
organisations
4.3.6 Land of high ecological value 17
4.3.7 Ecological works plan (fixed) 4 4 4
(up to)
4.3.8 Managing negative impacts on existing ecological value 18
4.3.9 Monitoring protection, mitigation, and compensation 8
measures
4.3.10 Success of protection, mitigation, and compensation 11
measures
Assessment criteria
4.3.1 Prerequisite: Surveys for protected species Str Des Con
4.3.1.1 Appropriate surveys for protected plant and animal species have been -
specified by the Client and the resources provided to undertake them
effectively.
4.3.1.2 Appropriate surveys for protected plant and animal species have been undertaken at each stage of the
project.
4.3.1.3 If protected plant and animal species have been found on the project site or temporary working areas, plans
for protecting these have been:
a. Drawn up and approved

b. Monitored and achieved throughout all site investigation, preparation and construction works
4.3.2 Prerequisite: Injurious or invasive species Str Des Con

4.3.2.1 If invasive animal or plant species or injurious weeds have been found -
on site, a method statement (or equivalent) for their control and management
has been:
a. Drawn up and approved before the start of construction

b. Monitored and achieved during construction
4.3.3 Survey and evaluation of ecological value Str Des Con

4.3.3.1 A suitably qualified ecologist has been appointed at a project stage 18
that ensures involvement with decisions relating to general and detailed site
configuration and, where necessary to ensure that protection and
enhancement opportunities can be realised, influence on strategic planning
decisions.
4.3.3.2 Before the completion of the Brief project stage, a suitably qualified ecologist has carried out an appropriate
level of survey and evaluation for the site and its zone of influence to determine the ecological baseline including:
a. Current and potential ecological value and condition of the site and related areas within the zone of
influence
b. Direct and indirect risks to current ecological value
c. Capacity and feasibility to enhance the ecological value of the site and, where relevant, areas within the zone
of influence.
4.3.3.3 The information and data has been collated and shared with the project team to inform the site preparation,
design, and construction works.

4.3.4 Initial consultation with nature conservation organisations Str Des Con
(fixed)
4
4.3.4.1 The Client has consulted with relevant nature conservation
organisations on the ecological impact of the proposals and communicated the
results to project team members.
4.3.5 Further consultation with nature conservation organisations Str Des Con
4.3.5.1 Consultation with relevant nature conservation organisations on the 2 2
ecological impact of the proposals has been undertaken and communicated to
all relevant project team members at both design and construction stages of
the project.
4.3.6 Land of high ecological value Str Des Con

4.3.6.1 The project, including land used for temporary works, has not been 17
placed on or used land or seabed that has been identified as of high ecological
value or as having species of high value.
4.3.7 Ecological works plan (fixed) Str Des Con

4.3.7.1 An ecological works plan or an ecological section in the integrated 4 4 4
project management plan or site environmental management plan has been
drawn up, and then implemented during construction.
4.3.8 Managing negative impacts on existing ecological value Str Des Con
4.3.8.1 Negative impacts on existing ecological value from site preparation and 18 (up to)
construction works have been managed according to the mitigation hierarchy
and an outcome listed in the table below has been achieved.
Outcome Credits
(a) The loss of ecological value has been limited as far as possible 9
(b) No overall loss of ecological value has occurred 18
4.3.9 Monitoring protection, mitigation, and compensation Str Des Con

measures 8
4.3.9.1 The implementation of recommendations for existing ecological
features has been monitored throughout the course of the contract.
4.3.10 Success of protection, mitigation, and compensation Str Des Con

measures 11
4.3.10.1 Monitoring data shows that implementation of the
recommendations for existing ecological features has been successful.
Guidance
Prerequisite: Surveys for protected species (4.3.1)
Plans are likely to include guidance on appropriate times for carrying out work – for example, clearing vegetation
outside the nesting season or avoiding works during spawning – together with method statements and instructions
for relocation of species. Plans should be approved by all relevant parties such as the Client, Contractor and
Ecologist. Under certain circumstances, especially when dealing with protected species, licences may have to be
acquired and associated plans and method statements may need approval by a statutory agency.
Note that 'achievement' must be assessed appropriately up to the point of assessment, not against a prediction of
what is anticipated to be achieved in the long term.

Prerequisite: Injurious or invasive species (4.3.2)

In some cases, it may not be possible to be sure that any measures to eradicate injurious or invasive plants have been
wholly successful, at least not for some time after the project is completed. Therefore the evidence to look for is
whether or not all the actions that were set out in the method statement have been carried out. If they have, the
control of the plants should also have been achieved. So 'achievement' must be assessed appropriately up to the
point of assessment, not against a prediction of what is anticipated to be achieved in the long-term. Constraints
maps as a record of areas treated can also be a useful tool to judge whether the objectives of invasive species control
has been or is being achieved.
Some other species of plants may be considered invasive and/or injurious if they cause problems to third parties. For
example, in the UK, common ragwort (Senecio jacobaea) is a native plant that is poisonous to grazing animals, but
which is of value in terms of biodiversity, not least because it is a host plant for the larvae of a UK BAP species, the
cinnabar moth (Tyria jacobaeae). Such species should only be considered under this section if identified as a specific
problem in regard to the site in question and its neighbours.
Many introduced animal species can also be classified as invasive because of reproductive or competitive advantage.
Method statements are required to prevent the spread of these species to areas where they are not already present.
Note also that some species of animal are also called pest species, for example brown rat and feral pigeon. However,
the occurrence of these species is not usually increased by civil engineering projects, and they are more a health and
safety hazard for the workers than of strictly environmental concern. Their control is more closely related to good
housekeeping and hence they are not dealt with here.
Note that 'achievement' must be assessed appropriately up to the point of assessment, not against a prediction of
what is anticipated to be achieved in the long term.
Survey and evaluation of ecological value (4.3.3)

Where appropriate, the survey(s) must include:
1. Determining the zone of influence for the site including neighbouring land and habitats
2. Current flora, fauna (including permanent and transient species) and habitat characteristics (including but
not limited to ecological features in or on built structures)
3. Habitat extent, quality, connectivity and fragmentation
4. Recent and historic site condition
5. Existing management and maintenance levels and arrangements
6. Existing ecological initiatives within the zone of influence
7. Identification of, and consultation with, relevant stakeholders impacted or affected by the site.
8. Local knowledge or sources of information.
Where appropriate, the evaluation must include:
1. Current value and condition of the site and, where relevant, the zone of influence in terms of:
a. Features including habitats, species, food sources and connectivity
b. Broader biodiversity and ecosystem services benefits or opportunities
2. Direct and indirect risks to current ecological value:
a. Sensitive areas and features on or near the site
b. Direct risks including those from human activity (such as construction work), habitat fragmentation,
and potentially harmful species
c. Indirect risks including water, noise, vibration, or light pollution
3. Capacity and feasibility to enhance the ecological value
4. Habitat restoration and creation potential
5. Impact of the proposed design, construction works and operations on site.
There may be some projects where not all items listed above will be applicable or appropriate to the site. In these
cases, the ecologist should clearly state their professional view that the items are considered not applicable.
Initial consultation with nature conservation organisations (fixed) (4.3.4)

Appropriate nature conservation organisations could include national, regional or local statutory bodies, plus
international bodies (such as the UN or EU) and a range of non-governmental or voluntary organisations.
Organisations consulted should be appropriate to represent the scope of biodiversity and ecosystems present on site
and in the wider zone of influence.

This initial consultation cannot be scoped out as, even for a remote location with no apparent nature conservation
interests, there may be organisations and groups that ought to be consulted.
Further consultation with nature conservation organisations (4.3.5)

Land of high ecological value (4.3.6)

Land or marine areas that are of 'high ecological value' are:
a. those which are designated for their nature conservation value (or importance as a green corridor) by an
official conservation body or local statutory body (e.g. environmental or development control authority).
b. those which have been identified as being of ecological importance by an ecological assessment of the site
carried out prior to any site clearance or other activity. Any ecological assessment should have been carried
out by, or carefully supervised by, a suitably qualified ecologist.
A site may be considered to be of ecological importance if it comprises national or local priority habitats or hosts
high value species. Species are deemed to be of high value if they are:
l protected by international, national, or regional law

l a national or local priority species
l a Species or Habitat of Principal Importance for Biodiversity
l an International Union for Conservation of Nature (IUCN) Red List species
l nationally or locally identified as being at risk of population decline
Note that this guidance refers to any part of a site that may be of high ecological value. It may be that there are parts
of a site that are of low ecological value that can be developed without any significant impact on biodiversity, even
though the site itself includes land of high ecological value.
Note also that 'hosting of high value species' also includes occupation or use of air space over a site. For example, if a
regular flight-path or foraging route for a protected species such as birds or bats passes through a site, then that site
should be deemed to host a high value species.
As long as damage to the areas of high ecological value is avoided, the credits can be awarded.
Note that for land-based projects, designation of land as of high landscape value and high ecological value are not
necessarily coincident – land can be one but not necessarily the other. Hence this requirement appears here as well
as near-equivalent requirements in Landscape and historic environment.
Note also that credits cannot be scored here unless surveys or desk studies are carried out to identify the ecological
value of the site.
Ecological works plan (fixed) (4.3.7)

Such a plan should be of appropriate quality and should include issues such as appropriate seasons for carrying out
works in order to minimise adverse impacts on wildlife, the methods to be used if this proves impossible, responding
to unexpectedly finding wildlife on site, control of noxious plants, methods to prevent colonisation of the site during
the project (if inappropriate), communication about these issues with project staff, and procedures for regular
monitoring and reviewing.
If a plan has not been prepared by the Client or Designer and thus zero credits have been scored in the Strategy and
Design columns, the Contractor can still score credits if they prepare and implement their own plan at the
construction stage.
An Ecological Works Plan or an ecological section in the Site Environmental or Integrated Project Management Plan
is designed to be implemented at the construction stage of the project. A site ecologist may need to be appointed to
assist with implementation. Depending on the size of the project and the ecological issues involved, this can be full-
time, part-time or on a Watching Brief basis as appropriate for the scale, nature and location of the project.
A form of plan or statement for considering ecological aspects of the project should be drawn up by the Client, and
a preliminary version of the plan should be drawn up at the design stage. CEEQUAL is not prescriptive on the form
that these plans take, and they may be included in broader planning documents as long as they are clearly
identifiable and monitored. The credits for these roles are scored for drawing up the preliminary plans at the relevant

stage in the project. The full score for Construction can be awarded only if there is evidence for correct
implementation of the plan.
Managing negative impacts on existing ecological value (4.3.8)

The following hierarchy must be followed when managing negative impacts of the site preparation and construction
works:
1. Avoid negative impacts on habitats and features of ecological value on the site. If it is not possible to avoid
negative impacts, then:
2. Protect habitats and features of ecological value from damage in accordance with best practice guidelines
during development works. If it is not possible to avoid all negative impacts or to protect habitats and
features of ecological value, then:
3. Reduce, limit or control negative impacts as far as possible. Where it is not possible to avoid, protect, limit
or control the negative impacts on features of ecological value on site, then:
4. Compensate to ensure the existing ecological value is maintained during and after the project.
Compensation should be of benefit to the local ecosystems affected by the project works wherever possible.
Monitoring protection, mitigation, and compensation measures (4.3.9)

Success of protection, mitigation, and compensation measures (4.3.10)

The Assessor should judge these factors against recommendations and observations contained in any ecological
assessment of the site. Note that 'success' must be assessed appropriately up to the point of assessment, not against
a prediction of what is anticipated to be achieved in the long term.
Evidence
4.3.1 Prerequisite: Surveys for Some evidence of steps taken to safeguard protected species may be gained
protected species from documentation such as a SEMP, but a site visit or detailed records
including photographs may be required to see or demonstrate examples of
practical measures that have been implemented. It may also be necessary to talk
to relevant staff.
4.3.2 Prerequisite: Injurious or Evidence should be in the form of method statements or other appropriate
invasive species management control. Monitoring and achievement should be evidenced by
documentation that demonstrates that the method statements have been
adhered to.
4.3.3 Survey and evaluation of A formal habitat assessment or other equivalent type of assessment can act as
ecological value acceptable evidence as long as it can be shown that the content of the criteria
has been covered.
4.3.4 Initial consultation with Evidence would be demonstration of the consultation in the form of a report,
nature conservation minutes or correspondence. Evidence of communication would be through
organisations (fixed) team meeting minutes or other briefing note.
4.3.5 Further consultation with
nature conservation
organisations
4.3.6 Land of high ecological Evidence would be in the EIA, ecological assessment or some other
value environmental assessment as defined in the footnote on the previous page.


4.3.7 Ecological works plan Evidence needs to identify that ecological considerations (such as nesting
(fixed) seasons, spawning grounds, and/or protected areas of the site) have been built
into the project planning. At the Strategy & Design stage, this may be
incorporation of requirements into project briefs, and/or tender documents and
specifications. At Construction stage, it may be a stand-alone plan or part of
other, more-generic, project planning documentation. Evidence of
implementation should be shown through routine project progress monitoring
and reporting.
4.3.8 Managing negative Evidence will identify how the mitigation hierarchy has been followed and the
impacts on existing ecological actions taken to avoid, protect, limit, or compensate for negative impacts on
value existing ecological value. The outcome achieved may be demonstrated through
the professional judgement of a suitably qualified ecologist.
4.3.9 Monitoring protection, Evidence could include site records that contain data and appropriate
mitigation, and compensation reporting/communication that shows that monitoring has taken place or is
measures taking place.
4.3.10 Success of protection, Evidence could include site records that contain monitoring data and
mitigation, and compensation appropriate reporting/communication that shows measures have been
measures successful.
Definitions
Biodiversity
The variety of plant and animal life in the world or in a particular habit at the following levels of organisation:
landscape, ecosystem, habitat, community, species, population, individual, and the structural and functional
relationships within and between these.
Compensation
Measures taken to make up for the loss of, or permanent damage to, ecological features despite mitigation (e.g.
replacement habitat or improvements to existing habitats similar in terms of biological features and ecological
functions to that lost or damaged). Compensation can be provided either within or outside the project site, in line
with the following hierarchy: within site, adjacent to site, and off-site (offsetting) as a last resort.
Connectivity
The degree to which the configuration of habitat facilitates movement between and across resource patches.
Ecological baseline
The ecological baseline is the ecological value of the site before construction. The ecological baseline is used to
compare performance after construction to determine if it is the same or significantly changed.
Ecological value
The importance, worth, or usefulness of a species, habitat or ecosystem in terms of its impact on other species and/or
habitats, as well as the other environmental, social, cultural and economic value that can be delivered from species
and habitats and their interactions (ecosystem services), specific to a geographical frame of reference.
Ecosystem
An ecosystem is a dynamic complex of plant, animal, and micro-organism communities and the non-living
environment interacting as a functional unit. Ecosystems vary enormously in size; a temporary pond in a tree hollow
and an ocean basin can both be ecosystems.
Ecosystem services
Ecosystem services are the benefits people obtain from ecosystems. These include provisioning services such as food
and water; regulating services such as regulation of floods, drought, land degradation, and disease; supporting
services such as soil formation and nutrient cycling; economic value such as tourism; and cultural or social services
such as health and wellbeing, recreational, spiritual, religious and other non-material benefits.

Fragmentation
The breaking up of a habitat, ecosystem or land-use type into smaller parcels with a consequent impairment of
ecological function, connectivity and long-term viability.
Habitat
A place in which a particular plant or animal lives. It is often used in the wider sense referring to major assemblages
(a group of species found in the same location) of plants and animals found together.
No overall loss
There has been no overall loss of ecological value on the site as a result of activities to avoid, protect, reduce, limit,
control or compensate for impacts in line with the hierarchy set out in the assessment criteria in this issue. Where
statutory designated sites, irreplaceable habitats or legally protected species have been impacted, all statutory
requirements are met and are agreed with the relevant statutory bodies as necessary.
Suitably Qualified Ecologist (SQE)

An individual achieving all the following items can be considered 'suitably qualified' for the purposes of compliance
with CEEQUAL:
1. Holds a degree or equivalent qualification in ecology or a related subject.

2. Is a practising ecologist with a minimum of three years of relevant experience (within the last five years). Such
experience must clearly demonstrate a practical understanding of factors affecting ecology in relation to
construction and the built environment including acting in an advisory capacity to provide recommendations
for ecological protection, enhancement, and mitigation measures.
3. Is covered by a professional code of conduct and subject to peer review.
Zone of influence
Areas of land or water bodies impacted by the site undergoing assessment. These areas can be adjacent to the site or
can be areas that are dependent on the site but not physically linked, including areas downstream from a site. Areas
within the zone of influence can be negatively affected by changes on an assessment site, but they also provide
further opportunity to maximise enhancement activities.

4.4 Change and enhancement of biodiversity
Aim
To enhance ecological value wherever possible on and off site as a result of the project through creation, and
management of habitats and ecological features.
Assessment scope

4.4.1 Change in ecological value This can only be scoped out if surveys have shown no direct or indirect risks to
current ecological value and no capacity to enhance the ecological value of the
site or areas within the zone of influence.
4.4.2 Enhancing existing This can only be scoped out if surveys have shown there are no existing
ecological features ecological features on site.
4.4.3 New wildlife habitats The decision to scope out will depend on the nature, scale, location and context
of the project.
4.4.4 Special structures or Scope out only if there are genuinely no opportunities for installing such
facilities for wildlife structures or if doing so is regarded as actively unhelpful, for example in
reducing amenity use of the project.
4.4.5 Improving the water Scope out only where there are no water bodies local to the project.
environment
4.4.6 Improving the water Scoped out if the consideration for 4.4.5 concludes that no opportunities were
environment – implementation appropriate.
4.4.7 Incorporating existing This can be scoped out for marine and offshore projects or if there are no
water features existing water features present on or near the site.
Credit summary
(up to)
4.4.1 Change in ecological value 40
4.4.2 Enhancing existing ecological features 4
4.4.3 New wildlife habitats 4 (up to) 8 (up to)
4.4.4 Special structures or facilities for wildlife 4 9
4.4.5 Improving the water environment 4
4.4.6 Improving the water environment – implementation 4
4.4.7 Incorporating existing water features 13
Assessment criteria
4.4.1 Change in ecological value Str Des Con
4.4.1.1 The change in ecological value occurring as a result of the project has 40 (up to)
been calculated in accordance with the methodology described in GN36
BREEAM, CEEQUAL, and HQM Ecology Calculation Methodology – Route 2 (or
an agreed equivalent) and the project has achieved one of the levels given in
the table below.

Outcome Credits
(a) Minimising loss of ecological value (75-94%) 10
(b) No net loss of ecological value (95-104%) 20
(c) Net gain of ecological value (105-109%) 30
(d) Significant net gain of ecological value (110% or more) 40
4.4.2 Enhancing existing ecological features Str Des Con

4.4.2.1 Recommendations for enhancing the existing ecological features of 4
the site (in addition to any conservation, mitigation, or compensation of
existing features) have been identified by a relevant specialist and incorporated
in the project.
4.4.3 New wildlife habitats Str Des Con

4.4.3.1 Recommendations or opportunities for creating new wildlife habitats 4 (up to) 8 (up to)
have been identified by a relevant specialist and incorporated in the project..
Outcome Credits Assessment

stage
(a1) Plans for creating new habitats have been drawn up 2 Design
(b1) Plans include highly significant habitats or species 4
(a2) New habitats have been incorporated in the project 4 Construction
(b2) Highly significant habitats or species have been incorporated in the 8
project
4.4.4 Special structures or facilities for wildlife Str Des Con

4.4.4.1 Recommendations or opportunities for installing special structures or 4 9
facilities for encouraging or accommodating appropriate wildlife (especially
BAP species) have been identified and incorporated in the project.

stage
(a1) Plans for installing special structures of facilities have been drawn up 4 Design
(a2) Special structures or facilities have been incorporated in the project 9 Construction
4.4.5 Improving the water environment Str Des Con

4.4.5.1 Opportunities to improve the local water environment have been 4
considered and identified, and, where appropriate, included in the design.
4.4.6 Improving the water environment – implementation Str Des Con

4.4.6.1 The designed features have been implemented. 4
4.4.7 Incorporating existing water features Str Des Con

4.4.7.1 Existing water features have been incorporated in the design of the 13
project.

Guidance
Change in ecological value (4.4.1)
The calculation methodology set out in GN36 BREEAM, CEEQUAL, and HQM Ecology Calculation Methodology –
Route 2 builds on the 'Defra biodiversity metric'. The methodology quantifies the impact of a development in terms
of 'biodiversity units' based on habitat types and their (a) distinctiveness, (b) condition and (c) area or length
throughout the assessed project life cycle.
The calculation methodology has two routes depending on (i) the project's scale and size and (ii) the distinctiveness
of the habitats on the site:
1. Full methodology: pre-development habitats are above the set size threshold of 0.05 hectares (in total) or
are of high distinctiveness.
2. Simplified methodology: pre-development habitats are below the set size threshold and are of low or
medium distinctiveness.
For both approaches, linear and area-based habitats must be accounted for separately. For full details of the
methodology and calculation procedure see GN36 BREEAM, CEEQUAL, and HQM Ecology Calculation Methodology
– Route 2.
An alternative methodology for calculating the change in ecological value may be agreed with BRE Global Limited.
New wildlife habitats (4.4.3)

Habitat in this context refers to an area of unified vegetation or ecosystem, such as ponds, reed beds (or other
wetland features), species-rich hedgerow, broadleaved woodland, and/or grassland. Artificial features such as bird
boxes, bat boxes, badger setts, or otter holts, which are covered in 4.4.4 do not constitute habitats in this context
although they may contribute to the creation of one. New habitats are those that currently do not exist on the site
but may otherwise be appropriate as they support the wider ecosystem and local biodiversity in the area. Habitat
creation proposals may be on-site or off-site. Examples of the latter would include landscape scale conservation and
green infrastructure where benefits can be significant if strategically planned and implemented. A specialist in
habitat creation or in a particular group of animals should be consulted in drawing up these proposals.
Special structures or facilities for wildlife (4.4.4)

Structures or facilities that support local wildlife but do not in themselves create a self-supporting habitat. They will
typically reinforce existing facilities in and around the site or provide a means of controlling and protecting wildlife
to facilitate safe and secure passage, nesting, roosting or feeding.
Such structures or facilities may include artificial bat roosting boxes, bird nesting opportunities, artificial badger setts
or otter holts, green bridges, green roofs and walls or tunnels under roads or railways. The provision of such
measures should be appropriate to the scale, nature, and location of the project. For example, one bat box on a large
project would be insufficient. The advice of an ecologist or relevant wildlife organisation should be sought as to
what would be considered appropriate.
As with newly created habitats, any structures or facilities should have been recommended, designed and sited by, or
in consultation with, a suitably qualified ecologist or relevant wildlife specialist.
Improving the water environment (4.4.5)

Examples of opportunities to improve the local water environment (whether fresh or marine) include cleaning up
existing degraded or silted-up ponds or waterways, introducing aquatic plants that help cleanse the water in existing
surface waters, and the removal of invasive and damaging aquatic plants and sources of water pollution.
Capturing rain and surface water for beneficial use, including the adoption of various SuDS techniques, can provide
new water features or aquatic habitat to enhance biodiversity. Retained water could also offer other benefits such as
an alternate water resource or local heat sink or amenity feature.
In Europe, the Water Framework Directive (WFD) is striving to restore, improve and enhance the quality of European
water resources, as well as prevent further deterioration. Contribution to achieving WFD targets should be therefore
explored and incorporated were possible in new developments in Europe.

Incorporating existing water features (4.4.7)

Incorporation of water features can provide amenity benefit (or other benefits, including site drainage), but water
features that are incorporated into the project must form an integral part of the design and not reduce the
ecological or environmental quality of the water feature.
Evidence
4.4.1 Change in ecological value Completed copy of the BREEAM Change in Ecological Value Calculator or a
report showing the methodology followed to calculate the change in ecological
value. Evidence will show the pre- and post-development biodiversity units. It
should include the areas and lengths of different habitat types and the values
used for distinctiveness, condition, and habitat creation risk factors (spatial risk,
delivery risk, temporal risk).
4.4.3 New wildlife habitats Evidence could be drawings and photographs of what has been included. To
score for BAP habitats, it would be necessary to refer back to relevant authority
plans or an ecological assessment of the project. Evidence could alternatively
include the calculation and reporting of the metric-based guidance.
4.4.4 Special structures or Evidence could be in the form of photographs or drawings that show
facilities for wildlife incorporation of special facilities. Reference also needs to be made to the
ecological assessment to ensure that these facilities are not being provided
merely as mitigation.
4.4.5 Improving the water Evidence needs to demonstrate that features (such as the examples above) have
environment been included in the works. This needs to demonstrate both design stage
4.4.6 Improving the water consideration (such as through drawings or specifications) and construction
environment – implementation stage implementation (such as through photographs).
4.4.7 Incorporating existing Evidence needs to be appropriate to the type of scheme and could include
water features drawings or photographs showing how existing features have been
incorporated.
Definitions
See definitions in 4.3 Protection of biodiversity
Enhancement
Improved management of ecological features or provision of new ecological features, resulting in a net benefit to
biodiversity, which is unrelated to a negative impact or is 'over and above' that required to mitigate or compensate
for an impact.
Green infrastructure
Multi-functional space, urban and rural, that can form a network or be self-contained, which is capable of delivering
a wide range of environmental and quality of life benefits for local communities. It covers both 'green' and 'blue'
(water environment) features of the natural and built environments. Examples include parks, open spaces, playing
fields, woodlands, wetlands, grasslands, river and canal corridors, allotments, private gardens and living (green) roofs
and façades.

4.5 Long-term management of biodiversity
Aim
To secure ongoing monitoring, management, and maintenance of habitats and ecological features to ensure
intended long-term outcomes are realised.
Assessment scope

4.5.1 Ongoing ecological Scope out only if the nature and scope of the project mean that there is no
management need for ongoing ecological management of habitats and species conservation
measures.
4.5.2 Programme for monitoring The decision to scope out will depend on the nature, scale, location, duration
and context of the project.
Credit summary
4.5.1 Ongoing ecological management 27
4.5.2 Programme for monitoring 18
Assessment criteria
4.5.1 Ongoing ecological management Str Des Con
4.5.1.1 A landscape and ecology management plan, or equivalent, has been 27
developed that covers, as a minimum, the first five years after project
completion and includes:
a. Actions and responsibilities, prior to handover, to give to relevant individuals.

b. The ecological value and condition of the site over the development life.
c. Identification of opportunities for ongoing alignment with activities external to the project which support
the aims of the BREEAM UK Strategic Ecology Framework.
d. Identification and guidance to trigger appropriate remedial actions to address previously unforeseen
impacts.
e. Clearly defined and allocated roles and responsibilities.
4.5.1.2 The landscape and ecology management plan or similar has been updated as appropriate to support
maintenance of the ecological value of the site.
4.5.2 Programme for monitoring Str Des Con

4.5.2.1 There is a programme in place (for the years after project completion) 18
for monitoring the success or otherwise of any management, habitat creation,
or translocation and species conservation measures undertaken.
Guidance
Ongoing ecological management (4.5.1)
An appropriate landscape and ecology management plan for the aftercare of ecology is essential to ensure benefits
are realised from the actions undertaken to protect or enhance biodiversity. The plan should consider actions on and

near site and, where relevant, within the wider zone of influence.
Where appropriate, the management plan should be developed in accordance with Section 11.1 of BS 42020:2013
Biodiversity – Code of practice for planning and development (or equivalent national standard).
More information on the aims of the BREEAM UK Strategic Ecology Framework is available online at
https://www.breeam.com/resources/strategy/breeam-uk-strategic-ecology-framework/.
Programme for monitoring (4.5.2)

Ecological aspects of a project take time to establish and mature. Throughout the design, construction and
management of ecological features it is necessary to monitor and review progress against the objectives and targets
set. The ongoing programme for monitoring is often not given enough prominence in implementation plans and
project programmes. This can mean that opportunities are missed and expected benefits are not realised, potentially
leading to the failure of the initiative.
Evidence
4.5.1 Ongoing ecological Evidence could be a LMP with specific reference to requirements of ecological
management habitat management or species conservation measures.
4.5.2 Programme for monitoring Evidence could be a specific monitoring plan or part of a more-generic
maintenance plan that demonstrates that monitoring is in place.
Definitions
See definitions in 4.3 Protection of biodiversity

CEEQUAL Version 6 | International Projects 5 Landscape and historic environment
5 Landscape and historic environment
Summary
This category encourages consideration of the landscape and associated heritage features within and surrounding a
project site. It aims to protect and enhance both landscape character and heritage assets where present. Aesthetic
value and visual impact of a project are addressed as well as actions taken to protect and enhance the historic
environment for the benefit of present and future generations.

5.1 Landscape and visual impact 225
5.2 Heritage assets 225
450

5 Landscape and historic environment CEEQUAL Version 6 | International Projects
5.1 Landscape and visual impact
Aim
To ensure the character of the landscape is respected and, where possible, enhanced through the design approach
and careful location of features in a manner that is appropriate to the local environment and community needs and
wishes.
Assessment scope

5.1.1 Landscape and visual Scope out for marine and offshore projects only if the permanent works
factors involved are out of sight of land, and there is no use of land, and therefore
5.1.2 Impact on landscape effects on the landscape, for temporary works.
character
5.1.3 Landscape development Scope out on projects where there are no landscape works required by
policies planning conditions or other commitments. Care must be taken here to ensure
that landscape works are not excluded from a contract merely for convenience.
5.1.4 Local landscape character Scope out for marine and offshore projects only if the permanent works
involved are out of sight of land, and there is no use of land, and therefore
effects on the landscape, for temporary works.
5.1.5 Advance landscape works Scope out for marine and offshore projects only if the permanent works involve
no use of land, and therefore no opportunities for landscape works, even for
temporary works; or on Construction Only Assessments where the Contractor
genuinely had no opportunity to influence any advance works.
5.1.6 Appropriateness of species Scope out only on projects where no planting works are possible or on
selected Construction Only Assessments where the Contractor genuinely had no
opportunity to influence the landscaping design.
5.1.7 Assessment of existing Scope out only if no substantial vegetation is present on site (including
vegetation temporary areas such as construction compounds).
5.1.8 Retention of existing
vegetation
5.1.9 Non-vegetation features Scope out on marine projects where there are no landscape features or views to
be lost.
5.1.10 Landscape design Scope out for marine and offshore projects only if the permanent works involve
proposals no use of land, and therefore no opportunities for landscape works, even for
temporary works.
5.1.11 Protection of existing Scope out only if no substantial vegetation is present on site (including
vegetation during construction temporary areas such as construction compounds).
5.1.12 Long-term management Scope out only on projects where there was no opportunity or scope for
plan planting works (such as marine and offshore projects with no land connection).
5.1.13 Responsibility for long-
term management

Credit summary
5.1.1 Landscape and visual factors 16 11
(up to)
5.1.2 Impact on landscape character 26
5.1.3 Landscape development policies 9 (up to)
5.1.4 Local landscape character 24 (up to)
5.1.5 Advance landscape works 16 10
5.1.6 Appropriateness of species selected 26
5.1.7 Assessment of existing vegetation 9
5.1.8 Retention of existing vegetation 4 (up to)
5.1.9 Non-vegetation features 18 (up to)
5.1.10 Landscape design proposals 17 (up to)
5.1.11 Protection of existing vegetation during construction 5
5.1.12 Long-term management plan 14 3
5.1.13 Responsibility for long-term management 17
Assessment criteria
5.1.1 Landscape and visual factors Str Des Con
5.1.1.1 Landscape and visual factors have been considered by a suitably 16 11
qualified landscape professional at each stage of the project, including the
evaluation of scheme options.
5.1.2 Impact on landscape character Str Des Con

5.1.2.1 The impact of the development on the character of the area has been 26 (up to)
assessed as neutral or positive.
Impact on landscape character Credits

(a) Neutral 10
(b) Positive 26
5.1.3 Landscape development policies Str Des Con

5.1.3.1 The landscape proposals meet, or go beyond, the aims of applicable 9 (up to)
landscape development or enhancement policies published by the relevant
local, regional, or national authority.
Outcome Credits
(a) Policies have been met 4
(b) Policies have been exceeded 9
5.1.4 Local landscape character Str Des Con

5.1.4.1 The project design fits the local landscape character in terms of the 24 (up to)
items listed in the table below.

Aspect of landscape character Credits (each)

(i) Landform or levels 4 for each
(ii) Materials
(iii) Planting
(iv) Style and detailing
(v) Scale
(vi) Landscape or townscape pattern
5.1.5 Advance landscape works Str Des Con

5.1.5.1 Opportunities for advance landscape works have been considered, 16 10
such as planting prior to construction.
5.1.6 Appropriateness of species selected Str Des Con

5.1.6.1 Planting design has taken the appropriateness of species selection into 26
account to include factors such as climate adaptation, local provenance and soil
stability.
5.1.7 Assessment of existing vegetation Str Des Con

5.1.7.1 The condition of existing vegetation has been assessed and the 9
retention of vegetation with high or moderate value has influenced design
proposals.
5.1.8 Retention of existing vegetation Str Des Con

5.1.8.1 Based on the assessment of the condition of existing vegetation, a 4 (up to)
percentage of vegetation of high or moderate quality has been retained as part
of the design.
Outcome Credits
(a) 25% or more 1
(b) 50% or more 2
(c) 75% or more 3
(d) 90% or more 4
5.1.9 Non-vegetation features Str Des Con

5.1.9.1 The landscape and amenity value of other features (not vegetation) has 18 (up to)
been assessed and the retention of valuable, distinctive or historic features has
influenced design proposals.
Outcome Credits
(a) Yes, but negative impact 7
(b) Yes, neutral impact or impact avoided 11
(c) Yes, enhanced setting 18

5.1.10 Landscape design proposals Str Des Con

5.1.10.1 A system or plan has been implemented during the construction 17 (up to)
period to ensure that:
a. Planning and third-party commitments were implemented

b. Best practice was applied for planting or habitat areas to avoid damage
to landscape features
c. Soil conditions met the requirements for successful establishment of
the landscape design
Outcome Credits
(a) Plan prepared 14
(b) Plan prepared and implemented 17
5.1.11 Protection of existing vegetation during construction Str Des Con

5.1.11.1 Vegetation (including root protection areas) that is being retained as 5
part of the design has been adequately protected during construction.
5.1.12 Long-term management plan Str Des Con

5.1.12.1 A management plan has been developed that: 14 3
a. Defines long-term landscape objectives
b. Establishes recommendations for work required to ensure that
objectives are achieved
c. Sets a programme for ongoing monitoring and review to assess the
effectiveness of maintenance operations
5.1.13 Responsibility for long-term management Str Des Con

5.1.13.1 Responsibility for the implementation of the management plan has 17
been allocated to an appropriate individual or organisation.
5.1.13.2 The appropriate skills and resources (including financial) have been committed.
5.1.13.3 A programme of monitoring is in place beyond the normal planting establishment period.
Guidance
Landscape and visual factors (5.1.1)
A suitably qualified landscape professional would normally be a Landscape Architect, but could include a Landscape
Manager, Garden Designer, Arboriculturalist or other landscape professional depending on the nature of the
project.
Strategy stage credits are awarded where the brief actively encourages consideration of landscape and visual factors
at each stage. At design stage, considerations could include siting, massing, colour, texture, materials, earthworks,
lighting, street furniture, planting and relationship with buildings or structures.
Note that temporary construction impacts are assessed by 1.3.3 Visual impact during construction (fixed).
Impact on landscape character (5.1.2)

A project's impact on local landscape character is typically assessed using a landscape and visual impact assessment.
Landscape development policies (5.1.3)

Compliance with relevant landscape policies is considered a basic requirement of all schemes; however, there may be
scope for going beyond these basic requirements to provide further benefit or enhancement.

Local landscape character (5.1.4)

Ideally, any new land-based project should respond to its surroundings and blend in with, or enhance, the local
character. This does not imply that it has to look vernacular. A structure can be contemporary, yet still reflect local
relationships, design elements, colour and material combinations. The way in which a scheme is set into the
landform or townscape surroundings can have a major influence on its acceptability; appropriate choice is needed of
levels, gradients, profiles, soil stabilisation, and retention. Detailing of walls (for example, regional styles in dry stone
walls), facings, fences, posts, hard surfaces and lighting can respond to area-specific factors.
The mere planting of 'indigenous' species or 'same as next door' is not sufficient in this context. Planting should
represent or complement the truly local character of the area in terms of vegetation type and structure (for example,
woodland pattern and structure, the form of a windbreak or shelterbelt, hedgerow character, coppice, designed
landscape elements, meadows, heathland, wetland, urban squares and parks) as well as choice of species and the
matching of species to soil type.
Advance landscape works (5.1.5)

Advance landscape works would normally consist of planting to provide structure to a development, screening of
views or early impact, but may equally include construction of earthworks or other landscape features to fulfil a
landscape function such as screening.
Appropriateness of species selected (5.1.6)

Species selection is an important consideration for planting works. The appropriateness of certain species will
depend on the nature of the development. Ornamental and architectural planting schemes may be appropriate for
urban or commercial developments but are unlikely to be appropriate for rural schemes. Local provenance is often
regarded as important for native planting schemes but may not be appropriate for climate change adaptation. The
landscape design should be supported by evidence that factors determining species selection have been considered
and that the most relevant factors have been used to develop the criteria for planting design.
Assessment of existing vegetation (5.1.7, 5.1.8)

'Vegetation' can include trees, shrubs, grasses, and cacti.
Vegetation, often forms an important part of the landscape. The landscape value of existing vegetation should be
considered in the context of the development.
Significant vegetation, including trees or other vegetation protected by local regulation, would normally be
considered valuable landscape features. However, it is important to consider that size and protection are not the only
factors to determine landscape value, for example small windswept trees may form interesting features in exposed
coastal locations and groups of small trees may provide an important screening function. Therefore, evidence must
demonstrate that a strategy for retention of trees or other existing vegetation has been developed based on their
value in the context of the development. Veteran trees and ancient woodland even if not formally recognised or
protected must be considered as significant.
Non-vegetation features (5.1.9)

Other (non-vegetation) landscape features include topography, rocks, boulders, ponds, brooks, swamps, wetland
areas, parks, plazas, squares, views and vistas. The last five items are of particular importance in urban areas.
Retention of trees and other vegetation is considered in 5.1.7 and 5.1.8.
Landscape design proposals (5.1.10)

Civil engineering work can cause damage to landscape features. A system or plan should be in place to ensure that
such effects are avoided or mitigated. It should allocate responsibility for control measures and establish procedures
for monitoring and reviewing the effectiveness of the system or plan. Mechanisms for ensuring that commitments
made during the planning process, to statutory bodies or third parties are implemented, should also be included in
the system or plan.
The plan must be in place early enough to permit implementation from the start of work on site and should be
reviewed on a regular basis throughout the implementation of the project.
CIRIA publication The benefits of large species trees in urban landscapes: a costing, design and management guide
(C712, 2012) provides guidance in this area, and for 5.1.6.

Protection of existing vegetation during construction (5.1.11)

BS 5837:2012 Trees in relation to design, demolition and construction – Recommendations provides guidance on
protection of trees during construction.
Long-term management plan (5.1.12, 5.1.13)

The Management Plan can either have been prepared as part of the Landscape Management Strategy (LMS) or
Landscape Works Plan (LWP) or can be a separate document (for example, a Landscape Management Plan).
The programme or plan should include detailed descriptions of any maintenance tasks that have to be carried out on
a regular basis (for example, grass to be cut to a particular height, grass cuttings left or collected, selective tree-felling
or pruning, further planting) including an indication of frequency (for example once a fortnight, once a year, every six
years) and, where applicable, time (for example, for meadows the right timing of cuts is crucial). Hard landscape
maintenance tasks should be included where appropriate (for example, graffiti and chewing gum to be removed
from hard surfaces).
Note that the review programme or plan needs to go significantly beyond the normal maintenance carried out
during a planting establishment period (often three to five years).
Evidence
5.1.1 Landscape and visual Evidence could include the project brief, a landscape or townscape assessment
factors report, and comparison of alternatives.
5.1.2 Impact on landscape Evidence could be a landscape and visual impact assessment, judgements from
character a Landscape Character Assessment, or a relevant section of an Environmental
Impact Assessment (EIA).
5.1.3 Landscape development Evidence of compliance with authority plans and policies could be in the form
policies of a planning approval. If planning approval is not needed, then evidence of
consultation with relevant authorities would be needed. It will be up to the
Assessor and Verifier to agree how exceedance of requirements is
demonstrated.
5.1.4 Local landscape character Evidence could be in the form of relevant instructions in the brief, or evidence
of research into and understanding of local character all related to the design
and completed scheme.
5.1.5 Advance landscape works Evidence should include documented evidence that advance landscape works
have been considered, even if the possibility of implementation has been ruled
out.
5.1.6 Appropriateness of species Evidence could include a review of the criteria used to determine plant
selected selection.
5.1.7 Assessment of existing Evidence could include arboricultural reports, survey data, tree constraints plan,
vegetation tree retention strategy, photographs, or a site visit to the completed scheme.
5.1.8 Retention of existing
vegetation
5.1.9 Non-vegetation features Evidence could be in the form of a landscape constraints plan, comparison of
drawings or photomontages showing change of land use and new landscape
features. What is seen as enhancement may be a matter of judgement and
agreement between Assessor and Verifier.
5.1.10 Landscape design Evidence could include a LMS, LWP or equivalent section in a SEMP. Evidence of
proposals consultation with relevant statutory bodies and other relevant third parties
should be included in the plan.


5.1.11 Protection of existing Evidence could include method statements, photographs, records of site visit(s)
vegetation during construction during construction, monitoring of protection measures, or a site visit to the
completed scheme.
5.1.12 Long-term management Evidence should be in the form of a plan covering landscape management
plan objectives and measures, together with evidence that the responsibility for
5.1.13 Responsibility for long- long-term maintenance has been allocated and resourced appropriately.
term management

5.2 Heritage assets
Aim
To ensure the protection of heritage through known physical and other assets on or near the project site that have
value because of their contribution to society, knowledge and/or culture over and above local and international
requirements. Also to identify and exploit opportunities to enhance knowledge, understanding, and appreciation of
the historic, social and cultural environment.
Assessment scope

5.2.3 Consultation Scope out on projects where it can be demonstrated that there were no
significant changes to the historic environment.
5.2.4 Reporting baseline studies This can only be scoped out where there has been no archaeology or historic
and surveys buildings work undertaken for the project, including any formal output from
5.2.1 and 5.2.2.
5.2.5 Integration of listed or Scope out only if statutory listed or registered heritage assets have not been
registered heritage assets identified within the development area in 5.2.1 and 5.2.2.
5.2.6 Integration of non- Scope out only if non-registered heritage assets have not been identified within
registered heritage assets the development area in 5.2.1 and 5.2.2.
5.2.7 to 5.2.13 The decision to scope out will depend on the nature, scale, location and context
of the project.
5.2.14 Use of appropriate Scope out if the evidence demonstrates that there has been no restoration or
materials enhancement works to heritage assets.
5.2.15 Use of specialist skills The decision to scope out will depend on the nature, scale, location and context
of the project.
5.2.16 Reporting mitigation Scope out if the project does not require a formal post-excavation phase or
works require the completion of building recording reports.
5.2.17 Public learning This may not be scoped out if any credits have been awarded in this issue.
Credit summary
(up to)
5.2.1 Baseline studies and surveys (fixed) 9
5.2.2 Use of suitable professionals and standards (fixed) 14 (up to)
5.2.3 Consultation 12 (up to)
5.2.4 Reporting baseline studies and surveys 16
5.2.5 Integration of listed or registered heritage assets 14 (up to)
5.2.6 Integration of non-registered heritage assets 16
5.2.7 Setting for listed or registered heritage assets 13 (up to)
5.2.8 Surveys for archaeological remains 13
5.2.9 Mitigation strategy for archaeological investigation 14 (up to)
5.2.10 Mitigation design for loss of heritage assets 14 (up to)


5.2.11 Mitigation of impacts on archaeological remains 13
5.2.12 In-situ protection of heritage assets 13 (up to)
5.2.13 Monitoring mitigation works 13
5.2.14 Use of appropriate materials 4 5
5.2.15 Use of specialist skills 9
5.2.16 Reporting mitigation works 17 (up to)
5.2.17 Public learning 16 (up to)
Assessment criteria
(fixed)
5.2.1 Baseline studies and surveys Str Des Con
5.2.1.1 A baseline historic environment study or survey has been carried out at 9 (up to)
the project planning stage and has considered the full range of registered and
non-registered historic environment assets.
Aspects covered by baseline studies and surveys Credits (each)

(i) Historic built heritage assets 1 for each
(ii) Historic landscape/townscape/seascape
(iii) Below-ground and/or underwater archaeological remains (on or offshore)
(iv) Non-registered or non-designated assets 3 for each
(v) Reference to existing characterisation studies or regional research agendas
(fixed)
5.2.2 Use of suitable professionals and standards Str Des Con
5.2.2.1 The baseline study or survey has been prepared by a suitably qualified 14 (up to)
historic environment professional and has been prepared to a recognised
standard appropriate to the scope and location of the project.
Outcome Credits
(a) Prepared or authorised by a suitably qualified historic environment professional. 6
(b) Plus, prepared to a recognised standard appropriate to the scope and location of the 14
project.
5.2.3 Consultation Str Des Con

5.2.3.1 Consultations have been carried out with all relevant stakeholders. 12 (up to)
Outcome Credits
(a) Consultations have been conducted with all relevant stakeholders 5
(b) Consultations have been conducted with all relevant stakeholders prior to planning 12
application submission or approval.
5.2.4 Reporting baseline studies and surveys Str Des Con

5.2.4.1 The reports and archives from the baseline studies stage have been 16
prepared and submitted before the end of construction.

5.2.5 Integration of listed or registered heritage assets Str Des Con

5.2.5.1 If statutory listed or registered heritage assets have been identified 14 (up to)
within the development area, the project design has enabled their retention,
restoration, and successful re-use or integration into the development.
5.2.5.2 A future management strategy has been agreed for any statutory listed or registered heritage assets that
have been integrated into the development.
Outcome Credits
(a) The project design has enabled their retention, restoration and successful re-use or 7
integration into the development.
(b) Plus, a future management strategy has been agreed. 14
5.2.6 Integration of non-registered heritage assets Str Des Con

5.2.6.1 The project design has enabled the retention, restoration, and 16
successful re-use or integration of non-registered assets into the development.
5.2.7 Setting for listed or registered heritage assets Str Des Con
5.2.7.1 The design has successfully addressed any setting issues and provided 13 (up to)
a neutral or enhanced setting for listed buildings, scheduled monuments or
historic landscape areas.
Impact on the setting of listed or registered heritage assets Credits

(a) Neutral 8
(b) Enhanced 13
5.2.8 Surveys for archaeological remains Str Des Con

5.2.8.1 If the potential for significant below-ground archaeological remains 13
has been identified, the appropriate staged surveys have been undertaken to
establish the extent and condition of these prior to the design being finalised
and in time to influence designs.
5.2.9 Mitigation strategy for archaeological investigation Str Des Con

5.2.9.1 If the surveys identified in 5.2.8 above have revealed the presence of 14 (up to)
significant archaeological remains, a mitigation strategy document has been
prepared for archaeological investigation and agreed with the relevant
development control archaeologist.
Outcome Credits
(a) Yes 7
(b) If it contains an element of preservation in-situ of archaeological remains 14
5.2.10 Mitigation design for loss of heritage assets Str Des Con
5.2.10.1 If registered or non-registered historic environment assets have been 14 (up to)
demolished or removed, an appropriate mitigation design has been developed
and agreed with the relevant conservation or heritage agency. (This may include
proposals for relocation, restoration or replacement, or in-situ building
recording.)
Outcome Credits
(a) Building recording has taken place 4

Outcome Credits
(b) Historic materials have been salvaged for re-use in another historic context 6
(c) An asset has been relocated off site to an appropriate place 8
(d) An asset has been re-sited within the site 14
(e) If a mixture of (d) plus (b) or (c) 10
5.2.11 Mitigation of impacts on archaeological remains Str Des Con

5.2.11.1 The mitigation designs referred to in 5.2.9 and 5.2.10 have been 13
implemented, managed and monitored in accordance with a SEMP or other site
management framework.
5.2.12 In-situ protection of heritage assets Str Des Con

5.2.12.1 Sensitive assets to be retained have been cordoned off or other 13 (up to)
protection measures have been put in place to avoid accidental damage and
site staff have received appropriate instruction (such as via toolbox talks).
Outcome Credits
(a) Protective measures have been put in place 8
(b) Appropriate instructions have also taken place 13
5.2.13 Monitoring mitigation works Str Des Con

5.2.13.1 An appropriate historic environment professional (archaeologist, 13
conservation architect or historic buildings specialist) has been appointed to
manage and monitor the mitigation works.
5.2.14 Use of appropriate materials Str Des Con

5.2.14.1 If restoration or enhancement works to heritage assets have been 4 5
completed, there is evidence that current best practice has been applied and
historically appropriate materials used.
5.2.15 Use of specialist skills Str Des Con

5.2.15.1 The project has been able to contribute to maintaining key specialist 9
conservation skills and creating sustainable heritage employment.
5.2.16 Reporting mitigation works Str Des Con

5.2.16.1 The final output from the mitigation works (such as archaeological 17 (up to)
excavation or building recording works) have been prepared and archives
submitted.
Outcome Credits
(a) In preparation by end of construction stage 5
(b) Completed by end of construction stage 17
5.2.17 Public learning Str Des Con

5.2.17.1 There has been public opportunity provided to learn about, observe 16 (up to)
or take part in activities to understand or promote the historic environment
local to the project.
Opportunities provided for public learning Credits (each)

(i) Information board on site only 2

Opportunities provided for public learning Credits (each)

(ii) Leaflets printed or other active publicity such as web-based information or media 2
interest.
(iii) Educational activities carried out with the local community, or local voluntary 5
organisations invited to participate in assessment or mitigation works.
(iv) Access to sites to view finds or other activity to participate in offsite events. 7
Guidance
Baseline studies and surveys (fixed) (5.2.1)
It is important that historic environment interests are identified at a pre-design stage and those significant related
issues are incorporated into the design and planning of the project. Best practice requires that sufficient surveys
(desk study and site-based investigations as appropriate) are carried out before design works are substantially
complete, in order to determine the extent, nature and significance of any archaeological resource and/or historic
structures, and to consider the significance of any impact. The results of these surveys should (where significant) be
shown to have influenced the design as submitted for planning and have led to options for alterations at the
detailed design stage to be set out.
The basic principles are as follows:
l Initial appraisal: Undertake sufficient preliminary desk studies to identify all significant historic environment
constraints and opportunities associated with the project.
l Assessment and reconnaissance: Assess the likely impact of development options on identified or potential
assets through for example application of reconnaissance surveys, detailed desk-based assessment, and/or
historic buildings assessment. This information should be used to focus the design options early on to
minimise harm to the historic environment and create opportunities for positive enhancement. Field surveys
and the techniques used should be recorded.
l Site evaluation: Depending on the level of archaeological or historical significance identified, this stage may
include site specific targeted surveys to evaluate the extent and significance of buried archaeological remains
or undertake intrusive investigation on standing structures to determine suitability for conversion, alteration
or protection measures.
The baseline should also identify what outline mitigation proposals should be developed and implemented, and
adequate time and resources needs to have been allocated in the project design.
Use of suitable professionals and standards (fixed) (5.2.2)

Suitably qualified may be indicated by being a member of a professional heritage body. Additionally, it is expected
that the qualified person will hold a relevant historic, conservation or archaeology degree level qualification. Note
that a general environmental management qualification is not considered sufficient.
A recognised standard may be those published by the national heritage agencies or other bodies specific to the work
being undertaken.
Consultation (5.2.3)
Relevant stakeholders could include:
l Local government departments of officers

l National government departments or agencies
l Local interest organisations
l National interest organisations
l Any statutory consultees
Voluntary consultation with other local and amateur organisations demonstrates a commitment to public
engagement and identifying additional local knowledge, concerns and possible positive enhancements to the
historic environment. Consultation should be done as early as practicable so that guidance or advice can be properly
taken into account in the design. It is also likely to continue into construction on some larger schemes.

Reporting baseline studies and surveys (5.2.4)

Where original baseline historic environment study or survey documents have been prepared but no work has
progressed from then, the credits can be scored for submitting the information gained from the studies (such as
desk-based assessments) to the relevant local government historic environment record (HER).
Integration of listed or registered heritage assets (5.2.5)

Integration of non-registered heritage assets (5.2.6)

Non-registered assets may be equally significant. Retention, reuse and enhancement of non-registered assets should
also be considered.
Setting for listed or registered heritage assets (5.2.7)

The design must demonstrate that specific measures have been agreed with the relevant development control
conservation team or national heritage body to integrate the design successfully with the existing character of the
place.
Surveys for archaeological remains (5.2.8)

Significant archaeological remains are those that are assessed to be of more than local importance in the evidence
set out in 5.2.1 or those that are of exceptional importance locally and may be identified as such in local planning
policy and regional and national research agendas.
The surveys may include both non-intrusive and intrusive methods as identified in CIRIA Archaeology and
Development – a good practice guide to managing risk and maximising benefit (C672, 2008).
Note that implementation is covered in 5.2.11, 5.2.12 and 5.2.13.
Use of appropriate materials (5.2.14)

It is acknowledged that the most appropriate material for an historic structure may not necessarily be the best
material from an environmental point of view. For instance, the material may have to be transported a long distance
even though a more-local, but less historically appropriate, material might be available. A balance has to be struck
between historically appropriate refurbishment and environmental considerations, and the decision will depend on
the emphasis given to the project by the stakeholders and the importance of the historical feature. However, an
informed decision can only be made if an assessment of this issue has been carried out by the project.
Use of specialist skills (5.2.15)

It is important that where historic materials or methods are utilised the project team considers how it can ensure that
the industry is able to maintain the necessary skill-sets within the industry to ensure the future maintenance of
historic assets.
Reporting mitigation works (5.2.16)

Final outputs may comprise historic building recording records, archaeological fieldwork reports, or laboratory-based
analytical reports, texts and figures for publication.
Where post-excavation analysis or building recording reporting has been carried out, then full credits can only be
scored if they are completed by the time construction of the project is complete. If the post-excavation analysis or
building recording reporting has commenced and is in preparation but is not complete at the end of the
construction stage, then score as indicated in the scoring scale.
Public learning (5.2.17)

A project may involve an extensive and visible archaeological excavation, and/or the dismantling, refurbishment or
restoration of an historic feature. There is often a high level of public interest in these issues and value may be
generated by the project through public access to the site or by publicity materials such as providing site visits and
information boards. It may also be generated through involving amateur and local interest groups in surveys,
publications, or in producing other media such as leaflets (or web-based material).

The project may also be able to contribute to local education objectives through providing site visits, talks (to schools
and local groups) and materials for curriculum activities. Communication with the public may also be achieved by
liaison with the media and museum exhibitions.
The possibility of allowing members of the public, via their local historical or archaeological societies, access to view
the site or to contribute to desk based or field-based activities should be considered. This will help to maintain
relations with the local community provide positive public relations and held meet historic environment objective to
communicate new knowledge about the past. The access can be at a specified time outside operating hours,
although a member of the site management team will have to be present. Alternatively, it can be in an area
partitioned off from the rest of the site, or visits can be arranged in guided groups.
Evidence
5.2.1 Baseline studies and Evidence may be in the form of stand-alone desk-based assessments and other
surveys (fixed) survey reports, and/or a chapter in an Environmental Statement or other
supporting documents or correspondence with local development control
office for archaeology and conservation. Note that this section of CEEQUAL
covers both below-ground and above-ground historic assets, so any evidence
must include a summary of the baseline for all types of potential constraints
5.2.2 Use of suitable and opportunities that may be significant. Typical headings may comprise
professionals and standards archaeological remains, built heritage assets setting and townscape, historic
(fixed) landscape and seascape (if applicable). Evidence needs to show that a specialist
has been consulted during the design option phase to ensure the proposed
designs have taken account of historic environment constraints and
opportunities. This could be a formal report from the specialist or notes of a
meeting with them.
5.2.3 Consultation Evidence may be summarised in a section of the documents reviewed at 5.2.1 or
be contained in correspondence and/or meeting notes with the relevant
consultees.
5.2.4 Reporting baseline studies Evidence will include details of archives, desk-based studies, or reports that
and surveys have been prepared and submitted. This could include submissions to the local
historic environment record (HER).
5.2.5 Integration of listed or Evidence should show that the issues have been recognised and design
registered heritage assets solutions been found, and that specific specialist studies to address urban
design and setting issues and/or historic views have been conducted if
5.2.6 Integration of non- necessary. Evidence could also include agreements with the development
registered heritage assets control conservation team and or national heritage body in the form of
correspondence and/or meeting notes.
5.2.7 Setting for listed or Evidence should show that the issues have been recognised and design
registered heritage assets solutions been found, and that specific specialist studies to address urban
design and setting issues and/or historic views have been conducted if
necessary. Evidence could also include agreements with the development
control conservation team and/or national heritage agency in the form of
correspondence and/or meeting notes.


5.2.8 Surveys for archaeological Evidence should establish how the project has positively protected any historic
remains environment assets, how good design has enhanced and valued the historic
environment, how any innovative methods or collaborations have enabled the
conservation of historic environment assets, and how any archaeological
5.2.9 Mitigation strategy for investigation or building recording have contributed to local and national
archaeological investigation research agendas. Evidence may include conservation management plans,
mitigation design reports, evidence of partnership with owners and/or
regulators, correspondence, meetings notes, use of research agendas and, for
5.2.10 Mitigation design for loss larger projects, preparation of specific research strategies or frameworks.
of heritage assets Evidence for 5.2.8 must demonstrate that the staged surveys were
commissioned by the Client or Designer and their reports delivered prior to the
finalisation of the design.
5.2.11 Mitigation of impacts on Evidence could be in the form of registers for site briefings and associated
archaeological remains attendance sheets, signed site instructions, Permits to Dig with note of required
archaeological or building recording works prior to demolition and completion
5.2.12 In-situ protection of
certificates, photographic evidence or drawings showing protection measures.
heritage assets
Evidence needs to be appropriate to the level of credits being sought. Evidence
5.2.13 Monitoring mitigation should be provided that mitigation works have been managed and monitored
works by a qualified person.
5.2.14 Use of appropriate Evidence could be in the form of a design report or notes assessing the
materials different material options (including those that are historically appropriate). If
the use of appropriate materials were considered feasible then evidence of
details being incorporated into the specifications would be appropriate.
Evidence is likely to include documentation of consultation with relevant expert
organisations, and/or receipts of material purchase. If the materials have
5.2.15 Use of specialist skills actually been used, then photographs could also be used as evidence.
Maintaining specific heritage conservation skills is an important aspect of
restoration and enhancement works evidence could include specifications,
training records, and meeting minutes
5.2.16 Reporting mitigation Evidence will include a project design for post excavation assessment and
works analysis, details of proposed or completed publications (journal articles, books
and monographs), details of archives prepared and submitted (to local
museums or to digital online archives). Evidence needs to be provided to
support the level of credits being scored. There should be evidence that the
project design has been reviewed and accepted by the relevant heritage agency
and/or funding body.
5.2.17 Public learning Evidence must be provided to demonstrate the level of public access that was
achieved. This could be in the form of visitors' books, press advertisements of
access and/or tour times on site, or photographs of public events or
information boards provided off site.

CEEQUAL Version 6 | International Projects 6 Pollution
6 Pollution
Summary
This category promotes actions that address and minimise air, water, and noise pollution resulting from the
construction and operation of the asset. It focusses on carrying out risk assessments, developing and implementing
appropriate mitigation strategies, and monitoring the effectiveness of the mitigation measures to maximise their
outcomes.

6.1 Water pollution 172
6.2 Air, noise and light pollution 228
400

6 Pollution CEEQUAL Version 6 | International Projects
6.1 Water pollution
Aim
To protect the local water environment from pollution and damage arising as a result of the delivery and/or
operation of an asset.
Assessment scope

6.1.2 Preventing pollution in This may be scoped out if no significant or sensitive ground and surface waters
operation or features are within or near the site and if the project has no connection to
the sea.
6.1.4 Long-term monitoring of The decision to scope out will depend on the nature, scale, location and context
impacts on the water of the project.
environment
6.1.6 Preventing pollution This may be scoped out if no significant or sensitive ground and surface waters
during construction or features are within or near the site and if the project has no connection to
the sea.
6.1.7 Protecting existing water This may be scoped out if no significant or sensitive ground and surface waters
features during construction or features are within or near the site and if the project has no connection to
the sea.
6.1.8 Monitoring water quality This may be scoped out for marine and offshore projects or if no significant or
during construction sensitive body of ground or surface water is within or near the site.
Credit summary
6.1.1 Consultation with regulatory authorities (fixed) 6 6 6
6.1.2 Preventing pollution in operation 14
6.1.3 Control of impacts on the water environment from the 22 22
completed project (fixed)
6.1.4 Long-term monitoring of impacts on the water 18
environment
6.1.5 Control of impacts on the water environment during 29
construction (fixed)
6.1.6 Preventing pollution during construction 20
6.1.7 Protecting existing water features during construction 9
6.1.8 Monitoring water quality during construction 20 (up to)
Assessment criteria
(fixed)
6.1.1 Consultation with regulatory authorities Str Des Con
6.1.1.1 Consultation has been undertaken with regulatory authorities about 6 6 6
water issues related to the project, including the need for any consents, and
the outcome has been communicated to project team members at each stage
of the project.

6.1.2 Preventing pollution in operation Str Des Con

6.1.2.1 Specific measures have been incorporated in the design to prevent 14
pollution of groundwater, existing freshwater features or the sea (as
appropriate) during operation and maintenance.
6.1.3 Control of impacts on the water environment from the Str Des Con
completed project (fixed) 22 22
6.1.3.1 A plan to control the impacts of the completed project on the water
environment (fresh and/or marine as appropriate) has been produced and
necessary elements of the plan have been incorporated in the design.
6.1.3.2 The plan to control the impacts of the completed project on the water environment has been implemented
as far as practicable up to the end of construction.
6.1.4 Long-term monitoring of impacts on the water environment Str Des Con
6.1.4.1 Measures (or equipment) have been incorporated in the project that 18
will allow long-term monitoring of the project's impact on the freshwater
and/or marine environments as appropriate.
6.1.5 Control of impacts on the water environment during Str Des Con
construction (fixed) 29
6.1.5.1 A plan to control the impacts of the project on the water environment
(fresh and/or marine as appropriate) during construction has been produced
and this plan has been implemented.
6.1.6 Preventing pollution during construction Str Des Con

6.1.6.1 Specific measures have been taken to prevent pollution of 20
groundwater, existing freshwater features or the sea (as appropriate) during
construction.
6.1.7 Protecting existing water features during construction Str Des Con
6.1.7.1 Existing water features have been protected from degradation or 9
physical damage by construction plant and processes.
6.1.8 Monitoring water quality during construction Str Des Con

6.1.8.1 If the works could affect a body of ground or surface waters, the water 20 (up to)
quality of that water body has been monitored before construction and then
regularly during construction in accordance with the regime identified as
appropriate in the risk assessment.
Outcome Credits
(a) Monitoring system established in accordance with the results of the risk assessment. 10
(b) Monitoring shows adverse effect, but effective mitigation measures can be 13
demonstrated.
(c) Monitoring shows no adverse effect. 20
Guidance
Consultation with regulatory authorities (fixed) (6.1.1)
It is advisable to consult the relevant regulatory authorities on any potential impacts a civil engineering project may
have on the freshwater and marine environments. Consultation will promote discussion on how the project's
environmental performance could be improved and whether discharge or other consents are required. This includes

projects where effects on water are not immediately obvious as, for example, hydro-geological issues, which are not
instantly visible, may apply to the site.
Preventing pollution in operation (6.1.2)

For preventing pollution in operation, the actions called for include the location of storage for fuels, chemicals or
other potentially-polluting substances away from sensitive areas, restriction on the use of chemical weedkillers near a
watercourse or the sea, separating foul and surface water, and inclusion of interceptors and drainage channels.
Control of impacts on the water environment from the completed project (fixed) (6.1.3)
This requirement cannot be scoped out as it is very important that all project teams should consider the potential
impacts of their project on the freshwater environment and, where appropriate, the marine environment in order to
minimise potential impacts at the operational stage (i.e. through design) and at the construction stage.
The plan can be part of a PEMP, SEMP or equivalent, or can be a separate document. It should assess questions such
as:
l Is the project likely to affect adversely the local surface water and groundwater including groundwater flows?
l Is the project likely to affect the fresh or marine environment including from run-off or discharges from the
completed works and during construction?
l Do the above include consideration of the potential effects of climate change and the potential for more-
intense rainfall events to wash pollutants into the water environment?
l Could measures be implemented to reduce the project's impact on water quality and could these protect or
enhance the water environment?
The need for abstraction, land drainage or discharge consents and/or land drainage appraisals has to be considered
as part of such a plan, as well as possible designs for drainage systems. As with all plans of this type, it needs to
include procedures for regular monitoring and reviewing.
Bearing in mind that a CEEQUAL Whole Project Assessment is completed at or towards the end of construction,
'implementation' can only be assessed at the completion of the assessment and the extent of implementation of the
plan that could have been expected by that time.
Long-term monitoring of impacts on the water environment (6.1.4)

Examples include measuring run-off quantities, establishing adequacy of compensation water from a dam project,
monitoring hydrological impacts of projects that involve changes to existing watercourses, groundwater quality
monitoring, use of flow recorders or level monitors, and monitoring discharges to the sea from coastal or offshore
facilities.
Control of impacts on the water environment during construction (fixed) (6.1.5)

See guidance for 6.1.3 For further guidance regarding construction impacts see the CIRIA publications:
l Environmental good practice on site - fourth edition (C741, 2015)

l Control of water pollution from linear construction projects – Technical guidance (C648, 2006)
l Control of water from linear construction projects – Site guide (C649, 2006)
l Control of water pollution from construction sites – guidance for consultants and contractors (C532, 2001).
Preventing pollution during construction (6.1.6)

For preventing pollution during construction, actions could include measures to prevent leakage of pollutants into a
watercourse or the sea, such as bunding, appropriate storage, spill kits, and/or emergency response plans. Other
issues must also be considered, such as run-off containing high volumes of silt and poor site management.
Procedures for managing these risks must also be implemented.
In relation to water features, a distinction must be made between pollution-related issues (6.1.6) and physical
damage to the water feature (6.1.7).
Early consideration should be given to construction risks at the design stage to enable appropriate systems of work
or appropriate site layouts to be prepared, as well as to ensure that risks identified during an earlier environmental
assessment are incorporated into the construction plan.

Protecting existing water features during construction (6.1.7)

Examples include protection of banks of ponds, lakes, streams, rivers, canals, the seashore or seabed against damage
by construction plant or processes.
Monitoring water quality during construction (6.1.8)

Visual inspection of watercourses is considered to be standard industry practice on sites with ground and surface
waters or features on or near them, due to the ease with which silt, in particular, can enter and be detected. Risk
assessment of the water quality impacts on the environment should be undertaken to establish appropriate level of
on-site monitoring and chemical analysis. The outcome of the risk assessment may require additional monitoring
and analysis above the standard industry practice.
Monitoring may be carried out in liaison with local or national government departments or agencies. However, it is
considered good practice for Contractors to be proactive in establishing a monitoring regime – and it is in their own
interest to do so.
In this section, emphasis is placed on monitoring, both short-term and long-term. Evaluation of the long-term
impact of materials may be difficult if materials have been used that have not had long-term research carried out on
them. For example, these may have delayed pollution characteristics, which would be costly and possibly difficult to
rectify.
Evidence
6.1.1 Consultation with Evidence could be in the form of meeting notes or letters regarding obtaining
regulatory authorities (fixed) consents or licences. At construction stage, it could be actual applications and
granting of licences. Evidence also needs to be shown for appropriate
communication of the outcomes of the consultations or applications. These
could be circulation of design notes, team briefings or incorporation of licence
and/or consent conditions into method statements.
6.1.2 Preventing pollution in Evidence could be drafts of operation and maintenance manuals, minutes of
operation meetings and other documentation. Evidence of positive measures should be
documented at design stage.
6.1.3 Control of impacts on the Evidence could include assessment of run-off, hydrological impacts, surface and
water environment from the groundwater quality impacts, and/or risk assessments, and subsequent
completed project (fixed) incorporation into the design.
6.1.4 Long-term monitoring of Evidence will vary greatly depending on the type of project being assessed.
impacts on the water Appropriateness of measures will have to be judged and agreed by the
environment Assessor and Verifier. However, the guidance above gives examples of the sorts
of measures that could be considered.
6.1.5 Control of impacts on the Evidence could include assessment of run-off, hydrological impacts, surface and
water environment during groundwater quality impacts, and/or risk assessments, and subsequent
construction (fixed) incorporation into construction plans.
6.1.6 Preventing pollution Evidence during construction could be in the form of photographs and other
during construction documentation or could be gained from a site visit. To score credits during
construction stage, evidence must be robust to ensure that all risks to the
6.1.7 Protecting existing water freshwater and marine environments have been considered and mitigated. Note
features during construction that company-wide key performance indicators are insufficient as evidence.
6.1.8 Monitoring water quality Evidence can be in the form of monitoring data and other documentation
during construction showing the methods of monitoring used.

6.2 Air, noise and light pollution
Aim
To minimise, mitigate, and manage the negative effects of air, noise, and light pollution arising as a result of the
delivery and ongoing operation of the asset.
Assessment scope

6.2.1 Identification of potential To scope out there must be evidence that there were genuinely no nuisance
effects on neighbours during (noise, vibration, dust, odour, air quality or lighting) effects of any kind that
construction needed consideration on the project or no neighbours, sensitive wildlife
6.2.2 Identification of potential habitats (not just protected species) or public recreation areas that might be
effects on neighbours in affected by the works.
operation
6.2.3 Mitigating effects on
neighbours in operation
6.2.4 Innovative solutions for The decision to scope out will depend on the nature, scale, location and context
nuisance mitigation in operation of the project. For projects that have strict planning agreements, this can only
be scoped out where evidence can demonstrate that appropriate mitigation
measures have been included in the design and innovative solutions are not
appropriate.
6.2.5 Mitigating effects on To scope out there must be evidence that there were genuinely no nuisance
neighbours during construction (noise, vibration, dust, odour, air quality or lighting) effects of any kind that
needed consideration on the project or no neighbours, sensitive wildlife
habitats (not just protected species) or public recreation areas that might be
affected by the works.
6.2.7 Implementation of Only scope out if 6.2.6 shows that there are genuinely no construction related
mitigation measures during nuisance issues of any kind.
construction
6.2.8 Innovative solutions to
minimise nuisance during
construction
6.2.9 Monitoring of effects on Only scope out if 6.2.1 shows that there are genuinely no construction related
neighbours nuisance issues of any kind.
6.2.10 Achievement of effective It is not possible to scope this out if 6.2.9 has failed to score. The decision to
mitigation during construction scope out will depend on the nature, scale, location and context of the project
(for example, only very short duration projects).
6.2.11 Physical damage by Only scope out if there was genuinely no vibration caused by the project during
vibration construction.
6.2.12 Mitigation of operation Scope out if 6.2.3 has been scoped out. If 6.2.3 is not scoped out, then this can
effects only be scoped out in the unlikely event that all of the intended mitigation
implementation is to be done separately after the construction stage of the
project is completed.

Credit summary
6.2.1 Identification of potential effects on neighbours during 11
construction
6.2.2 Identification of potential effects on neighbours in 11
operation
6.2.3 Mitigating effects on neighbours in operation 11
6.2.4 Innovative solutions for nuisance mitigation in 40
operation
6.2.5 Mitigating effects on neighbours during construction 11
6.2.6 Construction effects on neighbours (fixed) 30 (up to)
6.2.7 Implementation of mitigation measures during 29
construction
6.2.8 Innovative solutions to minimise nuisance during 29
construction
6.2.9 Monitoring of effects on neighbours 17
6.2.10 Achievement of effective mitigation during 12 (up to)
construction
6.2.11 Physical damage by vibration 7
6.2.12 Mitigation of operation effects 20
Assessment criteria
6.2.1 Identification of potential effects on neighbours during Str Des Con
construction 11
6.2.1.1 Baseline studies and predictions for all potential effects on neighbours
have been carried out for the project and proposals have been put forward for
mitigating effects potentially occurring during construction.
6.2.2 Identification of potential effects on neighbours in operation Str Des Con

6.2.2.1 Baseline studies and predictions for all potential effects on neighbours 11
have been carried out for the project and proposals have been put forward for
mitigating effects potentially occurring during operation.
6.2.3 Mitigating effects on neighbours in operation Str Des Con

6.2.3.1 Appropriate proposals to mitigate effects on neighbours during 11
operation have been incorporated into the design(s) (as consulted with
stakeholders).
6.2.4 Innovative solutions for nuisance mitigation in operation Str Des Con
6.2.4.1 There are innovative technical solutions included in the design of the 40
project that go beyond those agreed at an earlier planning permission or
consenting stage that are intended to mitigate any nuisance caused by the
operation of the scheme once constructed.

6.2.5 Mitigating effects on neighbours during construction Str Des Con

6.2.5.1 Appropriate proposals to mitigate effects on neighbours during 11
construction have been incorporated into the design(s) or construction
methodology (as consulted with stakeholders).
(fixed)
6.2.6 Construction effects on neighbours Str Des Con
6.2.6.1 A SEMP or equivalent section in a PEMP has considered the effects of 30 (up to)
the construction process on neighbours.
Outcome Credits
(a) The plan includes all issues described in the guidance below. 12
(b) Plus, the plan has been implemented. 18
(c) Plus, implementation of the plan has been monitored including corrective action. 30
6.2.7 Implementation of mitigation measures during construction Str Des Con

6.2.7.1 The proposals to mitigate for all potential effects on neighbours 29
during the construction period have been implemented.
6.2.8 Innovative solutions to minimise nuisance during Str Des Con

construction 29
6.2.8.1 The Contractor has applied innovative solutions within the
construction methodology designed to remove or minimise any nuisance
during the construction phase.
6.2.9 Monitoring of effects on neighbours Str Des Con

6.2.9.1 All aspects that could have had potential effects on neighbours 17
(identified in 6.2.1) were monitored at appropriate intervals throughout the
construction stage.
6.2.10 Achievement of effective mitigation during construction Str Des Con

6.2.10.1 The monitoring of aspects assessed in 6.2.9 demonstrated that 12 (up to)
acceptable levels of emissions from all aspects (leading to potential effects)
were achieved throughout the construction stage.
Outcome Credits
(a) No, but corrective action successfully taken 6
(b) Yes, in full 12
6.2.11 Physical damage by vibration Str Des Con

6.2.11.1 On completion of the contract, no physical damage has been caused 7
to buildings and structures by vibration from construction processes.
6.2.12 Mitigation of operation effects Str Des Con

6.2.12.1 The proposals for mitigation of all potential effects for the 20
operational stage have been implemented in full as far as can be expected at
the end of construction.

Guidance
Identification of potential effects on neighbours during construction (6.2.1, 6.2.2)
Although noise and vibration effects are the first to come to mind as effects on those close to new schemes,
consideration must be given to all forms of potential pollution emissions and nuisance that could affect neighbours
(including wildlife and certain plant life) in the proximity of the scheme during both the construction (6.2.1) and
operational stages (6.2.2). Baseline studies required will be dependent upon each individual project location and
operations, though these should be predictable, assessable and documented.
Mitigating effects on neighbours in operation (6.2.3)

This can only be scored if a score has been achieved for 3.1.3 (because the designed mitigation should be discussed
with appropriate stakeholders).
Examples of possible mitigation measures for effects on neighbours in operation include:
Local air quality: Appropriate measures may include low-emission boilers for water and wastewater treatment
plants, fitment of covers to tanks at such works, and spray facilities at solid-waste treatment facilities.
Innovative solutions for nuisance mitigation in operation (6.2.4)

Innovative solutions can be new or advanced methods, products or ideas. Note, however, that some measures may
need regulatory approval.
Mitigating effects on neighbours during construction (6.2.5)

This can only be scored if a score has been achieved for 3.1.3 (because the designed mitigation should be discussed
with appropriate stakeholders).
Examples of possible mitigation measures during construction include:
Noise: Example measures could include the early development of bunds that help screen construction noise and
later become part of the overall landscaping of a project, or Designer input in the phasing of the development or the
timing of noisy works.
Possible measures to limit disruption include time restrictions to limit noisy operations to certain hours of the day (or
to limit very noisy operations to short, intermittent spells), using mufflers or silencers on equipment, reducing drop
heights into lorries or skips, or erecting noise screens around the site.
Vibration: For example, use of hydraulic shears instead of hydraulic impact breakers; jacking of steel sheet piles
instead of hammer-driven piling; use of chemical splitters or falling weight breakers instead of pneumatic breakers
and drills.
Emissions (including dust and odour): Example measures include damping down haul roads and siting of dust-
producing operations away from neighbours, or appropriate selection of construction plant and its regular
maintenance to ensure emissions are kept within strict limits
Light: All lighting for the final project, as well as all compound and site lighting, should be designed to prevent
spillage of light into neighbouring buildings or areas. Construction lighting is often extremely powerful to allow
work to continue safely outside daylight hours. Apart from causing considerable nuisance and disrupting the sleep
of site neighbours, it can also cause disruption to wildlife.
Construction effects on neighbours (fixed) (6.2.6)

Credits can only be scored if the plan is comprehensive. Included in this plan or section of a plan should be:
l guidance or method statements on how to avoid unnecessary noise and ground-borne noise;
l measures to reduce disruption caused by site traffic;
l measures to minimise dust and odour emissions; and
l measures to avoid light pollution.
Note that the plan needs to cover all four issues to score these credits.

Some examples of such measures are listed in the relevant sub-sections in this chapter. For further guidance see
CIRIA Environmental good practice on site guide (fourth edition) (C741, 2015).
Corrective actions are steps that are taken to eliminate the causes of existing nonconformities in order to prevent
recurrence. The corrective action process tries to make sure that existing nonconformities and potentially undesirable
situations don't happen again.
Implementation of mitigation measures during construction (6.2.7)

Innovative solutions to minimise nuisance during construction (6.2.8)

Examples of innovative solutions provided by submitted CEEQUAL assessments for 6.2.8 include: Hydrogen fuel cell
lighting rigs, high strength polystyrene blocks to reduce noise from falling demolition, sound jackets on jack
hammers, king sheet piles, electronic ticketing systems for vehicle deliveries, Building Information Modelling (BIM)
for concrete supply calculations, geotextiles/soil stabilisation for access roads and crane hardstanding, foldable and
moveable noise barriers, water and mist diffuser, 'Right of Way' for local residents affected by site location, and
sound-silencer for cutting stone.
Monitoring of effects on neighbours (6.2.9)

It is acknowledged that it is very easy to accidentally exceed emission restrictions for short periods. What is assessed
here is whether monitoring has taken place and has effectively assisted in alerting site staff to breaches in limits so
that appropriate control measures could be taken.
Achievement of effective mitigation during construction (6.2.10)

Physical damage by vibration (6.2.11)

This focuses on vibration, rather than on physical damage that may have other causes (such as trucks damaging
verges). It is one of CEEQUAL's criteria that cannot be proved by positive evidence – hence the requirement for a
signed statement from the Project Director.
Mitigation of operation effects (6.2.12)

The proposals being assessed for implementation in this criterion are the proposals assessed in 6.2.3.
Note that 'implemented' must be assessed appropriately up to the point of the assessment being done. If all
mitigation measures are included in the scope of the project being assessed, then credits can be scored only if they
have been implemented in full. However, if the measures need to be implemented during the early stages of
operation after the completion of the construction stage, then the assessments must be against what can reasonably
be achieved by the end of construction, not against a prediction of what is anticipated to be implemented in the
long term.
Evidence
6.2.1 Identification of potential Evidence could be a written report on the results of the baseline studies
effects on neighbours during appropriate to the scale of the project. Evidence may also be found in the ES if
construction one was completed.
6.2.2 Identification of potential
effects on neighbours in
operation


6.2.3 Mitigating effects on Evidence would include two-way correspondence with relevant stakeholders
neighbours in operation with regard to predicted impacts and proposed mitigation measures,
particularly including the local authority on noise and air quality related
matters.
6.2.4 Innovative solutions for Evidence needs to be provided to show design changes made subsequent to
nuisance mitigation in operation planning approval that were not also planning conditions. Further Contractor
evidence may be in the form of As Built Drawings. The ability of these changes
to mitigate nuisance needs to be mutually agreed between Assessor and
Verifier.
6.2.5 Mitigating effects on Evidence would include two-way correspondence with relevant stakeholders
neighbours during construction with regard to predicted impacts and proposed mitigation measures,
particularly including the local authority on noise and air quality related
matters.
6.2.6 Construction effects on Evidence can be in the form of a SEMP or appropriate section of a PEMP
neighbours (fixed) supported by consultation documents such as letters or emails, project
newsletters and public event notices.
6.2.7 Implementation of Evidence can be included in the relevant sections of the SEMP or in drawings
mitigation measures during and specifications, minutes of site meetings or photographic evidence for
construction physical measures.
6.2.8 Innovative solutions to
minimise nuisance during
construction
6.2.9 Monitoring of effects on Evidence would include Pollution Prevention and Control plans and Action
neighbours Plans to prevent excessive emissions. These should include appropriate
emission monitoring records and methods statements if these were considered
needed. Any monitoring of noise should be appropriate to the frequencies
likely to be encountered.
6.2.10 Achievement of effective Evidence would need to show that any exceedances have been acted upon
mitigation during construction promptly and effectively. Such evidence may be found within a complaints
procedure and associated remediation action plans and/or follow-up
procedures and records. For full marks, a full set of monitoring data for the full
length of the construction works must be provided. This must demonstrate that
there were no exceedances, or that any exceedances due to unpredictable
circumstances were managed, remedied within an acceptable timeframe with
"lessons learned", and communicated to relevant stakeholders.
6.2.11 Physical damage by Evidence could be a signed statement from the Project Director that the project
vibration caused no vibration damage during construction.
6.2.12 Mitigation of operation Evidence needs to show that all proposals for mitigation have been
effects implemented or installed during construction. This could be in the form of
construction records or a written report by the Designer or equivalent person
closely involved in the development of the mitigation proposals. If it is not
possible to show full implementation at the end of construction then the
evidence should demonstrate that the implementation is 'on track' for
achieving the aimed-for final condition.

7 Resources CEEQUAL Version 6 | International Projects
7 Resources
Summary
The Resources category promotes the prudent and responsible use of all physical resources including materials,
energy, and water. It focuses on reducing whole life impacts from resource use by encouraging consideration of the
environmental impacts of design, construction, and operation throughout the life of the asset. The category
encourages users to evaluate resource use within the context of a circular economy taking actions that are focused
on reducing waste in accordance with the waste hierarchy.

7.1 Strategy for resource efficiency 107
7.2 Reducing whole life carbon emissions 108
7.3 Environmental impact of construction products 152
7.4 Circular use of construction products 254
7.5 Responsible sourcing of construction products 49
7.6 Construction waste management 130
7.7 Energy use 450
7.8 Water use 200
1450

CEEQUAL Version 6 | International Projects 7 Resources
7.1 Strategy for resource efficiency
Aim
To embed consideration of the efficient use of energy, water, and materials throughout the project's planning,
design, and delivery.
Assessment scope

7.1.3 Policies and targets for This can only be scoped out on projects that can demonstrate operation of the
resource efficiency in operation works is not relevant, such as land remediation works or flood defence banks.
Credit summary
(up to)
7.1.1 Project resources strategy (fixed) 10
7.1.2 Supporting resource efficiency objectives in contracts 4
(fixed)
7.1.3 Policies and targets for resource efficiency in operation 5 (up to) 5 (up to)
7.1.4 Policies and targets for resource efficiency during 5 (up to) 5 (up to)
construction (fixed)
7.1.5 Implementing policies and targets for resource 7 7 7
efficiency (fixed)
7.1.6 Implementing the project resources strategy (fixed) 10 (up to)
7.1.7 Material resource efficiency plan (fixed) 10 (up to)
7.1.8 Construction resources strategy (fixed) 6
7.1.9 Implementing the construction resources strategy (fixed) 12 (up to)
7.1.10 Implementing the material resource efficiency plan 14
(fixed)
Assessment criteria
7.1.1 Project resources strategy (fixed) Str Des Con
7.1.1.1 The Client and/or the Designers have prepared a project resources 10 (up to)
strategy in line with the guidance and covering the aspects below.
Aspect covered Credits (each)

(i) Energy 2 for each
(ii) Water
(iii) Materials sourcing
(iv) Reuse and recycling
(v) Wastes management

(fixed)
7.1.2 Supporting resource efficiency objectives in contracts Str Des Con
7.1.2.1 Resource efficiency objectives and (where appropriate) benchmarks 4
and/or targets have been included within relevant contract documentation.
7.1.3 Policies and targets for resource efficiency in operation Str Des Con
7.1.3.1 All those directly engaged in the strategy and design of the project 5 (up to) 5 (up to)
have formal corporate-level policies and targets for ensuring physical resources
can be used in the most efficient way in the operation of the works.
Outcome Credits (each,

per stage)
(i) Using materials more efficiently 1 for each (at
(ii) Reducing waste each stage)
(iii) Using water more efficiently

(iv) Using energy more efficiently
(v) Reducing carbon emissions
7.1.4 Policies and targets for resource efficiency during Str Des Con
construction (fixed) 5 (up to) 5 (up to)
7.1.4.1 All those directly engaged in the project have formal corporate-level
policies and targets for ensuring physical resources are used in the most
efficient way in the design and construction process.
Outcome Credits (each,

per stage)
(i) Using materials more efficiently 1 for each (at
(ii) Reducing waste each stage)
(iii) Using water more efficiently

(iv) Using energy more efficiently
(v) Reducing carbon emissions
7.1.5 Implementing policies and targets for resource efficiency Str Des Con
(fixed)
7 7 7
7.1.5.1 The policies and targets described in 7.1.3 and 7.1.4 have been
implemented and monitored on the project.
7.1.6 Implementing the project resources strategy (fixed) Str Des Con
7.1.6.1 The resources strategy for the project in 7.1.1 has been implemented 10 (up to)
in, and significantly influenced, the design and covers the aspects below..
Aspect implemented Credits (each)

(i) Energy 2 for each
(ii) Water
(iii) Materials sourcing
(iv) Reuse and recycling
(v) Wastes management

7.1.7 Material resource efficiency plan (fixed) Str Des Con

7.1.7.1 A plan that identifies opportunities for improving material resource 10 (up to)
efficiency and reducing waste using the five key principles has been prepared.
Key principle Credits (each)

(i) Reuse and recovery 2 for each
(ii) Off-site construction
(iii) Materials optimisation
(iv) Waste efficient procurement
(v) Deconstruction and flexibility
7.1.8 Construction resources strategy (fixed) Str Des Con

7.1.8.1 The construction team has developed their own resources strategy for 6
the construction stage of the project or reviewed and refined the strategy
developed by the Client and Designers. The strategy covers the following:
l the key materials and components to be incorporated in the project

l the remote impacts of winning those materials from the planet
l the sourcing of energy supplies for the construction stage
l the use and management of other resources
7.1.9 Implementing the construction resources strategy (fixed) Str Des Con
7.1.9.1 The actions (by number) identified in the construction stage resources 12 (up to)
strategy in 7.1.8 have been implemented.
Outcome Credits
(a) 25% or more 3
(b) 50% or more 6
(c) 75% or more 9
(d) 90% or more 12
7.1.10 Implementing the material resource efficiency plan (fixed) Str Des Con
7.1.10.1 The material resource efficiency plan in 7.1.7 has been implemented 14
and monitored.
Guidance
Project resources strategy (fixed) (7.1.1)
A 'Project Resources Strategy' is important to enable delivery of the performance-orientated questions. The materials
element of such a strategy would be expected to be based on a life-cycle analysis and the cradle-to-cradle principle
but does not have to be generated that way. It would be expected to cover but not be limited to:
l the key materials and components to be incorporated in the project (by volume, value and/or propensity to
be wasted);
l the remote impacts of extracting those materials from the planet and then processing them for use or into
components;
l opportunities to improve the resource efficiency of the project;
l the sourcing of energy supplies for operation of the works if relevant;
l the use and management of other resources to be used for operation of the completed works; and
l sustainability considerations at the end of the useful life – for example design for re-use and recycling at end
of life.

Examples of the remote impacts could be from mining of bulk materials or ores. Examples of the resources used in
operation of the completed works could include process chemicals in water and wastewater treatment plants, salt
and other chemicals for road or airport de-icing; and feedstock fuels for power stations.
The EU Resource Efficiency Roadmap is part of the Resource Efficiency Flagship of the Europe 2020 Strategy. The
Europe 2020 Strategy is the European Union's growth strategy for the present decade and is aimed at establishing a
smart, sustainable and inclusive economy with high levels of employment, productivity and social cohesion. The
Roadmap can be helpful in developing the materials elements of a resource strategy - see
http://ec.europa.eu/environment/resource_efficiency/index_en.htm.
Such a strategy is only of value if it is actively implemented in the design and construction so 7.1.6 seeks evidence
that that the strategy has been implemented at the design stage, while 7.1.2 seeks evidence that the requirements of
the strategy at have been cascaded into the contract documentation for implementation during the construction
stage.
Supporting resource efficiency objectives in contracts (fixed) (7.1.2)

This seeks evidence that the requirements of the strategy at have been cascaded into the contract documentation for
implementation during the construction stage. This cannot be scoped out if 7.1.1 has failed to score.
Policies and targets for resource efficiency in operation (7.1.3, 7.1.4, 7.1.5)
This focuses on integrating material, waste and water-specific objectives throughout the project cycle to demonstrate
that good practice has been adopted from the earliest possible stage.
All organisations directly appointed to the project should have corporate environmental policies that set out at a
high level their commitments to managing the environmental impacts of their operations and activities. However, for
the purpose of this requirement an environmental policy is not considered sufficient in isolation. To score,
organisations should be able to demonstrate that they have adopted specific policies, which have then been
translated into specific actions and targets on the project.
Key issues for Clients to consider include setting corporate objectives and targets for material use, waste and water
use in their operations and, ensuring these are transferred to the project team in project procurement (appointing
Designers and Contractors, tender and contract documentation) and engaging with the supply chain.
For Designers, this means demonstrating that they are actively working with Clients and Contractors to identify
opportunities and create design solutions that minimise waste and use materials, energy and water more efficiently,
both in operation of the completed project and in the construction process.
Similarly, Contractors need to demonstrate that corporate policies are being implemented within the project,
including setting requirements for and engaging with their sub-contractors and suppliers. In common with Clients,
Contractors would be expected to have in place measurement, monitoring and reporting procedures to capture
achievements.
For all organisations, corporate reporting is also an important aspect to demonstrate that the improvements as a
result of policies and commitments are being measured and monitored. For Designers, this means measuring the
potential improvement at project level and reporting this at a corporate level to demonstrate how proactively they
consider the issues in their work.
There is increasing focus on the broader impacts of resources and the need to move to a more circular economy
where waste is designed out and there is a stronger emphasis on the life cycle value of the product or asset.
Organisations in the construction industry are increasingly demonstrating their commitment to a more resource
efficient industry.
Implementing the project resources strategy (fixed) (7.1.6)

This seeks evidence that the strategy has been implemented at the design stage. This cannot be scoped out if 7.1.1
has failed to score.
Material resource efficiency plan (fixed) (7.1.7)

This embodies the five key principles that are set out in the WRAP guidance Designing out waste: a design team
guide for civil engineering and can be adopted to improve material resource efficiency and reduce waste through
design. The principles should be applied as early as possible in the design life cycle to give the maximum scope for

achieving efficiencies. They also need to be applied throughout the project life cycle to ensure that the potential
improvements identified are achieved during construction. Therefore, the maximum score can only be achieved when
the incorporation of all five principles are clearly demonstrated. It is acknowledged that not all of these principles are
applicable to all projects, for example, where off-site construction is just not possible. However, a score can still be
achieved where it is shown that the principle has been considered even if it was then discounted.
Metric guidance
Material resource efficiency plans may include targets that have been set for each of the five key principles. The
following (see below) metrics are examples that could be used. Others may be used if they are felt to be more
suitable and can be justified as leading to reduced environmental impact:
Design targets for reuse and recovery, reported through metrics such as:
Percentage by volume of predicted suitable/usable material from demolition or deconstruction that should be
incorporated into the project, using a formula such as:
Percentage by volume of predicted excavated material that should be beneficially reused on site, using a formula
such as:
Design targets for off-site construction, reported through a metric such as:
Percentage by volume of components constructed off-site (components capable of being constructed off-site), using
a formula such as:
Design targets for materials optimisation, reported through a metric such as:
Predicted wastage rate per £100k project construction value, using a formula such as:
Construction resources strategy (fixed) (7.1.8)

This is seeking for the Contractor to have a strategy in place, including for their supply chain.
Guidance on improving the resource efficiency of construction and on using procurement to set requirements for
Constructors is available from CIRIA.
The CIRIA guidance sets the requirement for the supply chain to set corporate level commitments to improving
resource efficiency. This commitment is then embedded into contract or sub-contract documentation and
construction processes in line with the sustainability-driven strategy for the project. All actions, targets or
benchmarks, and actual performance should be captured within a RMP and Record (or similar) for the project.
Other approaches to meeting these requirements would include the use of specific resource efficiency metrics (such
as materials use, wastage or embodied carbon) together with an action plan that sets out clear responsibilities for
specific parties in improving resource efficiency. There should be a contractual requirement to develop and/or
implement such an action plan.
Finally, it should be noted that, since sustainability is about balancing the environmental, social and economic
aspects of a project, this means that the best (sustainability-driven) option for a project does not necessarily mean it
will be the best environmental option.
Implementing the material resource efficiency plan (fixed) (7.1.10)

Implementation needs to demonstrate that practices have been implemented that clearly demonstrate material
resource efficiencies and/or waste reductions.

Metric guidance
Implementation of the resource efficiency plan may be reported by providing evidence of measuring and monitoring
against the targets set in 7.1.7, by calculation of:
Percentage by volume of suitable/usable material from demolition or de-construction on site that has been
incorporated into the project, using a formula such as:
Percentage by volume of excavated material that has been beneficially reused on site, using a formula such as:
Achieved for off-site construction:
Percentage by volume of components actually constructed off-site, using a formula such as:
Achieved material optimisation:
Wastage rate per £100k project construction value, using a formula such as:
Percentage reduction of total material consumed, per £100k project construction value, based on a measure of:
The total volume of materials should be a sum of all materials ordered and delivered to site or derived from site, for
use or to aid the construction of the finished works.
Evidence
7.1.1 Project resources strategy Evidence could be a document entitled 'Project Resources Strategy' with the
(fixed) attributes indicated in the guidance or could be a series of less-broad analyses
that, taken together, provide the high-level, strategic overview that can provide
significant input to the project concept and design. The evidence must be in
scale to the nature, location, context and size of the project. A two-page
summary report would be insufficient for a multi-million-pound project, yet a
100-page detailed analysis is very unlikely to be appropriate for projects in the
region of £1M.
7.1.2 Supporting resource Evidence of the contract should be provided which should contain suitable
efficiency objectives in contracts resource efficiency clauses within it.
(fixed)


7.1.3 Policies and targets for Evidence could be a copy of specific, formally adopted policies and targets. For
resource efficiency in operation 7.1.5 evidence could include action plans that demonstrate implementation of
the policies or copies of annual reports (such as an Environmental or Corporate
7.1.4 Policies and targets for Social Responsibility (CSR) report) demonstrating the measurement of
resource efficiency during performance against targets. Evidence could also outline the policies and
construction (fixed) targets that have been set and any monitoring metrics or measures set to be
used throughout the project to monitor their achievement. Additional evidence
7.1.5 Implementing policies and would be copies of the procurement documentation and contracts showing
targets for resource efficiency these requirements have been cascaded throughout the supply chain and
(fixed) adopted in the project.
7.1.6 Implementing the project Evidence is likely to be design stage reports showing how the resources strategy
resources strategy (fixed) for the project has influenced the design.
7.1.7 Material resource efficiency Evidence could be a specific materials plan or a specific consideration recorded
plan (fixed) within design meeting records. It could also include the reports from a formal
workshop. Implementation of the recommendations could be demonstrated by
incorporation into specifications and drawings, or through physical evidence
such as photographs. Evidence could also include data quantifying material
savings or waste reductions, which could include decisions and information
recorded in the SWMP. Evidence could alternatively include the calculation and
7.1.8 Construction resources Evidence will be in the reports of the assessments and in the CMP or equivalent.
strategy (fixed) Evidence should involve demonstration of how the Client's commitment and
resources strategy (assessed under 7.1.1 has been addressed in the planning
and preparation for the construction stage – for example, evidence of a RMP, a
resources section of a Construction Management Plan, or similar. Such
7.1.9 Implementing the documents should be detailing both predicted and actual performance against
construction resources strategy benchmarks for metrics such as energy consumption, water use, materials
(fixed) consumption, and waste minimisation. Simply specifying that a practitioner is
committed but without any further evidence is insufficient for achieving the
credits.
7.1.10 Implementing the Implementation of the plan could be demonstrated by incorporation into
material resource efficiency plan specifications, drawings and materials orders, or through construction records
(fixed) and physical evidence such as photographs. Evidence could alternatively include
the calculation and reporting of the metric-based guidance.

7.2 Reducing whole life carbon emissions
Aim
To drive the assessment, reporting, and reduction of whole-life carbon emissions throughout the project's planning,
design, delivery and future management.
Assessment scope

7.2.2 Independent third-party This can be scoped out on very small value or short duration projects that are
certification of carbon not part of a programme of work. It may also be scoped out in countries or
management regions where it is not possible to receive independent third-party certification.
Credit summary
(up to) (up to)
7.2.1 Carbon management (fixed) 18 18 18 (up to)
7.2.2 Independent third-party certification of carbon 9 9 9
management
7.2.3 Achieving carbon reduction targets (fixed) 27 (up to)
7.2.4 Exemplary level: Net zero carbon (fixed) 1% (exemplary)
Assessment criteria
7.2.1 Carbon management (fixed) Str Des Con
7.2.1.1 A carbon management approach has been adopted during the 18 (up to) 18 (up to) 18 (up to)
strategy, design, or construction of the project that fully or partially conforms
with PAS 2080 as indicated in the table below.
Parts of PAS 2080 conformed with Credits (per

Clause 7 Clause 8 Target Clause 9 Clause 10 All other stage)
Quantification setting, Reporting Continual clauses
of GHG baseline setting improvement
emissions and monitoring
(a) 4
(b) 8
(c) 12
(d) 18
7.2.2 Independent third-party certification of carbon management Str Des Con

7.2.2.1 The carbon management process adopted during the strategy, design, 9 9 9
and construction of the project in 7.2.1 has been independently third-party
certified as fully conforming with PAS 2080.

(fixed)
7.2.3 Achieving carbon reduction targets Str Des Con
7.2.3.1 The project has achieved its carbon emission reduction targets 27 (up to)
identified in the carbon management process in 7.2.1.
Outcome Credits
(a) Targets not met, but lessons learned have been documented and publicly shared in a 13
case study.
(b) Targets have been met or exceeded. 27
7.2.4 Exemplary level: Net zero carbon (fixed) Str Des Con
7.2.4.1 The PAS 2080 compliant results demonstrate that the project has 1% (exemplary)
achieved net zero carbon on its whole life emissions.
Guidance
Carbon management (fixed) (7.2.1)
PAS 2080 is applicable to anyone involved in the delivery of infrastructure, including asset owners/managers,
designers, constructors and product/material suppliers. Complying with the requirements of PAS 2080 will help all
value chain members understand and manage carbon associated with the development of infrastructure from its
inception to its end-of-life and is equally applicable to individual assets or to programmes.
Relevant value chain members must be involved in the carbon management process at each stage of the project. If
partial conformity with PAS 2080 is being sought then the value chain members that must be involved at each
assessment stage, as a minimum, are given in the table below. All value chain members must be involved for Whole
Project Assessments.
Assessment stage Required value chain members (as a minimum)

Strategy Client
Design Design team organisation(s)
Construction Principal contractor
Where the project is claiming full conformance with PAS 2080, this must be in accordance with one of the three
claims of conformity recognised in clause 12 of PAS 2080:
a. Independent third-party certification (clause 12.2.2) – also see 7.2.2 below

b. Other-party validation (clause 12.2.3)
c. Self-validation (clause 12.2.4)
Some of the requirements of PAS 2080, including those set out in clause 5 (Leadership and Governance) and clause
6 (Carbon Management Process), are covered by CEEQUAL in 1.1 Sustainability leadership and 7.1 Strategy for
resource efficiency. Parts of clause 7 (Quantification of GHG Emissions) are covered in 7.3 Environmental impact of
construction products.
Independent third-party certification of carbon management (7.2.2)

Independent third-party certification to PAS 2080, as described in clause 12.2.2 of the standard, offers the greatest
level of assurance of the carbon management process used on a project or programme. Certification of the process –
including the quantification methodology and data sources used to calculate carbon impacts and reductions –
increases the confidence that other stakeholders can have in the results.
Carbon reporting is also increasingly important for project financing, especially those seeking Green Investment
Bonds. Some projects will also be reported through the GRESB infrastructure annual survey or funded through
government investment and thereby also require high levels of reporting assurance to demonstrate compliance with
international climate commitments.
The credits in 7.2.2 can only be awarded if full credits in 7.2.1 have been achieved.

Achieving carbon reduction targets (fixed) (7.2.3)

There are no set or fixed carbon emission reductions required as these should be calculated and assessed in relation
to the specifics of each project. Providing that the project or programme has undertaken quantification of emissions,
created a robust target for reduction, and shown that appropriate actions have resulted in a reduction in carbon
then credits can be awarded in accordance with the table.
Exemplary level: Net zero carbon (fixed) (7.2.4)

The Paris Agreement, under the United Nations Framework Convention on Climate Change (UNFCCC), provides a
framework for governments as well as businesses and investors to keep global warming well below 2°C and seeks to
limit the temperature increase to 1.5°C.
CEEQUAL wholly supports the need to dramatically cut greenhouse gas emissions and therefore awards exemplary
performance credits where a net-zero carbon target can be demonstrated as being met.
Evidence
7.2.1 Carbon management Evidence should cover the items set out in PAS 2080. It should include
(fixed) information on quantification of carbon emissions, setting baselines and
targets, monitoring and reporting, and processes for continual improvement (as
applicable). Evidence for full conformity to PAS 2080 could include assessment
reports that identify the basis of the claim of conformity (self-validation, other-
party validation, or independent third-party certification).
7.2.2 Independent third-party Evidence will include the certificate(s) from an independent third-party showing
certification of carbon that the carbon management process used on the project has fully conformed
management with PAS 2080.
7.2.3 Achieving carbon Evidence will come from the carbon management process and will need to
reduction targets (fixed) show how the reduction target was set, the calculated baseline carbon
emissions, and the final calculated carbon emissions. Whether meeting the
target or not, evidence should show to what extent the carbon reduction target
has been met. Where targets haven't been met, a publicly shared case study
that explains the lessons learned should be provided in addition to the
requirements above.
7.2.4 Exemplary level: Net zero Evidence is likely to be an output from a formal carbon management process
carbon (fixed) that shows the calculated whole life carbon emissions for the project are zero or
negative. Evidence should include details of the calculation methodology,
sources of data, and any assumptions or limitations. Evidence at the
construction stage must reflect the project as built at practical completion.
Definitions
Net zero carbon
At present there is no specific methodology for assessing net zero carbon within infrastructure. As a pragmatic
response, that encourages users to seek to meet this challenge starting today, CEEQUAL has therefore adapted the
current definition for net zero carbon from the UKGBC Advancing Net Zero Programme.
The UKGBC definition of net zero carbon does not yet provide a complete definition of net zero carbon for the
whole life of an asset. It does provide a definition of net zero carbon for 'construction' and 'operational energy', as
follows, which together form the minimum scope accepted by CEEQUAL for net-zero carbon.
Net zero carbon – construction: When the amount of carbon emissions associated with [an asset's] product and
construction stages up to practical completion is zero or negative, through the use of offsets or the net export of on-
site renewable energy.

Net zero carbon – operational energy: When the amount of carbon emissions associated with [the asset's]
operational energy on an annual basis is zero or negative. A net zero carbon [asset] is highly energy efficient and
powered from on-site and/or off-site renewable energy sources, with any remaining carbon balance offset.
PAS 2080 Carbon management in infrastructure
PAS 2080:2016 Carbon management in infrastructure is a framework for managing whole life carbon emissions for
all value chain members involved in delivering infrastructure assets and programmes of work. It was commissioned
by the Green Construction Board to reduce carbon, reduce cost, and promote innovation through more collaborative
ways of working.
PAS 2080 can be downloaded for free from: https://shop.bsigroup.com/ProductDetail/?pid=000000000030323493.
A detailed supporting guidance document for PAS 2080 is also available for free from:
http://www.constructionleadershipcouncil.co.uk/wp-content/uploads/2019/06/Guidance-Document-for-PAS2080_
vFinal.pdf
UKGBC Advancing Net Zero

Although UKGBC main focus is on buildings their recent net zero framework guide provides useful reference for the
understanding of the challenge and practical actions necessary to make progress in dealing with net zero carbon
challenge.
A free copy of the publication, entitled Net Zero Carbon Buildings: A Framework Definition (dated April 2019), can
be obtained from: https://www.ukgbc.org/ukgbc-work/advancing-net-zero/

7.3 Environmental impact of construction products
Aim
To reduce the burden on the environment from construction products through the use of life cycle assessment (LCA)
and the adoption of best practice in selection of products with a low environmental impact (including embodied
carbon) over the life cycle of the asset.
Assessment scope

7.3.3 Hazardous materials The decision to scope out will depend on the nature, scale, location and context
of the project.
7.3.4 Low-VOC and/or The decision to scope out will depend on the nature, scale, location and context
biodegradable coatings of the project.
7.3.5 Application of coatings Scope out if no coatings or treatments used, or if factory application is
impossible or impractical – for example if coatings to in-situ concrete are the
only coatings used.
Credit summary
(up to)
7.3.1 Life cycle assessment (fixed) 100
7.3.2 Environmental Product Declarations (EPDs) (fixed) 17
7.3.3 Hazardous materials 12
7.3.4 Low-VOC and/or biodegradable coatings 6 (up to) 6 (up to)
7.3.5 Application of coatings 11
Assessment criteria
7.3.1 Life cycle assessment (fixed) Str Des Con
7.3.1.1 A life cycle assessment (LCA) has been undertaken and used to reduce 100 (up to)
the environmental impact of the project.
Outcome Credits
(a) Product life cycle assessments 15
(b) Screening carbon footprint 50
(c) Complete carbon footprint 75
(d) Screening life cycle assessment 50
(e) Simplified life cycle assessment 75
(f) Complete life cycle assessment 100

7.3.2 Environmental Product Declarations (EPDs) (fixed) Str Des Con

7.3.2.1 The suitably experienced carbon or LCA practitioner identifies ten key 17
products within the assessed asset. Five of these products are specified within
the final asset based on the analysis of product specific, independently verified,
third party Environmental Product Declarations.
7.3.2.2 The EPDs must inform specification recommendations made by the suitably experienced carbon or LCA
practitioner and the EPDs relating to the products used in the final asset must be requested and documented.
7.3.3 Hazardous materials Str Des Con

7.3.3.1 An assessment has been made at the design stage to substitute 12
hazardous materials with less hazardous materials wherever possible.
7.3.4 Low-VOC and/or biodegradable coatings Str Des Con

7.3.4.1 A percentage of all coatings and other treatments (for temporary and 6 (up to) 6 (up to)
permanent works) have been specified as low-VOC and/or biodegradable and
subsequently used as specified.
(i) Specified
Percentage specified Credits Assessment

stage
(a1) 10% or more 2 Design
(b1) 40% or more 4
(c1) 80% or more 6
(ii) Used
Percentage used Credits Assessment

stage
(a2) 10% or more 2 Construction
(b2) 40% or more 4
(c2) 80% or more 6
7.3.5 Application of coatings Str Des Con

7.3.5.1 All appropriate coatings and treatments for permanent work materials 11
have been factory-applied (except for cut ends).
Guidance
Life cycle assessment (fixed) (7.3.1)
Product life cycle assessments
1. A suitably experienced carbon or life cycle assessment (LCA) practitioner carries out product life cycle
assessments for ten key products within the assessed asset using existing product specific Environmental
Product Declarations (EPDs) or generic LCA data.
2. The suitably experienced practitioner considers a minimum of three functionally appropriate options for each
key product and makes recommendations to the project team to reduce the environmental impact of each
product. As a minimum, total carbon equivalent emissions should be considered over the expected lifetime
over the asset.
3. The project team demonstrate how the recommendations have been taken forward for the fully constructed
asset and report the LCA data for each product in the CEEQUAL online tool.

Screening carbon footprint
1. A screening carbon footprint in completed before finalising the concept design by a suitably experienced
carbon or LCA practitioner to estimate the total carbon equivalent impact associated with the asset over its
life cycle (modules A-C) set out in EN 15978
2. The screening identifies the significant sources of emissions over the expected lifetime of the asset.
3. Total carbon emissions or Global Warming Potential (kgCO2e) are reported.
4. Recommendations are made to the project team to inform future design decisions and include the goal and
scope of any further assessment.
5. The suitably experienced carbon or LCA practitioner uses appropriate standards and sources of data and
documents the assessment process with all decisions justified.
6. Total carbon equivalent emissions of the asset are reported within the CEEQUAL online tool.
Cut-off criteria for the carbon impact assessment
Where the carbon equivalent impact of an activity is estimated to account for no more than 1% of the total impact of
that module, that activity may be omitted from the assessment. The proportion of total neglected activities within a
module, e.g. per module A1-A3, A4-A5, B1-B5, B6-B7, C1-4 and module D (where calculated) should not exceed 5%
of the total impact within that module.
Although this rule should be upheld wherever possible it is appreciated that at the screening stage not all the detail
of the project will be known. The practitioner can exceed this cut-off criteria where the corresponding impact can be
deemed negligible and justified.
This cut off criteria cannot be applied in order to hide data. Any application of the cut-off criteria should be
documented.
Screening life cycle assessment
1. A screening LCA is completed before finalising the concept design by a suitably experienced LCA practitioner
to establish the environmental impact associated with the asset over its complete life cycle (modules A-C) in
line with the principles set out in EN 15978 and the EeB Guidance document.
2. The screening identifies significant sources of the following indicators over the expected lifetime of the asset:
a. Total carbon equivalent emissions or Global Warming Potential (kgCO2e)
b. Net use of freshwater (m3)
c. Hazardous waste disposed (kg)
d. Non-hazardous waste disposed (kg)
3. Recommendations are made to the project team to inform future design decisions and include the goal and
scope of any further assessment.
4. The suitably experienced LCA practitioner sources data in line with the principles set out in EN 15978 and the
EeB Guide and documents the assessment process with all decisions justified.
5. The results of the screening LCA are reported in the CEEQUAL online tool for the four indicators listed above.
Complete carbon footprint
1. A complete carbon footprint is undertaken to establish the carbon footprint associated with all life cycle
stages of the asset.
2. Total carbon emissions or Global Warming Potential (kgCO2e) is evaluated and reported in line with the
principles set out in EN 15978 and the EeB Guidance document for modules A-C and D (module D is
optional but can be included where the carbon/LCA practitioner considers it feasible and relevant).
3. The suitably experienced carbon practitioner considers a range of functionally appropriate options and
identifies impacts over the expected lifetime of the asset. Recommendations are provided to minimise the
carbon footprint, prioritising those that result in the biggest reduction in impact.
4. The project team demonstrate how the recommendations resulted in changes in the design and an overall
reduction in impact.
5. Total carbon emissions or Global Warming Potential (kgCO2e) is reported in the CEEQUAL online tool,
including the total carbon equivalent reported in reference to the asset's capacity.
Simplified life cycle assessment
1. A simplified LCA is undertaken to establish the environmental impact associated with all life cycle stages of
the asset.
2. The following indicators are evaluated and reported in line with the principles set out in EN 15978 and the
EeB Guidance document for modules A-C and D (module D is optional but can be included where the

carbon/LCA practitioner considers it feasible and relevant):

l Total carbon equivalent or Global Warming Potential
l Net use of freshwater
l Hazardous waste disposed
l Non-hazardous waste disposed.
3. The suitably experienced LCA practitioner considers a range of functionally appropriate options and
environmental impact, prioritising those that result in the biggest reduction in impact.
5. All LCA indicators investigated are reported in the CEEQUAL online tool, including the total carbon
equivalent reported in reference to the asset's capacity.
Complete life cycle assessment
1. A complete LCA is undertaken to establish the environmental impact associated with all life cycle stages of
the asset.
2. The following indicators are evaluated and reported in line with the principles set out in EN 15978 and the
EeB Guidance document for modules A-C and D (module D is optional but can be included where the
carbon/LCA practitioner considers it feasible and relevant):
l Total carbon equivalent or Global Warming Potential (kgCO2e)
l Net use of freshwater (m3)
l Hazardous waste disposed (kg)
l Non-hazardous waste disposed (kg)
l Radioactive waste disposed (dm3)
l Ozone Depletion Potential (kg eq CFC 11)
l Acidification Potential for Soil and Water (kg eq SO2)
l Eutrophication Potential (kg eq (PO4)3
Photochemical Ozone Creation (kg eq C2H4)
l
Abiotic Depletion Potential – Elements (kg Sbe)

l
l Abiotic Depletion Potential – Fossil Fuels (MJe)

3. The suitably experienced LCA practitioner considers a range of functionally appropriate options and
environmental impact, prioritising those that result in the biggest reduction in impact.
5. All LCA indicators investigated are reported in the CEEQUAL online tool, including the total carbon
equivalent reported in reference to the asset's capacity.
Environmental Product Declarations (EPDs) (fixed) (7.3.2)

In order to determine the ten key products to assess, the suitably qualified carbon or LCA practitioner must consider
as a minimum the key elements of the infrastructure asset and their component products. A justification should be
provided as to how the key products were selected in order to make recommendations that will have the largest
positive impact.
Hazardous materials (7.3.3)

Clearly, the most environmentally beneficial approach is to avoid the use of hazardous substances altogether and
then to use products of a less hazardous nature where complete substitution is not possible. Increasingly,
manufacturers and suppliers are bringing to market products with lower levels of hazardous substances or which
contain substances of a less hazardous nature. These include, for example, low-VOC coatings and treatments.
Low-VOC and/or biodegradable coatings (7.3.4)

It should be noted that low-VOC coatings and treatments are not always practical or appropriate for certain
applications. In cases such as these, this requirement should be scoped out. See British Coatings Federation's
publication, The VOC Handbook, available to download from www.coatings.org.uk, for advice and guidance.
Application of coatings (7.3.5)

Note that this applies to all coatings for the permanent works, not just to timber coatings.

Evidence
7.3.1 Life cycle assessment (fixed) To encourage users to fully consider impacts of carbon over the lifetime of the
asset CEEQUAL permits evaluation to be undertaken in variety of ways with
scores being granted on the basis comprehensiveness and robustness. This
flexible approach is permitted in order to recognise that projects with differing
scale and type will have differing levels of impact and access to expertise to
assess the impacts and opportunities. In all cases evidence requirements of the
assessments should demonstrate they have been prepared having fully
engaged key representatives of the project delivery team include:
1. Suitably qualified carbon practitioner
2. Contractor
3. Designer
4. Owner/operator.
A screening study should focus on the main contributors to the system under
assessment, including (but not limited to) the input materials, water and energy
use, and the transport of users (if relevant). In carrying out the screening carbon
footprint or LCA care is needed to ensure that omitted products are not
significant for the chosen environmental indicators. To undertake the LCA or
carbon footprint it is not necessary to use a specific tool, however reputable
sources of data should be used as detailed in EN 15978 (section 10, particularly
10.3 and 10.4) and the EeB Guide. When undertaking a complete LCA it is
necessary to establish the environmental impact associated with all life cycle
stages of the asset in line with the principles set out in EN 15978 and the EeB
Guidance document for modules A-C and D (where appropriate).
7.3.2 Environmental Product Evidence should comprise an assessment of the products used by the LCA
Declarations (EPDs) (fixed) practitioner and the relevant EPD certificates.
7.3.3 Hazardous materials Evidence could be a record that these issues have been considered and
decisions acted upon. Meeting notes or material specifications showing the
decisions made would be acceptable. It would also be acceptable to
demonstrate that such requirements were included in contract documents.
7.3.4 Low-VOC and/or Evidence could be in the form of specification or sub-contract records. Any
biodegradable coatings evidence needs to substantiate the percentage being claimed.
7.3.5 Application of coatings Evidence could be in the form of specification or sub-contract requirements,
plus inspection reports or equivalent.
Definitions
Environmental Product Declarations (EPD)
ISO 14025:2017 defines an environmental label or environmental declaration as a claim which indicates the
environmental aspects of a product or service. ISO 14020:2012 goes on to state that environmental labels and
declarations provide information about a product or service concerning its overall environmental character, a specific
environmental aspect, or any number of aspects. BRE are an example of an EPD provider via the BRE Environmental
Profiles Scheme which is being replaced by the new EN 15804 compliant BRE EPD Verification scheme.
Suitably experienced carbon practitioner

An individual who can meet the following requirements can be deemed 'suitably experienced' for the purpose of a
CEEQUAL assessment:
1. Can demonstrate that they do not have a vested interest in the outcome of the infrastructure project and are
not professionally connected with any energy company, low or zero carbon technology or construction
product manufacturer.

2. Has a minimum of three years relevant experience (within the last five years) demonstrating a theoretical and
practical understanding of carbon footprinting or LCA of construction projects. This shall include having
significant technical roles in producing carbon footprinting studies, or multi environmental indicator LCA
studies, of buildings/assets. These studies shall be to ISO 14040 and ISO 14044 (or other relevant national,
ISO or EN standards that are based on ISO 14040 and ISO 14044) and the scope shall include carbon
emissions from the construction product, use and end of life stages.
Suitably experienced LCA practitioner

An individual who can meet the following requirements can be deemed 'suitably experienced' for the purpose of a
CEEQUAL assessment:
1. Can demonstrate that they do not have a vested interest in the outcome of the infrastructure project and are
not professionally connected with any energy company, low or zero carbon technology or construction
product manufacturer.
2. Has a minimum of three years relevant experience (within the last five years) demonstrating a theoretical and
practical understanding of LCA of construction projects. This shall include having significant technical roles
in producing multi environmental indicator LCA studies of buildings/assets. These studies shall be to ISO
14040 and ISO 14044 (or other relevant national, ISO or EN standards that are based on ISO 14040 and ISO
14044) and the scope shall include emissions from the construction product, use and end of life stages.
Independently verified third party Environmental Product Declarations (EPD)

For this issue, the independently verified third party EPDs can cover:
l Partial life cycle (cradle-to-gate or cradle-to-gate with options) OR

l Whole life cycle (cradle-to-grave)
Partial life cycle EPD can cover:
l The product stage only: such an EPD covers raw material supply, transport, manufacturing and associated
processes; this EPD is said to be "cradle to gate"
l The product stage and selected further life cycle stages: such an EPD is said to be "cradle-to-gate with
options".
In both cases, the EPD must be produced in accordance with the requirements within EN 15804 or the ISO 14020
series – particularly ISO 14025 – and ISO 14040 and ISO 14044 (life cycle assessment).
EeBGuide
The EeBGuide project provides information to support LCA which can be found here:
https://www.eebguide.eu/?page_id=704.
Screening, Simplified, and Complete life cycle assessment

These are different levels of detail as defined in the EeB Guide for multi environmental category life cycle assessment.
Screening and Complete carbon footprint

These are different levels of detail as defined in the EeB Guide, but in the case of carbon footprint, shall be limited to
the global warming potential (GWP) environmental category only.

7.4 Circular use of construction products
Aim
To maximise the ongoing value of construction and other resources through the careful design and specification of
materials. This aims to ensure that resources remain in use for as long as possible, that maximum value is extracted
whilst in use, and will be recovered and regenerated at the end of each service life as products and materials that
maintain rather than degrade resource value.
Assessment scope

7.4.1 Business models for a There is no one-size-fits-all approach for an organization to deliver its defined
circular economy – considered circular economy objectives. The decision by the Assessor and Verifier on
7.4.2 Business models for a applicability will depend on the nature, scale, location and context of the
circular economy – implemented project.
7.4.3 Durability and low Scope out only if there are no structures or major components in the project.
maintenance
7.4.5 Future disassembly / de- The decision to scope out will depend on the nature, scale, location and context
construction of the project.
7.4.7 Retention of existing Scope out if no existing structures on site.
structures and materials
7.4.8 On-site use of demolition Scope out only if there was no demolition or deconstruction as part of the
arisings assessed works or if the nature of the works meant there was genuinely no
opportunity for re-use of the materials within the project.
7.4.9 Cut and fill optimisation Scope out only on projects where there is no excavation or in situations where,
for example, a structure such as a tank is completely underground and there are
no options on size (for example storm tanks).
7.4.10 Soil management The decision to scope out will depend on the nature, scale, location and context
of the project.
7.4.11 Beneficial re-use of The decision to scope out will depend on the nature, scale, location and context
topsoil of the project.
7.4.13 Reclaimed or recycled Scope out if the project used no bulk fill or sub-base.
bulk fill and sub-base
Credit summary
(up to)
7.4.1 Business models for a circular economy – considered 6
7.4.2 Business models for a circular economy – implemented 12 (up to)
7.4.3 Durability and low maintenance 11
7.4.4 Long-term planned maintenance (fixed) 12
7.4.5 Future disassembly / de-construction 12 (up to)
7.4.6 Materials register (fixed) 4
(up to)
7.4.7 Retention of existing structures and materials 15


(up to)
7.4.8 On-site use of demolition arisings 32
7.4.9 Cut and fill optimisation 11
7.4.10 Soil management 17
7.4.11 Beneficial re-use of topsoil 8 (up to)
7.4.12 Reclaimed or recycled materials (fixed) 7 (up to) 7 (up to)
7.4.13 Reclaimed or recycled bulk fill and sub-base 5 (up to) 5 (up to)
7.4.14 Beneficial re-use of excavated material 32 (up to)
7.4.15 Surplus materials 20
7.4.16 Materials storage 20
7.4.17 Beneficial use of surplus materials 18 (up to)
Assessment criteria
7.4.1 Business models for a circular economy – considered Str Des Con
7.4.1.1 The principles of a circular economy are considered via appropriate 6 (up to)
business models in line with BS 8001:2017. One or more of the following
procurement models can be demonstrated.
Procurement models considered Credits (each)

(i) On-demand 1 for each
(ii) Dematerialization
(iii) Product life cycle extension/reuse
(iv) Recovery of secondary raw materials/by-products
(v) Product as a service/product-service system (PSS)
(vi) Sharing economy and collaborative consumption
7.4.2 Business models for a circular economy – implemented Str Des Con
7.4.2.1 The principles of a circular economy are implemented via appropriate 12 (up to)
business models in line with BS 8001:2017. One or more of the following
procurement models can be demonstrated.
Procurement models implemented Credits (each)

(i) On-demand 2 for each
(ii) Dematerialization
(iii) Product life cycle extension/reuse
(iv) Recovery of secondary raw materials/by-products
(v) Product as a service/product-service system (PSS)
(vi) Sharing economy and collaborative consumption
7.4.3 Durability and low maintenance Str Des Con

7.4.3.1 Durability and low maintenance of structures and components have 11
been actively considered in design and specification..

7.4.4 Long-term planned maintenance (fixed) Str Des Con

7.4.4.1 Long-term planned maintenance has been considered properly in the 12
design process.
7.4.5 Future disassembly / de-construction Str Des Con

7.4.5.1 A percentage (by volume) of components or pre-fabricated units used 12 (up to)
can be easily separated on disassembly/de-construction into material types
suitable for recycling or reuse.
Percentage of components that can be easily separated on disassembly Credits

(a) 15% or more 2
(b) 30% or more 4
(c) 45% or more 6
(d) 60% or more 8
(e) 75% or more 10
(f) 90% or more 12
7.4.6 Materials register (fixed) Str Des Con

7.4.6.1 A materials register been provided to the Client or future managing 4
agent at hand-over that identifies main material types to facilitate recycling
during disassembly or de-construction.
7.4.7 Retention of existing structures and materials Str Des Con

7.4.7.1 A percentage (by volume) of any existing structures and materials, such 15 (up to)
as roads, tanks and pipework, have been retained and used within the project
as opposed to being demolished and crushed or disposed of.
Percentage of existing structures and materials retained Credits

(a) 25% or more 5
(b) 50% or more 10
(c) 75% or more 15
7.4.8 On-site use of demolition arisings Str Des Con

7.4.8.1 A percentage (by volume) of suitable/useable material from demolition 32 (up to)
or de-construction on site has been incorporated into the project.
Outcome Credits
(a) 25% or more 6
(b) 50% or more 12
(c) 75% or more 18
(d) 90% or more 32
7.4.9 Cut and fill optimisation Str Des Con

7.4.9.1 An assessment has been made at design stage to ensure optimisation 11
of cut and fill to reduce the quantity of excavated material to be taken off site.
7.4.10 Soil management Str Des Con

7.4.10.1 A soil management plan has been prepared and implemented. 17

7.4.11 Beneficial re-use of topsoil Str Des Con

7.4.11.1 All topsoil has been re-used beneficially as topsoil on the site or on a 8 (up to)
site within a reasonable distance.
Outcome Credits
(a) All beneficially re-used off site 2
(b) Majority (over 50%) beneficially re-used on site 4
(c) All beneficially re-used on site 8
(fixed)
7.4.12 Reclaimed or recycled materials Str Des Con
7.4.12.1 A percentage (by volume) of materials from offsite (excluding bulk fill 7 (up to) 7 (up to)
and sub-base) for use in the permanent works has been specified and made
from reclaimed or recycled material, whether reclaimed from the site or
elsewhere.
(i) Specified

stage
(b1) 50% or more 4
(c1) 75% or more 7
(ii) Used

stage
(b2) 50% or more 4
(c2) 75% or more 7
7.4.13 Reclaimed or recycled bulk fill and sub-base Str Des Con
7.4.13.1 A percentage (by volume) of bulk fill and sub-base material from off 5 (up to) 5 (up to)
site is specified in the project and was made from previously used material,
whether reclaimed from the site or elsewhere.
(i) Specified

stage
(b1) 60% or more 3
(c1) 80% or more 4
If this was generated on site (for example, demolition material crushed Add 1
on site)

(ii) Used

stage
(b2) 60% or more 3
(c2) 80% for more 4
If this was generated on site (for example, demolition material crushed Add 1
on site)
7.4.14 Beneficial re-use of excavated material Str Des Con

7.4.14.1 A percentage (by volume) of excavated material has been beneficially 32 (up to)
re-used on-site.
Outcome Credits
(a) 30% or more 14
(b) 50% or more 20
(c) 90% or more 26
(d) 100% 32
7.4.15 Surplus materials Str Des Con

7.4.15.1 An assessment has been undertaken and implemented to reduce the 20
amount of surplus materials ordered.
7.4.16 Materials storage Str Des Con

7.4.16.1 Materials have been stored appropriately to avoid wastage. 20
7.4.17 Beneficial use of surplus materials Str Des Con

7.4.17.1 A percentage of unused (surplus) materials have been beneficially re- 18 (up to)
used (or stored for re-use).
Outcome Credits
(a) 50% or more 6
(b) 70% or more 9
(c) 90% or more 12
(d) No or minimal unused materials 18
Guidance
Business models for a circular economy (7.4.1, 7.4.2)
BS 8001:2017 suggests there are six business model options that can support delivering a circular economy these
include:
l On-demand
l Dematerialization
l Product life cycle extension/reuse
l Recovery of secondary raw materials/by-products
l Product as a service/product–service system (PSS)
l Sharing economy and collaborative consumption

The guide applies to all sectors however there some which are particularly relevant to the construction sector and
already widely used but benefits are unreported. These new criteria are being introduced to make infrastructure
developers aware of the wider social and economic benefits it can bring. For more information, see BS 8001:2007
Framework for implementing the principles of the circular economy in organizations – Guide.
Durability and low maintenance (7.4.3)

Extending the lifetime of a structure is likely to have considerable environmental benefits as it avoids the
environmental impacts associated with later refurbishment or the building of a new structure. In the same way, a low
maintenance structure reduces the environmental impacts relating to maintenance and is likely to enhance the
structure's lifetime. Admittedly, there are likely to be trade-offs in this area, for example between more-durable paint
systems and environmentally damaging treatments.
It is important to recognise that, in the context of CEEQUAL, what is being looked for in the assessment of these
options is consideration of the environmental cost, and a judgement about which option has the greatest lifetime
environmental benefit and least adverse impact. This may lead to reduced whole life costs of the structure. Synergies
between financial and environmental savings will present a particularly compelling case to Clients.
It is essential that the desired lifespan of a built structure is reflected in every detail of a structure. Often durability is
compromised by minor components within it that have a shorter design life than the structure itself and that were
specified without bearing the overall objective in mind.
Long-term planned maintenance (fixed) (7.4.4)

This should cover, at a minimum, the nature and practicality of work expected to be needed, the timescales for this
work, and the provision of safe access for maintenance to be carried out. It should be written in a plan for
maintenance for the project and delivered to the Client.
Future disassembly / de-construction (7.4.5)

Examples for suitable material types may include bricks, blocks, stone and concrete, treated and untreated timber,
glass, PVC, different types of plastic, metal, paper and cardboard, and components (for example, sinks, toilets,
radiators).
Materials register (fixed) (7.4.6)

Retention of existing structures and materials (7.4.7)

This requirement is about the retention and re-use of existing structures. Any structures that are demolished,
crushed and then re-used on the project are covered in 7.4.8, 7.4.12 and 7.4.13.
The appropriate re-use of structures and parts of structures can significantly reduce the demand for new
construction materials and other environmental burdens resulting from a development.
A pre-demolition audit and other site surveys will provide information on the existing structures and materials
present on site in order to support decision making around the feasibility of incorporating existing structures and
materials into the project.
It is important that these issues are considered at feasibility stage so that the design process can be focussed on re-
use rather than new construction. Actions to re-use or recover existing structures or materials may also lead to
savings in cost and programme and a significant reduction in the carbon footprint of the project. Examples for this
include re-use of existing foundations, roads or walls, or, for a flood defence project for instance, the re-use of an
existing lock structure as part of new flood defence walls (see CIRIA publication Reuse of Foundations (C653, 2007)).
The volume of the structures would normally be worked out as part of the bills of quantities and, where re-used, as
part of an assessment of their suitability for re-use.
On-site use of demolition arisings (7.4.8)

A single score is given across all three roles, because the Client or Designer may specify this requirement, rather than
just leave the Contractor to choose to do it.
Ideally a pre-demolition audit is completed by an independent and competent third party for any existing buildings,
structures or hard surfaces that require demolition on site.

The key findings of the audit should be referenced within the Resource Management Plan (RMP) and include
potential applications and any related issues for the reuse and recycling of the demolition materials in accordance
with the waste hierarchy.
Targets for levels of reuse and recycling should be set by the project delivery team.
Post-construction, an evaluation of the difference between the actual and the predicted levels figures are reported to
CEEQUAL.
Cut and fill optimisation (7.4.9)

'Cut and fill' is the term used to describe the whole process of profiling of the landform for the project – excavation
in some parts, deposition and compaction of excavated and/or imported material in others. The balancing of these
two elements leads to minimisation of the import or export of materials to and from the project. This balancing can
be done by computer modelling or other, more-traditional methods.
Clearly, this requirement is most applicable to road and rail schemes, and sometimes to airports and industrial estate
development. However, it does need to be considered in any project where there is major excavation. In particular, it
applies to structures that are semi-buried (such as service reservoirs) where there may be scope to balance cut and fill
with how much of the tank is below ground.
Note that, in this requirement excavated material does not include buried structures that are demolished. The re-use
of this material is considered in 7.4.1.
Soil management (7.4.10)

Topsoil is correctly stored in stockpiles no higher than 2 metres. To avoid compaction of the soil, stockpiles must not
be driven on by heavy machinery. Vegetating long-term stockpiles with suitable plants (for example, mustard or
annual lupines) may help prevent dust blow and erosion, silt run-off, and should assist in preventing invasive and/or
noxious weeds from invading the soil. However, the extent to which this is appropriate, and which plants should or
should not be used depends on the intended use of the topsoil. Note: stockpiles should not be located within 10
metres of a watercourse.
Beneficial re-use of topsoil (7.4.11)

Refer to 7.6.1 if the topsoil is to be or has been moved off site because waste management controls may apply.
Topsoil is an organic material and is only re-used beneficially if layers are not applied too deep as this would destroy
its structure. In addition, certain types of habitats actually require very little or no topsoil at all. Re-use on site for the
sake of it, in places and at a thickness that is not required, would therefore not be 'beneficial' re-use. What
represents a 'reasonable distance' must be judged in the context of the project and its location. It might be 15km in
a built-up area, but up to 100km if the site generating the surplus topsoil is in a remote area.
Reclaimed or recycled materials (fixed) (7.4.12)

Examples include reclaimed bricks, and elements or components using recycled materials such as recycled plastics or
reprocessed timber. Recycled materials must satisfy the necessary performance and quality criteria.
Where materials are re-used or recycled, the highest grade of re-use possible will be the most environmentally
beneficial. There are a number of opportunities to re-use or recycle materials:
l re-using or recycling materials already on site in the new works (which also minimises transport impacts);
l bringing in reclaimed or recycled materials from off site without imposing high transport impacts;
l seeking opportunities for use elsewhere of reclaimed or recycled on-site materials that cannot be used on
site (also without imposing high transport impacts);
l ensuring that opportunities for the re-use and recycling of materials at the end of the structure's lifetime are
maximised.
Metric guidance
In addition, to calculating the percentage by volume of materials used in permanent works made from reclaimed and
recycled material, the recycled content by total project construction value may also be reported, through a metric
such as:
Value (£) or Volume of recycled content per £100k construction value, using a formula such as:

Recycled content for products used may be estimated based on standard industry practice for most products, or
project specific data may be used for products where good practice is deliberately being used, i.e. the recycled
content of given material product exceeds the industry standard.
Reclaimed or recycled bulk fill and sub-base (7.4.13)

Beneficial re-use of excavated material (7.4.14)

Design for re-use and recovery of materials already on site is fundamental to achieving materials resource efficiency,
minimising the quantities of materials that have to be imported or exported from site. The ability to score for the
design stage reflects the importance of this stage in identifying and specifying materials for re-use especially as it is
rarely possible to amend the design at construction stage to take advantage of any surplus excavation arisings.
Re-use near the site, as opposed to on the site, is covered in 7.6.10 and 7.6.11 on diversion of waste away from
landfill. Re-use of excavated materials off site includes taking material to landfill if the material is genuinely inert and
is used for beneficial re-use, such as for capping and other engineering purposes.
Surplus materials (7.4.15)

Over-ordering is still standard practice within construction, but it can contribute to the overall wastage rates if
materials become surplus to requirements. Reducing over-ordering can help reduce the amount of waste produced
as well as saving money. Examples of actions to reduce over-ordering include targeting accurate ordering (accurate
material requirements, realistic wastage rates), logistics planning (delivery strategy, adequate storage, efficient
movement of materials to the workface) or installation elements (efficient working and installation and storage of
materials).
Metric guidance
Assessment and monitoring of measures taken to reduce surplus materials ordered may be reported as comparisons
to initial targets set for minimum surplus materials ordered against actual ordered surplus materials, based on
calculations of:
Percentage of materials ordered and not used in the completed permanent works, for all material ordered, using a
formula such as:
Surplus materials ordered per £100k project construction value, using a formula such as:
Total cost (£) of surplus materials per £100k project construction value, using a formula such as:
Percentage of project construction value from ordered surplus materials, using the formula:
Materials storage (7.4.16)

For guidance on this issue, see CIRIA Environmental good practice on site guide (fourth edition) (C741, 2015).
Beneficial use of surplus materials (7.4.17)

Unused (surplus) materials are any construction materials not used within the project (such as bricks, concrete,
reinforcing mesh, timber and/or prefabricated components), but can also include bulk materials that are not only

usable without processing, but are also movable to a site where such use is made of them. For the purposes of this
criteria, the definition of re-use is that given in the Waste Framework Directive, i.e. any operation by which products
or components that are not waste are used again for the same purpose for which they were conceived.
To achieve the maximum score for "no or minimal unused materials", the evidence must demonstrate that the
assessment in 7.4.15 was fully implemented and no or minimal unused materials were generated.
Unused materials are, regrettably, almost inevitable on any civil engineering project, but this criterion is in no way
meant to encourage their accumulation, nor to encourage breakages, just to score credits for their re-use elsewhere.
Some unused materials can be stored and re-used at another site or it may be possible to donate them to a local
group or community project – seek advice from the appropriate authority or regulator first. For others this may not
be practicable, but they may still be crushed and used as sub-base or fill (i.e. recycled in order to re-use the base
material of which they were made).
The level that can be considered 'no surplus or minimal surplus materials' is related to the scale of the project and
may require discussion between the Assessor and Verifier. Deciding the percentage of recycled or re-used materials
will also require the Assessor and Verifier to make, and justify, a judgement on the value or volume of the project,
but not necessarily calculate it.
Evidence
7.4.1 Business models for a To demonstrate that circular economy business models have been used the
circular economy – considered project should provide evidence that one or more of the mentioned
procurement models have been used for specific goods or services. If more than
7.4.2 Business models for a one procurement model can be demonstrated the score for each can be added
circular economy – implemented together.
7.4.3 Durability and low Evidence should be found in the specifications or in the report of a life-cycle
maintenance costing analysis or a value-engineering project.
7.4.4 Long-term planned Evidence could be found in the specifications, a hazard and operability study
maintenance (fixed) (HAZOP) assessment (or similar), in a contract maintenance schedule or in the
form of a maintenance plan to be handed to the Client or managing agent.
7.4.5 Future disassembly / de- Evidence needs to substantiate the percentage being claimed. This can be
construction calculated by any appropriate means that assesses how materials are utilised
and combined within the works. The volume of materials that contribute to
80% of the total by value should be used as a basis for the calculations.
7.4.6 Materials register (fixed) Evidence can include a Health and Safety File, provided this has been extended
to include information about material types that will enable recycling on
demolition.
7.4.7 Retention of existing Evidence could include inclusion in a SWMP, site photographs, construction
structures and materials drawings, and/or bills of quantities, along with some form of substantiation of
the percentage being claimed. Evidence could include a comparison of design
calculations with waste transfer notes or other quantity surveying
documentation.
7.4.8 On-site use of demolition Evidence should be found in quantity surveyors' documentation or project
arisings accounts. The evidence provided should substantiate the percentage being
claimed.
7.4.9 Cut and fill optimisation Evidence could be in the form of calculations showing the cut and fill balance
and/or contract drawings with mapped out areas for cut and fill and/or contract
drawings with mapped out areas for cut and fill.


7.4.10 Soil management Evidence could be the results of the Soil Resource Survey and a copy of the Soil
Management Plan. The Plan should contain detailed instructions on soil
handling for the relevant project (not a general statement). Evidence could also
include a soil handling and management strategy, or minutes of site meetings
referring to the handling and storage of topsoil.
7.4.11 Beneficial re-use of Evidence could be some form of calculation to support the credits awarded.
topsoil This could be a comparison of design calculations to waste transfer notes. The
definition of reasonable distance needs to be mutually agreed between the
Assessor and Verifier.
7.4.12 Reclaimed or recycled Evidence could be in the form of specification requirements. Any evidence
materials (fixed) needs to substantiate the percentage being claimed. Evidence could
alternatively include the calculation and reporting of the metric-based
guidance.
7.4.13 Reclaimed or recycled Evidence could include bills of quantities, delivery notes, and/or a quantity
bulk fill and sub-base surveyor's report, along with some form of substantiation of the percentage
being claimed.
7.4.14 Beneficial re-use of Evidence should include some form of calculation to demonstrate the credits
excavated material being awarded. This calculation could be on the basis of design calculations
compared to information documented in the SWMP or equivalent and actual
waste transfer notes or some other form of quantity surveying documentation.
7.4.15 Surplus materials Evidence would include documented evidence that material forecasting and
logistics planning have been undertaken, which clearly illustrates how over-
ordering has been addressed. Evidence of measures taken to record material
ordered to site and then not used in works, could be within Site Waste
Management Plan and/or other quantity surveying documentation. Evidence
could alternatively include the calculation and reporting of the metric-based
guidance.
7.4.16 Materials storage This could be photographic evidence or site records. The Verifier should
ascertain that photographs demonstrate a sustained achievement of this
requirement for the duration of the project.
7.4.17 Beneficial use of surplus Evidence can include records that show that surplus materials have been taken
materials to another site for use, compared with waste disposal records. Any records
need to substantiate the percentage being claimed. A declaration made by the
Contractor as to how surplus materials have been used and/or disposed of
would be acceptable. The exact score and evidence acceptable must be at the
discretion of the Verifier.

7.5 Responsible sourcing of construction products
Aim
To encourage the procurement and use of sustainably and responsibly sourced construction products and materials.
Assessment scope

7.5.1 Prerequisite: Legal and Only scope out if no timber is used in the works.
sustainable timber
7.5.6 Locally sourced and Only scope out where it can be demonstrated that the use of locally sourced
recycled materials - use and recycled material is not appropriate or feasible.
Credit summary
7.5.1 Prerequisite: Legal and sustainable timber -
7.5.2 Responsible sourcing of construction products - 16
consideration (fixed)
7.5.3 Responsible sourcing of construction products - 18
implementation (fixed)
7.5.4 Locally sourced and recycled materials - early 5
7.5.5 Locally sourced and recycled materials - further 5
7.5.6 Locally sourced and recycled materials - use 5
Assessment criteria
7.5.1 Prerequisite: Legal and sustainable timber Str Des Con
7.5.1.1 All timber and timber-based products used on the project are legally -
harvested and traded timber.
7.5.2 Responsible sourcing of construction products - Str Des Con

consideration (fixed) 16
7.5.2.1 The responsible sourcing of materials has been evaluated through the
development of sustainable procurement plan and specified as a project
requirement prior to placing the order.
7.5.3 Responsible sourcing of construction products - Str Des Con

implementation (fixed) 18
7.5.3.1 The specification for responsible sourcing has been achieved.
Outcome Credits
(a) Less than 50% (by volume) achieved 5

Outcome Credits
(b) 50% or more (by volume) achieved 10
(c) 80% or more (by volume) achieved 18
7.5.4 Locally sourced and recycled materials - early consideration Str Des Con
(fixed)
5
7.5.4.1 The Client required consideration be given to the use of locally sourced
and recycled material.
7.5.5 Locally sourced and recycled materials - further Str Des Con
consideration (fixed) 5
7.5.5.1 The Designer and Contractor researched all locally available material
sources, including recycled materials.
7.5.6 Locally sourced and recycled materials - use Str Des Con
7.5.6.1 The Designer and Contractor adapted the designs and specifications to 5
allow for their use, where appropriate.
Guidance
Prerequisite: Legal and sustainable timber (7.5.1)
Legally harvested timber and wood-derived products are those that originate from a forest where the following
criteria are met:
1. The forest owner or manager holds legal use rights to the forest
2. There is compliance by both the forest management organisation and any contractors with local or national
legal criteria including those relevant to:
a. Forest management
b. Environment
c. Labour and welfare
d. Health and safety
e. Other parties' tenure and use rights
f. All relevant royalties and taxes are paid
3. There is full compliance with the criteria of Convention on International Trade in Endangered Species of Wild
Fauna and Flora (CITES).
Legally traded means timber or products derived from legally harvested timber were:
1. Exported in compliance with exporting country laws governing the export of timber and timber products,
including payment of any export taxes, duties or levies
2. Imported in compliance with importing country laws governing the import of timber and timber products,
including payment of any import taxes, duties or levies
3. Traded in compliance with legislation related to the Convention on International Trade in Endangered
Species of Wild Fauna and Flora (CITES), where applicable.
Responsible sourcing of construction products (7.5.2, 7.5.3)

Responsible sourcing of materials covers a range of issues, including organisational management systems, supply
chain management systems and a range of social and environmental issues (including greenhouse gas emissions,
material traceability and life-cycle assessment).
The emphasis of these criteria rewards specifying and achieving responsible sourcing rather than just considering it.
The scoring also rewards the consideration and specification of responsibly sourced materials at earlier stages in the
project's lifecycle to reflect the greater influence that can be exerted at these stages.

Consideration to purchase materials from sustainable sources may be given via the specification of materials from
the Client and/or Designer. Implementation will be in accordance with sector-specific schemes (for example, BES
6001:2008), contract requirements and/or the specification.
Locally sourced and recycled materials (7.5.4, 7.5.5, 7.5.6)

The traditional approach of using standard designs and specification clauses can lead to the exclusion of acceptable
locally sourced and more-sustainable material choices. Good practice of actively seeking sustainable local materials
on a site-specific basis should be encouraged.
Evidence
7.5.1 Prerequisite: Legal and Evidence must show that all timber and timber-based products used on the
sustainable timber project meet the requirements for legally harvested and traded timber.
7.5.2 Responsible sourcing of Evidence in relation to 7.5.2 could be a statement in a Client tender brief or
construction products - contract documents, or record of discussions. Evidence in relation to 7.5.3
consideration (fixed) could be a comparison of specification requirements to overall material
purchase, sub-contract documents with general material suppliers, or a
declaration from the supplier (usually provided as certificates). In any case, some
7.5.3 Responsible sourcing of substantiation of the specification being claimed needs to be provided. At the
construction products - current time, only BES 6001-based schemes or schemes that are third party
implementation (fixed) accredited as being compliant with BS 8902:2009 can be considered suitable
sector-specific schemes. Schemes listed in GN18 are OK to submit as evidence.
7.5.4 Locally sourced and Evidence could be the Client's tender brief, design briefs or reports from
recycled materials - early research into materials sourcing.
7.5.5 Locally sourced and
recycled materials - further
7.5.6 Locally sourced and
recycled materials - use
Definitions
Sustainable procurement plan
A plan that sets out a clear framework for the responsible sourcing of materials to guide procurement throughout a
project and for all involved in the specification and procurement of construction materials. The plan may be prepared
and adopted at an organisational level or be project specific and for the purposes of CEEQUAL compliance, will cover
the following as a minimum:
l Identification of risks and opportunities against a broad range of social, environmental and economic issues.
BS 8902:2009 Responsible sourcing sector certification schemes for construction products- Specification can
be used as a guide to identify these issues
l Aims, objectives and targets to guide sustainable procurement activities. BS 8903: 2010 Principles and
framework for procuring sustainably - Guide can be used to inform setting of aims, objectives and targets
l The strategic assessment of responsibly sourced materials available locally and nationally. There should be a
policy to procure materials locally where appropriate and practical
l Responsible sourcing policies that will be employed by the contractor and subcontractor
l Procedures that are in place to check and verify that the sustainable procurement plan is being implemented
and adhered to on individual projects. These could include setting out measurement criteria, methodology
and performance indicators to assess progress and demonstrate success
l Information on how the chain of custody of materials will be fully audited and evidenced.

Responsible sourcing
The management and implementation of sustainable development principles in the provision, procurement and
traceability of construction materials and products. In CEEQUAL this is demonstrated through auditable third-party
certification schemes.
BES 6001:2008 Framework Standard for Responsible Sourcing of Construction Products
This is a BRE Global Limited standard that provides a framework for the assessment and certification of the
responsible sourcing of construction products. The standard has been structured so that compliance can be
demonstrated through a combination of meeting the requirements of other recognised certification schemes,
establishing written policies, setting objectives and targets and engaging with relevant stakeholders.
To comply with the standard a product must meet a number of mandatory criteria. Where a product demonstrates
compliance beyond the mandatory levels, higher levels of performance can be achieved. The standard's performance
ratings range from Pass to Good, Very Good, and Excellent.
The development of this standard and subsequent certification schemes will, it is envisaged, provide construction
products, not wholly covered under current recognised standards, a means for demonstrating their responsibly
sourced credentials. In turn this will allow clients, developers and design teams to specify responsibly sourced
construction products with greater assurance and provide a means of demonstrating compliance with the
assessment criteria in this issue.
To view a list of products approved to BES 6001 and additional information about the standard visit:
www.greenbooklive.com.
Convention on International Trade in Endangered Species (CITES)

The Convention on International Trade in Endangered Species of Wild Fauna and Flora (CITES) works by subjecting
international trade in specimens of selected species to certain controls. All import, export, re-export and introduction
from the sea of species covered by the Convention has to be authorised through a licensing system. Each Party to the
Convention must designate one or more Management Authorities in charge of administering that licensing system
and one or more scientific authorities to advise them on the effects of trade on the status of the species. The species
covered by CITES are listed in three appendices, according to the degree of protection they need.
1. Appendix I includes species threatened with extinction. Trade in specimens of these species is permitted only
in exceptional circumstances.
2. Appendix II includes species not necessarily threatened with extinction, but in which trade must be controlled
in order to avoid utilisation incompatible with their survival.
3. Appendix III contains species that are protected in at least one country, which has asked other CITES Parties
for assistance in controlling the trade.
Appendices I and II of the CITES list illustrate species of timber that are protected outright. Appendix III of the CITES
list illustrates species that are protected in at least one country. If a timber species used in the project is on Appendix
III it can be included as part of the assessment as long as the timber is not obtained from the country or countries
seeking to protect this species.
More information about CITES, including the full text of the convention, is available from https://www.cites.org/.

7.6 Construction waste management
Aim
To minimise the amount of waste produced throughout the project and manage the waste produced in line with
best practice requirements.
Assessment scope

7.6.2 Prerequisite: Permitting for Scope out only on projects that do not treat waste on site or import waste for
waste treated or used on site use on site.
7.6.3 Prerequisite: Hazardous Scope out only on projects with no hazardous waste.
waste
7.6.6 Clearance and disposal of Scope out only if no vegetation present on the site before work starts.
existing vegetation -
consideration
7.6.7 Clearance and disposal of Scope out only if no vegetation present on the site before work starts.
existing vegetation -
implementation
7.6.8 Hazardous material The decision to scope out will depend on whether there are any hazardous
assessments materials.
7.6.9 Transfer station/recycling The decision on whether to scope out will depend on the nature, scale, location
centre performance and context of the project.
7.6.10 Inert waste diverted from The decision to scope out will depend on the nature, scale, location and context
landfill of the project. Although scoping-out is unlikely.
7.6.11 Non-hazardous waste The decision to scope out will depend on the nature, scale, location and context
diverted from landfill of the project.
Credit summary
7.6.1 Prerequisite: Duty of care (fixed) -
7.6.2 Prerequisite: Permitting for waste treated or used on -
site
7.6.3 Prerequisite: Hazardous waste -
7.6.4 Site waste management planning - preparation (fixed) 11
7.6.5 Site waste management planning - implementation 16
(fixed)
7.6.6 Clearance and disposal of existing vegetation - 20
consideration
7.6.7 Clearance and disposal of existing vegetation - 18 (up to)
implementation
7.6.8 Hazardous material assessments 7 (up to)
7.6.9 Transfer station/recycling centre performance 20


7.6.10 Inert waste diverted from landfill 18 (up to)
7.6.11 Non-hazardous waste diverted from landfill 20 (up to)
Assessment criteria
7.6.1 Prerequisite: Duty of care (fixed) Str Des Con
7.6.1.1 All waste produced on site has been managed to meet duty of care -
requirements, including:
a. All waste has been transported by licensed or otherwise suitably

competent carriers.
b. All waste transfers have been recorded and records have been retained.
c. All waste has been taken to licensed, permitted or exempt facilities.
d. Transfer or disposal sites have been checked to ensure they are licensed
or otherwise suitable to take the material.
e. Disposal or transfer sites have been checked to ensure the waste was
taken there.
7.6.2 Prerequisite: Permitting for waste treated or used on site Str Des Con
7.6.2.1 The appropriate permits, licenses or exemptions have been obtained -
for waste that has been treated on site or for waste imported to site.
7.6.3 Prerequisite: Hazardous waste Str Des Con

7.6.3.1 Hazardous waste has been appropriately segregated (from other -
controlled waste) and stored appropriately on site.
7.6.3.2 This waste has been taken to a suitable facility and the construction site registered as a hazardous waste
producer where appropriate.
7.6.4 Site waste management planning - preparation (fixed) Str Des Con
7.6.4.1 A Site Waste Management Plan (SWMP) or waste section of a SEMP has 11
been prepared and updated as appropriate for the duration of the project.
7.6.5 Site waste management planning - implementation (fixed) Str Des Con
7.6.5.1 Targets or key performance indicators for waste reduction and waste 16
recovery have been met.
7.6.6 Clearance and disposal of existing vegetation - consideration Str Des Con
7.6.6.1 The most environmentally beneficial ways of dealing with clearance 20
and disposal of existing vegetation have been explored and recommendations
have been made.
7.6.7 Clearance and disposal of existing vegetation - Str Des Con

implementation 18 (up to)
7.6.7.1 These recommendations have been implemented for the majority of
vegetation cleared.
Percentage of recommendations implemented Credits

(a) 40% or more 5
(b) 60% or more 10
(c) 80% or more 18

7.6.8 Hazardous material assessments Str Des Con

7.6.8.1 The health and safety assessment process for hazardous materials has 7 (up to)
been:
Outcome Credits
(a) Extended to cover the wider environmental impacts of those materials. 2
(b) And the results of this have been used in drawing up the SEMP or equivalent. 7
7.6.9 Transfer station/recycling centre performance Str Des Con

7.6.9.1 If transfer stations and/or recycling facilities have been used, the 20
recycling rate of the facilities was considered prior to placing the order.
7.6.10 Inert waste diverted from landfill Str Des Con

7.6.10.1 A percentage (by volume) of inert waste material has been segregated 18 (up to)
(on or off site) in accordance with the SWMP or RMP and diverted from landfill.
Outcome Credits
(a) 70% or more 6
(b) 85% or more 12
(c) 95% or more 18
7.6.11 Non-hazardous waste diverted from landfill Str Des Con

7.6.11.1 A percentage (by volume or weight) of non-hazardous waste material 20 (up to)
has been segregated (on or off site) in accordance with the SWMP or RMP and
diverted from landfill.
Type of waste Diversion (by volume) Diversion (by weight) Credits

(a) Construction 92% 95% 13
Demolition 80% 90%
(b) Construction 98% 98% 20
Demolition 85% 95%
Guidance
Prerequisite: Duty of care (fixed) (7.6.1)
Some countries have rigorous legal regimes covering the disposal of waste. If there are no legal requirements, it is
still important to ensure that waste is dealt with in an environmentally responsible way. It must be transported by
organisations who understand their responsibilities and be placed in facilities operated by similarly responsible and
knowledgeable waste management specialists.
Prerequisite: Permitting for waste treated or used on site (7.6.2)

Some on-site waste treatment activities, such as the treatment of contaminated soils prior to re-use, might require an
Environmental Permit, waste management license or registered exemption, depending on the nature of the process
employed. Similarly, the use of waste materials imported to site might also require a permit, license or exemption.
Site waste management planning (7.6.4, 7.6.5)

To score credits on 7.6.4 the SWMP should be prepared at least in line with industry best practice or expectations.

It is good practice to initiate the SWMP at the design stage. The earlier in the project a SWMP is implemented, the
greater the benefits that can be achieved with regard to waste reduction, recovery and recycling. Therefore, to score
maximum credits a SWMP should have been developed by the Designers at design stage.
Forecasting waste streams as part of the SWMP process enables practical decisions to be taken about segregating
materials on site for recycling and/or for disposal, as well as for the layout of site facilities, including waste storage. A
properly prepared and maintained SWMP can be a powerful tool to help plan waste management activities and
waste movements off site during construction. With properly managed supporting documentation, it can also help
ensure compliance with legislation around Duty of Care and other relevant waste management legislation. SWMPs
can also be used to record progress against targets and savings in materials and waste disposal.
As with all such plans, the aim needs to clearly show the actions site staff and operatives should take when dealing
with 'waste' (either surplus materials or genuine waste) in order to maximise practical re-use and recycling, and to
make landfill genuinely the disposal route of last resort. Therefore, a properly implemented SWMP should also be
accompanied by appropriate communication between Clients, Designers and Contractors and subsequently with
sub-Contractors and other suppliers.
Metric guidance
Targets for site waste management can be accompanied by monitoring and calculations of the total waste produced,
throughout the duration of the project. This will require monitoring all types of waste arisings and their end through
metrics such as:
Total waste produced per £100k construction value (reference to targets set in 7.1.7), using a formula such as:
The above measure may be disaggregated into potential site waste streams (e.g. reused, composted, incinerated,
recycled, recovered and landfilled) per £100k construction value, using a formula such as:
The identified measure can then be compared to what is actually achieved on site. Targets and monitoring of waste
diverted from landfill may be reported as:
Percentage of all on-site waste diverted from landfill using the formula:
Waste arisings diverted from landfill per £100k construction value, using a formula such as:
Clearance and disposal of existing vegetation (7.6.6, 7.6.7)

The best method for dealing with and/or disposing of vegetation that needs to be cleared depends mainly on the
type of vegetation involved. Options range from energy recovery, through chipping for composting or to provide
mulch, to leaving log piles to provide shelter for amphibians or small mammals. If the vegetation contains noxious
weeds or invasive plants, safe disposal according to the relevant guidance is the only option. Note that it is important
to ensure beneficial use of any timber that has had to be felled to enable a project to proceed, ideally on the project
itself but, if that is not possible, on a suitable other project as close by as possible.
Hazardous material assessments (7.6.8)

An example of a health and safety assessment being extended to cover environmental impacts might be guidance on
how to store and dispose of materials to avoid pollution to the environment, as opposed to harm to humans in
health and safety terms.
Transfer station/recycling centre performance (7.6.9)

This can be done by visiting the transfer station or recycling facility and completing an audit of where the material is
taken after sorting or processing, or asking them to submit waste returns.

Inert waste diverted from landfill (7.6.10)

As a minimum waste should be segregated into inert, non-hazardous and hazardous fractions this can happen
either on site or at a Waste Transfer Station. If the latter, then the waste contractor's activities must be checked to
ensure they are rigorously segregating waste. It must be remembered that even if the waste contractor offers and is
capable of delivering high levels of segregation and recycling, this may not be the best option for the project as
some wastes will have an economic value and could be beneficially resold directly by the project, although it must be
noted that this may well require additional Environmental Permits to be applied for and gained.
Care should be taken to ensure segregated materials remain uncontaminated during storage, e.g. through contact
with liquid or other wastes. This will ensure at the very least the lowest rate of landfill tax is paid on the genuinely
inert material, and that hazardous wastes are dealt with at least as carefully as the virgin materials from which they
were manufactured.
Best practice is to segregate inert, non-hazardous and hazardous fractions where this is feasible. This can happen
either on site or at a Waste Transfer Station. It should be noted that if hazardous wastes are encountered on sites
these need to be segregated at source otherwise there is a risk all wastes being classified under this class. For non-
hazardous and inert waste the waste contractor's activities must be checked to ensure they are rigorously
segregating waste. It must be remembered that even if the waste contractor offers and is capable of delivering high
levels of segregation and recycling, this may not be the best option for the project as some wastes will have an
economic value and could be beneficially resold directly by the project, although it must be noted that this may well
require additional Environmental Permits to be applied for and gained.
All Care should be taken to ensure segregated materials remain uncontaminated during storage, e.g. through
contact with liquid or other wastes. This will ensure at the very least the lowest rate of landfill tax is paid on the
genuinely inert material, and that hazardous wastes are dealt with at least as carefully as the virgin materials from
which they were manufactured.
The aim here is to reward projects that go beyond such minima, and either capture the recyclable wastes identified in
the SWMP dealt with under 7.6.4, or take the minimum of three waste streams described above to a construction
and demolition waste recycling centre nearby, where the re-usable and recyclable materials are extracted. Where
mixed non-hazardous wastes are sent off site to be separated for recycling, it is good practice to obtain evidence
from the waste contractor of the amounts and/or proportions of collected waste that have been recycled or
recovered.
It should be noted that any on-site re-use of waste must be undertaken in accordance with the relevant waste
legislation as certain activities, such as crushing and screening of inert waste, may require either a waste licence an
Environmental Permit or an Exemption. Examples for diverting waste from landfill can include waste sent for
reprocessing, recovery for suitable use or recovered in an energy-from-waste plant.
Non-hazardous waste diverted from landfill (7.6.11)

Note: Only volume or tonnage needs to be reported. The project team can choose whether to target the benchmarks
for volume or tonnage to demonstrate compliance. For the avoidance of doubt both demolition and construction
benchmarks must be met to achieve credits.
Evidence
7.6.1 Prerequisite: Duty of care Evidence could include documentary evidence retained in a straightforward file
(fixed) record, which should be available on site. The file record should include copies
of waste carriers certificates for all carriers of waste materials, records of waste
transfers (including waste types and quantities), copies of any Environmental
Permits, Licenses and Exemptions for the sites to which the waste is sent and/or
documented evidence that waste has been transported to the appropriate
facility. This may include telephone checks, following trucks, and/or requiring
completed transfer or consignment notes to be returned on a daily basis.


7.6.2 Prerequisite: Permitting for Evidence would include documentary evidence showing that the appropriate
waste treated or used on site permits, license or exemption have been obtained.
7.6.3 Prerequisite: Hazardous Evidence could be within a SWMP supported by hazardous waste consignment
waste notes and site photographs.
7.6.4 Site waste management Evidence would normally be copies of the SWMP, including the appropriate
planning - preparation (fixed) evidence to demonstrate that it has been updated, reviewed and implemented
as appropriate. Evidence will also be required to show that waste reduction,
recovery and recycling actions have been implemented and targets achieved.
7.6.5 Site waste management These can include design details and notes of meetings, data on waste
planning - implementation collection and recycling rates, including waste transfer notes and waste
(fixed) Contractor returns. Evidence could alternatively include the calculation and
7.6.6 Clearance and disposal of Evidence needs to show that the type of vegetation has been assessed and
existing vegetation - different options have been considered, leading to recommendations that take
consideration account of the environmental benefit of the suggested method.
7.6.7 Clearance and disposal of Evidence will depend very much on the recommendations made but, in any
existing vegetation - case, site records need to demonstrate implementation. Records could include
implementation photographs, waste transfer notes, and/or evidence of exempt activity.
Information should also be included within the SWMP.
7.6.8 Hazardous material Evidence could be within a site waste management plan supported by waste
assessments transfer records and site photographs.
7.6.9 Transfer station/recycling Whichever way the checks are carried out, they must be documented and satisfy
centre performance legal requirements. If the project team has no direct control over the final
destination of their waste, then evidence from the Waste Management
Contractor that demonstrates where they will be taking the project's waste can
be used.
7.6.10 Inert waste diverted from Evidence could be within a site waste management plan supported by waste
landfill transfer records and site photographs.
7.6.11 Non-hazardous waste Evidence could be in the form of waste transfer notes, photographs showing
diverted from landfill the different segregated groups or waste contractor returns showing the
proportion of waste segregated for recycling or recovery.

7.7 Energy use
Aim
To reduce energy demands and increase energy efficiency during design, delivery and operation and minimise
carbon emissions and other pollutants associated with energy consumption.
Assessment scope

7.7.1 Energy and carbon This can only be scoped out on projects that are not operable, such as land
emissions reduction for remediation works or flood defence banks.
operation
7.7.2 Implementation of energy Scope out if evidence to 7.7.1 shows that there are no energy-in-use issues to
and carbon reductions for be considered (not even maintenance).
operation
7.7.3 Opportunities for Scope out on projects where energy consumption in use is non-existent (for
renewable / low-carbon / zero- example, a flood defence).
carbon energy within the
operational scheme
7.7.4 Incorporating renewable / Scope out where it was considered (under 7.7.3) and found to be not possible
low-carbon / zero-carbon energy or inappropriate. It is not possible to scope this out if 7.7.3 has failed to score.
within the operational scheme
7.7.6 Energy consumption 7.7.6 can be scoped out if there were genuinely no opportunities identified. It
during construction - is unlikely that where 7.7.5 has failed to score that 7.7.6 can be scoped out,
incorporation in design except where it can be demonstrated that there were no opportunities.
7.7.11 Renewable / low-carbon / 7.7.11 can be scoped out only in the unlikely event that consideration of this
zero-carbon energy during issue identified no useful application of renewable and/or low- or zero-carbon
construction - implementation resources. 7.7.11 cannot be scoped out if 7.7.10 has failed to score.
Credit summary
7.7.1 Energy and carbon emissions reduction for operation 45
7.7.2 Implementation of energy and carbon reductions for 70 (up to)
operation
7.7.3 Opportunities for renewable / low-carbon / zero-carbon 25
energy within the operational scheme
7.7.4 Incorporating renewable / low-carbon / zero-carbon 60 (up to)
energy within the operational scheme
7.7.5 Energy consumption during construction - 45
consideration during design (fixed)
incorporation in design
consideration by contractor (fixed)


7.7.8 Energy consumption during construction - 50 (up to)
implementation by contractor (fixed)
7.7.9 Construction plant - selection and maintenance (fixed) 21
7.7.10 Renewable / low-carbon / zero-carbon energy during 15
construction - consideration (fixed)
7.7.11 Renewable / low-carbon / zero-carbon energy during 21 (up to)
construction - implementation
Assessment criteria
7.7.1 Energy and carbon emissions reduction for operation Str Des Con
7.7.1.1 The design has considered options for reducing both the energy 45
consumption and carbon emissions of the project during operation, including
the option of designing-out the need for energy-consuming equipment and
the energy requirements in maintenance.
7.7.2 Implementation of energy and carbon reductions for Str Des Con
operation 70 (up to)
7.7.2.1 Appropriate measures have been incorporated in the design to reduce
energy consumption and carbon emissions in use and a percentage of the
recommended energy consumption reduction has been saved.
Outcome Credits
(a) 10% or more 14
(b) 20% or more 28
(c) 40% or more 42
(d) 60% or more 56
(e) 80% or more 70
7.7.3 Opportunities for renewable / low-carbon / zero-carbon Str Des Con

energy within the operational scheme 25
7.7.3.1 The design has explored opportunities for the incorporation of energy
from renewable and/or low- or zero-carbon sources and thus a reduction in
carbon emissions.
7.7.4 Incorporating renewable / low-carbon / zero-carbon energy Str Des Con

within the operational scheme 60 (up to)
7.7.4.1 Energy from renewable and/or low- or zero-carbon sources has been
incorporated in the scheme where appropriate. A percentage of the identified
potential renewable energy generation identified in 7.7.3 has been
implemented.
Outcome Credits
(a) 10% or more 12
(b) 20% or more 24
(c) 40% or more 36
(d) 60% or more 48
(e) 80% or more 60

7.7.5 Energy consumption during construction - consideration Str Des Con

during design (fixed) 45
7.7.5.1 The Designer has identified opportunities to reduce the energy
consumption of the project during construction.
7.7.6 Energy consumption during construction - incorporation in Str Des Con

design 62
7.7.6.1 The Designer has incorporated appropriate measures to reduce energy
consumption during construction where feasible.
7.7.7 Energy consumption during construction - consideration by Str Des Con

contractor (fixed) 36
7.7.7.1 The Contractor has considered measures to reduce the energy
consumption and associated carbon emissions of the project during
construction and these have been incorporated through an energy
management plan or equivalent.
7.7.8 Energy consumption during construction - implementation Str Des Con

by contractor (fixed) 50 (up to)
7.7.8.1 The measures in the plan have been monitored throughout
construction stage and the measures have been achieved.
Outcome Credits
(a) Monitored 40
(b) Monitored and achieved 50
7.7.9 Construction plant - selection and maintenance (fixed) Str Des Con
7.7.9.1 The selection and procurement/hiring of construction plant has been 21
influenced by consideration of their energy efficiency, energy type or carbon
emissions.
7.7.9.2 The construction plant and ancillary equipment has been maintained to maximise fuel efficiency and
minimise carbon emissions.
7.7.10 Renewable / low-carbon / zero-carbon energy during Str Des Con

construction - consideration (fixed) 15
7.7.10.1 Energy from renewable and/or low- or zero-carbon resources has
been considered during construction.
7.7.11 Renewable / low-carbon / zero-carbon energy during Str Des Con

construction - implementation 21 (up to)
7.7.11.1 A percentage of the savings from the above considerations has been
implemented.
Outcome Credits
(a) Up to 5% 7
(b) 5% or more 14
(c) 10% or more 21

Guidance
Energy and carbon emissions reduction for operation (7.7.1)
Consideration should be given to reducing the following over the expected lifetime of the asset:
l Operational energy demand

l Operational primary energy consumption
l Operational carbon emissions
Metric guidance
Resultant greenhouse gas emissions and equivalent carbon emissions for the operation of the works can be
reported using equivalent carbon emissions per year, (tCO2e /year). This could be calculated and reported through
the following calculation:
Implementation of energy and carbon reductions for operation (7.7.2)

If a full LCA has been completed in 7.3.1, appropriate in this context means those measures that contribute to the
LCA and not necessarily the lowest energy solution.
In demonstrating implementation of measures, it must be demonstrated that the original baseline was design to
current project norms and not including unnecessarily high-energy consuming equipment.
Opportunities for renewable / low-carbon / zero-carbon energy within the operational scheme
(7.7.3)
It is important to note that a project does not have to be an energy-consuming works for it to be worth investigating
the inclusion of renewables, nor does the installed capacity have to just match the demand of the works in question,
especially if other consumers are close by.
Selection or rejection of suitable options should be informed by any life cycle assessment for the project and
recommendations from a suitable practitioner. This assessment should be informed by modelling, setting out
objectives or targets for the life cycle stages with estimates of savings of total carbon equivalent emissions.
Incorporating renewable / low-carbon / zero-carbon energy within the operational scheme (7.7.4)
As with other criteria in this section it should be stressed that the measurement has to be carried out from the
baseline of current industry norms and not an artificial design.
As with 7.7.3, it is important to note that a project does not have to be an energy consuming works for it to be
worth investigating the inclusion of renewables, nor does the installed capacity have to just match the demand of
the works in question, especially if other consumers are close by.
Metric guidance
The implemented potential renewable energy generation may be calculated and reported using the following
metrics:
Percentage of total energy consumed, using a formula such as:
Percentage of renewable energy generated and consumed by the completed project to total energy consumed, using
a formula such as:
It is possible for the renewable energy generated to be greater than the actual energy consumed during the
operation of works. If this is the case, this is a positive outcome, only if the unused renewable generated energy is
distributed and shared with consumers close by.

Energy consumption during construction - consideration during design (fixed) (7.7.5, 7.7.6)
It is acknowledged that the responses to these criteria are going to be based on estimated savings and, in many
cases, the savings may be anecdotal rather than quantified.
When designing and siting the asset the project team could consider:
1. Optimising earth movements required during the construction of the asset and the surrounding site
2. Reducing the amount of site clearance and demolition, e.g. by utilising existing structures where possible.
3. Minimising the dimensions of the asset without impacting on capacity, e.g. reducing length for a linear asset
or overall dimensions for a point asset
4. Siting the asset to avoid destruction of existing carbon sinks, e.g. woodland
5. Minimising the extent of temporary works, e.g. length of fencing or access routes required.
When selecting construction methods the project team could consider the following.
Design team
1. Using off site construction techniques

2. Standardising permanent materials and components
3. Using ground improvement techniques to avoid excavating soft foundations
When exploring offsite construction techniques, the project team could:
1. Confirm if off-site construction is a viable alternative to traditional construction for aspects of the project
through:
a. Identifying parts of the asset that could be manufactured off site
b. Identifying activities that could become assembly processes rather than construction processes.
c. Liaising with all members of the project team including specialists affected by the identified off-site
construction opportunities.
2. Compare the environmental impact of off-site construction with traditional on-site construction to determine
if off-site construction would have a lower environmental impact than on-site construction. The comparison
includes the following for either option:
a. Potential waste generated.
b. Predicted volume of materials used.
c. Predicted impact of the transport of materials i.e. number of movements, distances travelled and
where appropriate vehicle types and fuel consumption.
d. Potential for reuse or recovery of the components at the end of the asset's life
3. Ensure the data gathering process and content of the study is not biased.
Note: Offsite could be considered 'not viable' where the risks of pursuing off-site construction outweigh the benefits
e.g. risks may be introduced with regards to installation, procurement, timing, safety, maintenance or fitness for
purpose.
Design and construction teams
1. Reducing the overall construction time, e.g. to reduce the quantity of work required and to reduce ancillary
energy requirements such as lighting and site accommodation.
2. Minimising use or designing out high energy-consuming plant and machinery, e.g. tunnel boring machines
(TBMs), where feasible.
Energy consumption during construction - consideration by contractor (fixed) (7.7.7, 7.7.8)

The primary purpose of 7.7.5, 7.7.6, 7.7.7 and 7.7.8 is to reward the reduction of energy and carbon during
construction. It should be noted that if the team have done a full LCA and scored it in 7.3.1 then these issues may
well have already been considered, if so then the same evidence can be used.
Monitoring energy use and carbon emissions can highlight differences in utilisation and control of energy, thus
providing data for comparison and enabling energy savings in future.
Metric guidance
Energy consumption considerations on site could include the transportation, processing and assembly of materials
to and from site; construction and assembly activities or processes; and general site operation and maintenance,
Resultant carbon emissions during construction may be reported and calculated using:

Calculated tCO2e emissions (impact of all major GHG emissions expressed as carbon dioxide equivalent, CO2e)
relative to £100k project construction value, using a formula such as:
Reductions achieved through energy management plan or equivalent, using a formula such as:
Construction plant - selection and maintenance (fixed) (7.7.9)

Considering the energy consumption of construction plant and machinery before purchase or hiring will ensure that
the better environmental option can be chosen, and savings on fuel can be made in the long run. Regular
maintenance of plant and machinery will ensure fuel efficiency and prolong the life of machines and power tools.
When selecting construction plant and machinery the project team could consider:
1. Selecting construction plant and machinery with a high efficiency (%), i.e. the percentage of output rating
achieved under typical operating conditions
2. Selecting efficient ancillary equipment, e.g. accommodation, temporary lighting.
3. Select appropriately sized plant and machinery that will carry out the necessary work in the most energy
efficient manner.
4. Select plant, machinery and ancillary equipment with timers and other automatic controls which:
a. Lead to efficiency gains by avoiding additional work being carried out and reduction in the time
taken to complete a task
b. Switch off the lighting during daylight or curfew hours in outdoor areas
The following questions can be asked to assist in the selection of the most efficient equipment that is appropriate
for the task:
1. Is the size (output) of the equipment appropriate for the size of the task?
2. At what speed can the equipment perform the task?
3. Is the equipment available?
4. What are the transport costs and associated energy use (distance travelled and mode of use)?
5. How is the performance of the equipment affected by:
a. The soil characteristics on site?
b. The geometrical characteristics of the task?
6. Are there space and weight constraints on site?
7. What is the energy source used by the equipment?
When selecting temporary lighting the project team could investigate:
1. The need for lighting on site during construction, including:

a. Key locations on site where lighting is necessary, e.g. tunnels, and whether light could be limited to
these areas
b. Whether it is feasible to limit construction to daylight hours for all or part of the programme.
2. The applicability of curfews and automated controls to save higher levels of lighting for when needed
3. Opportunities for energy efficient and low carbon lighting solutions.
Renewable / low-carbon / zero-carbon energy during construction (7.7.10, 7.7.11)

As with 7.7.3, it is important to note that a project does not have to be an energy consuming works for it to be
worth investigating the use of renewables in the construction stage. Measures should be appropriate to the scale
and nature of the project, for example, one solar panel on a multi-cabin site office for a multi-million-pound project
would definitely be insufficient.
If the implementation includes use of blended biofuels, then the calculated savings should be based on national or
international guidelines and methodologies .

Evidence
7.7.1 Energy and carbon If an LCA has been completed the evidence here will be a sub-set of that
emissions reduction for provided in 7.3.1. If an LCA has not been completed, then evidence could
operation include project records and/or minutes of project team meetings. Evidence
could alternatively include the calculation and reporting of the metric-based
guidance.
7.7.2 Implementation of energy Evidence could include project records - minutes of project team meetings,
and carbon reductions for technical reports, and/or drawings
operation
7.7.3 Opportunities for Evidence could include minutes of project team meetings, technical reports,
renewable / low-carbon / zero- and/or drawings.
carbon energy within the
operational scheme
7.7.4 Incorporating renewable / Evidence could include drawings, specifications or photographs. Evidence could
low-carbon / zero-carbon energy alternatively include the calculation and reporting of the metric-based
within the operational scheme guidance.
7.7.5 Energy consumption Evidence could be in the form of design records or value engineering reports
during construction - considering the construction methods, such as the size of components to
consideration during design enable efficient lifting and placing as well as the amount of on-site processing
(fixed) or handling of materials.
7.7.6 Energy consumption Evidence can include records showing consideration of energy issues in site
during construction - planning and demonstration that energy use and/or carbon emissions are
incorporation in design assessed and then monitored. This can include evidence of actions to reduce
7.7.7 Energy consumption consumption and emissions as appropriate. This could also include the setting
during construction - of targets. Evidence could also show use of equipment to proactively manage
consideration by contractor consumption and emissions, such as timers and passive infrared sensors.
(fixed) Evidence could alternatively include the calculation and reporting of the metric-
based guidance.
7.7.8 Energy consumption
during construction -
implementation by contractor
(fixed)
7.7.9 Construction plant - Evidence could be contract specifications and other procurement documents, or
selection and maintenance plant documentation (for example, records of regular maintenance and
(fixed) emission testing).
7.7.10 Renewable / low-carbon / Evidence showing the source of site energy is needed. This could be copies of
zero-carbon energy during agreements with electricity suppliers showing use of certified fully-renewably-
construction - consideration sourced 'green' tariffs or photographs showing use of alternative energy
(fixed) sources (such as wind turbines, solar panels, or small-scale combined heat and
7.7.11 Renewable / low-carbon / power). Evidence needs to show that the use of renewable, low- or zero-carbon
zero-carbon energy during energy is more than a token effort.
construction - implementation

7.8 Water use
Aim
To reduce water demands and increase water efficiency during design, delivery and operation and minimise carbon
emissions and other pollutants associated with water consumption.
Assessment scope

7.8.3 Capturing run-off for The decision to scope out will depend on the nature, scale, location and context
beneficial use of the project, for example on a refurbishment project that cannot affect the
drainage arrangements.
7.8.4 Water consumption during Scope out on projects where water consumption in use is not an issue, for
operation - consideration during example a flood defence bank.
design
operation - reduction measures example a flood defence bank.
included in design
operation - reduction measures example a flood defence bank.
incorporated in works
Credit summary
7.8.1 Embodied water - consideration (fixed) 25
7.8.2 Embodied water - implementation (fixed) 25
7.8.3 Capturing run-off for beneficial use 5 5
7.8.4 Water consumption during operation - consideration 16
during design
7.8.5 Water consumption during operation - reduction 25
measures included in design
7.8.6 Water consumption during operation - reduction 25
measures incorporated in works
7.8.7 Water consumption during construction - client 17
requirements (fixed)
7.8.8 Water consumption during construction - policies, 25
plans, and targets (fixed)
7.8.9 Water consumption during construction - 32 (up to)
implementation of plans and policies (fixed)

Assessment criteria
7.8.1 Embodied water - consideration (fixed) Str Des Con
7.8.1.1 An assessment has been made at design stage considering the 25
embodied water in the materials required during construction.
7.8.2 Embodied water - implementation (fixed) Str Des Con

7.8.2.1 The outcomes of the assessment been implemented. 25
7.8.3 Capturing run-off for beneficial use Str Des Con

7.8.3.1 The project team has made provision for capturing run-off for 5 5
beneficial use on the project or nearby and, if appropriate, those provisions
have been incorporated in the completed project.
7.8.4 Water consumption during operation - consideration during Str Des Con
design 16
7.8.4.1 The potential impacts on water resources of the operation and
maintenance of the completed project have been actively considered during
design.
7.8.5 Water consumption during operation - reduction measures Str Des Con
included in design 25
7.8.5.1 Measures to conserve water and reduce water consumption during
operation and maintenance of the completed project have been included in the
design.
7.8.6 Water consumption during operation - reduction measures Str Des Con
incorporated in works 25
7.8.6.1 The measures referred to in 7.8.5 have been incorporated in the works.
7.8.7 Water consumption during construction - client Str Des Con

requirements (fixed) 17
7.8.7.1 Specific and measurable requirements to measure, monitor and
minimise the consumption of mains or abstracted water during construction
have been included in the project brief and the procurement documentation
(such as Expressions of Interest, Pre-Qualification Questionnaires and/or
Invitation to Tender).
7.8.8 Water consumption during construction - policies, plans, and Str Des Con
targets (fixed) 25
7.8.8.1 Formal project-level policies and identified measurable targets for
reducing water usage during construction have been adopted; and a plan to
measure, monitor, and minimise the consumption of mains, tankered, or
abstracted water used during the construction process has been produced.
The water minimisation plan should specifically cover (as applicable):
a. Site welfare facilities

b. Dust suppression roads
c. Dust suppression of stockpiles
d. Washing facilities
e. Site staff training
f. Water Champion

7.8.9 Water consumption during construction - implementation of Str Des Con

plans and policies (fixed) 32 (up to)
7.8.9.1 The plan has been implemented and covers the following aspects.

(i) Efficient use of water in site facilities 8
(ii) Efficient use of water in construction activities 8
(iii) Capturing runoff for reuse during construction 16
Guidance
Embodied water (7.8.1, 7.8.2)
The interest in the concept of a 'water footprint' and the accompanying methods and tools for its assessment are
rooted in the recognition that human impacts on freshwater systems can ultimately be linked to human
consumption and that issues like water shortages and pollution can be better understood and addressed by
considering production and supply chains as a whole. Therefore, information on the embodied water of
construction products can provide information to facilitate decisions that can help reduce the overall environmental
impact of a project.
The water footprint concept and its use to inform materials or process selection is, however, still relatively new.
Organisations such as the Water Footprint Network (www.waterfootprint.org) have published useful guidance
documents, including The Water Footprint Assessment Manual: Setting the Global Standard (A. Hoekstra and A.
Chapagain et al, 2011). ISO has also published ISO 14046:2014 Environmental management – Water footprint –
Principles, requirements and guidelines to complement existing standards on life-cycle assessment (LCA).
Existing data that could be used to inform a study into the embodied water of construction materials can be found
in sources such as the BRE Green Guide to Specification and Environmental Product Declarations.
Metric guidance
It would be advantageous if the volume of embodied water saved or reduced from implementing water efficient
construction activity processes is monitored. This could be achieved through comparison and assessment of different
design solutions and construction activity plans. Estimates and calculations could be supported by:
Consideration of embodied water in LCA of difference design schemes and procedures.
Additionally, the total embodied water may be calculated and reported respective to source type. Sources may
include:
l Potable water (water fit or suitable for drinking, typically mains supplied)
l Rainwater
l Grey water (domestic wastewater, excluding sewage)
l Surface water (water from overland flow and storage, such as rivers and lakes)
l Seawater (water from sea or ocean)
l Groundwater (water held in and recovered from underground formation
Volume of water consumed from different sources during construction per £100k of project construction value.
The following formula for calculating embodied water may be used:
Based on the above calculations, the reductions achieved from water efficient design and construction may be
calculated and reported as:

Capturing run-off for beneficial use (7.8.3)

Flood risk from new developments can be reduced by keeping the number of sealed surfaces requiring drainage to a
minimum (for example by using permeable paving materials or green roofs) and by introducing capture of run-off
before it reaches the main drainage system. SuDS such as balancing ponds or wetlands are covered in 2.2 Flooding
and surface water run-off.
However, this is focusing on capturing run-off for beneficial use, for example in tanks for non-potable uses on the
site. This capture may involve systems included within the wide-ranging definition of SuDS, but it is the capture for
beneficial use that is important here. It is therefore possible that a project may be able to score both here and in 2.2
for the overall system they implement.
Water consumption during operation (7.8.4, 7.8.5, 7.8.6)

Measures to conserve water and reduce water consumption during operation and maintenance could include the
use of water efficient or moisture controlled irrigation systems, the use of collected rainwater or greywater as an
alternative non-potable water supply, or the installation of a leak detection system.
Options to mitigate the project's impact on the water environment could also include using captured water for
energy generation, passive cooling, and/or district heating.
The consideration of these issues during design could be part of a PEMP or can be included in a separate document.
The review should assess questions such as:
l What water use does the project entail?

l Are suitable water resources available?
l Are new water resources needed?
l Are they sustainable?
l Does the project endanger security of water supply to existing users?
Metric guidance
Potential reductions achieved from measures to conserve and reduce potable or mains water consumption during
operation and maintenance of completed works can be reported through calculation of:
Potential percentage savings of operational annual water (m3/year), using a formula such as:
Percentage of total potential water consumed for maintenance and operation of completed works annually that is
from a potable source, using a formula such as:
Water consumption during construction (7.8.7, 7.8.8, 7.8.9)

A proactive approach to reducing water usage in construction should begin at the procurement stage and it is the
responsibility of the Client to ensure that requirements are set for water use in the construction process. Improving
the efficiency of water use in construction follows the following hierarchy:
1. eliminate water wastage on site;

2. improve efficiency of water-using processes; and
3. offset consumption of mains water with alternative sources such as rainwater harvesting.
Key water using processes on construction sites are considered to be:
1. site cabins and temporary accommodation;

2. general site activities including tool washing;
3. wet trades, such as brickwork, screeding, concreting and plastering;
4. groundworks, including grouting and drilling;
5. dust suppression, including road and wheel washing;
6. hydro-demolition;
7. cleaning of tools and plant equipment, lorry washing; and
8. commissioning and testing of building plant and services.
Activities where it is thought the majority of water wastage occurs include:

1. general dust suppression, suppression on site roads and wheel washes;

2. hydro-demolition with high pressure water;
3. lorry wash out;
4. wash out of ready mixed concrete wagons;
5. site and general cleaning;
6. specialist and high pressure cleaning; and
7. commissioning plant and services.
Water metering for the construction stage is essential to manage water prudently. The following should be
considered:
1. The main water meter supplying the site is accessible for reading the meter.
2. Sub-meters are installed on:
a. Each water zone
b. Water discharge points which have the potential for uncontrolled flow because of human behaviour,
e.g. leaving a tap running
c. Water discharge points considered to have the highest estimated daily volumetric use within each
zone
d. Rainwater recycling technology
e. Grey water recycling technologies.
3. Water consumption is recorded weekly for the items mentioned and an assessment made of erroneous
consumption, e.g. high or low water demands to identify leaks or maintenance requirements.
4. A monthly site inspection is carried out to identify:
a. Inefficiencies in water devices and water discharge points including leaks and overflows
b. Actions needed because of the inspection including relevant operation, maintenance or replacement
information
c. Out-of-hours assessment of base load water consumption.
5. Total and net water consumption is recorded at the end of the project or yearly and compared with the
target. The end of project figures are reported.
At the procurement stage, requirements can be set to minimise water use during construction from mains and
abstracted sources. For example, requirements could include the re-use of water from settlement lagoons as a non-
potable water supply for damping down during dusty periods.
Evidence
7.8.1 Embodied water - Evidence would include information gathered on the embodied water of the
consideration (fixed) construction products and materials required for the project, either from
product or material suppliers. It would also include documentary evidence that
7.8.2 Embodied water - decisions on material or product choice have been made on the basis of
implementation (fixed) embodied water. Evidence could alternatively include the calculation and
7.8.3 Capturing run-off for Evidence should show what measures (such as the ones mentioned in the
beneficial use guidance above) have been incorporated into the design. This could be in the
form of drawings, specifications or other design output documents, with
construction records or photographs to demonstrate their construction.
7.8.4 Water consumption during Evidence of the design consideration could include assessment of predicted
operation - consideration during water use, review of availability of water resources or a copy of consultation
design with the relevant water authority regarding water supply and resource
7.8.5 Water consumption during availability. At design stage, evidence is required of investigations into water
operation - reduction measures conservation measures. This could be in various documented forms (such as
included in design notes of brainstorming sessions, and notes, specifications or drawings showing
measures incorporated into the design). Evidence could alternatively include the
7.8.6 Water consumption during calculation and reporting of the metric-based guidance.
operation - reduction measures
incorporated in works


7.8.7 Water consumption during Evidence could be a copy of documentation (such as the Project Environment
construction - client Policy) showing that the Client has formally adopted policies and targets and
requirements (fixed) copies of reports (such as Environmental or Corporate Responsibility report)
demonstrating the measurement of performance against targets. The Client
7.8.8 Water consumption during would also need to provide copies of the procurement documentation and
construction - policies, plans, contracts showing these requirements have been cascaded throughout its
and targets (fixed) supply chain. A proactive approach to reducing water usage in construction
should begin at the procurement stage and it is the responsibility of the Client
7.8.9 Water consumption during and Designer to ensure that requirements are set for water use in the
construction - implementation of construction process. Additionally, total and net water consumption recorded
plans and policies (fixed) at the end of the project or yearly and compared with the targets should be
supplied as proof of implementation.

CEEQUAL Version 6 | International Projects 8 Transport
8 Transport
Summary
This category encourages the effective management of transport impacts from all modes of transport both during
construction and as operational impacts. Transport impacts considered within this assessment include the movement
of construction materials and waste, construction workforce transport, as well as disruption to other users of the
transport network during the life of the asset. An emphasis is placed on designing out transport impacts wherever
possible and consultation with local community to create opportunities for an integrated transport system.

8.1 Transport networks 228
8.2 Construction logistics 172
400

8 Transport CEEQUAL Version 6 | International Projects
8.1 Transport networks
Aim
To enhance local transport networks and promote active travel for community benefit.
Assessment scope

8.1.1 Relationship to the Scope out for projects having no permanent effect on the level of service
transport network provided by existing transport networks.
8.1.2 Transport effects of the Scope out for projects that: generate no additional traffic impact (for example
completed project flood defences or pipelines) or are wholly or essentially refurbishments.
8.1.3 Access for pedestrians and This applies to any site that was publicly accessible prior to development. It can
cyclists be scoped out where the site is of necessity a secure site where public access is
inappropriate.
8.1.4 Need for additional This should be scoped out for projects that are on or creating new elements of
transport infrastructure transport infrastructure.
It can also be scoped out for civil engineering projects that generate no
additional impacts from traffic. Examples include flood defences, pipelines, and
new water or sewage treatment works where, after construction, traffic may
well be reduced as fewer staff may work on the new plant. Minor access works
can be scoped out.
8.1.5 Enhanced operational The decision to scope out will depend on the nature, scale, location and context
transport outcomes of the project.
8.1.6 Community consultation
on the design objectives
8.1.7 Resilience of the transport Scope out where the project has little or no impact upon the transport network.
network
8.1.8 Adaptability of the
transport network
8.1.9 Performance for non- Scope out where the project has little or no impact upon all modes of transport.
motorised users
Credit summary
(up to)
8.1.1 Relationship to the transport network 27
8.1.2 Transport effects of the completed project 37
8.1.3 Access for pedestrians and cyclists 25
8.1.4 Need for additional transport infrastructure 37
8.1.5 Enhanced operational transport outcomes 15
8.1.6 Community consultation on the design objectives 30
8.1.7 Resilience of the transport network 11 11
8.1.8 Adaptability of the transport network 10 10
8.1.9 Performance for non-motorised users 15 (up to)

Assessment criteria
8.1.1 Relationship to the transport network Str Des Con
8.1.1.1 In the case of a transport project, the project provides improved levels 27 (up to)
of service and extends to all modes in a way that delivers improved integration.
Mode with improved level of service Credits (each)

(i) Car or van 3 for each
(ii) HGV mode
(iii) Bus
(iv) Bicycle
(v) Walking
(vi) Equestrian
(vii) Rail
(viii) Aviation
(ix) Water
8.1.1.2 In the case of a non-transport project, the site has been selected because the project (a) requires no or
minimal new transport infrastructure and/or (b) mainly makes use of public transport systems.
8.1.2 Transport effects of the completed project Str Des Con

8.1.2.1 The project team has considered and incorporated measures that 37
reduce relevant, transport-related impacts of the completed project on the local
community.
8.1.3 Access for pedestrians and cyclists Str Des Con

8.1.3.1 There has been consultation on, or consideration given to, the ability 25
of pedestrians and cyclists to pass through the site on dedicated paths and to
establishing links with existing and proposed routes to local services.
8.1.4 Need for additional transport infrastructure Str Des Con

8.1.4.1 The project does not require provision of, or increase the need for, 37
additional transport infrastructure.
8.1.5 Enhanced operational transport outcomes Str Des Con

8.1.5.1 There is evidence from the design process that Designers have worked 15
beyond the standards specified in the design codes to deliver enhanced
operational transport outcomes.
8.1.6 Community consultation on the design objectives Str Des Con

8.1.6.1 There is evidence from the design process that the community affected 30
by the project has been involved in specifying the design objectives.
8.1.7 Resilience of the transport network Str Des Con

8.1.7.1 The resilience and recovery of the transport network has been 11 11
considered during the design process.
8.1.8 Adaptability of the transport network Str Des Con

8.1.8.1 The design delivers a transport network with improved ability to 10 10
accommodate future change.

8.1.9 Performance for non-motorised users Str Des Con

8.1.9.1 The project team has provided measures that improve the level of 15 (up to)
performance for non-motorised users either within or outside the project site.

(i) Measures taken to mitigate adverse impacts such that the net effect is no change. 3
(ii) Measures taken that provide enhancements for able-bodied people. 4
(iii) Measures taken include enhancements for vulnerable members of the community. 8
Guidance
Relationship to the transport network (8.1.1)
A sustainable project places few demands on the construction of new transport infrastructure and existing services.
Where additional demands exist or are justified, then it is important that they be matched by increased transport
capacity that enables no significant loss in the level of service available to existing users.
Transport effects of the completed project (8.1.2)

Road schemes may score if they reduce the overall volume of traffic by, for example, developing bus or cycle lanes. In
addition, redesigning a junction may make that part of the road network more-efficient, thus reducing congestion
and thus emissions. Such projects are now considered to be an important part of the better management of the road
network so, if this can be demonstrated, then credits should be awarded.
The issues that could be relevant include:
l Severance
l Ease of use (signs and communications)
l Safety
l Congestion
l Parking spaces
l Inconvenience
Access for pedestrians and cyclists (8.1.3)

When introducing a new built feature into the landscape, issues regarding public access and security need to be
addressed during the planning and design stages. If a scheme results in the closing-off to the public of previously
accessible areas, there has to be a trade-off between the loss of accessible land and the provision of public access.
This could be the provision of new access routes, such as bridleways, cycle paths or walkways, or the enhancement of
existing routes or amenity features. Consideration of the balance can also result in preventing public access on
health and safety grounds and to avoid nuisance.
Please note that this applies to any site that was publicly accessible prior to development for formal or informal
amenity use, for example, for walking, dog walking or as informal play area. Such areas, even where not formally
protected, can have an important amenity value for the local community and some compensation for the loss of that
amenity should be made where possible. Any such compensation scheme should also include maintenance
arrangements to ensure its long-term success.
For road projects, 'public space' should refer to space provided for community benefit rather than road users.
Need for additional transport infrastructure (8.1.4)

The requirement is not necessarily about demand on the transport network but the ability of the transport network
to absorb any demand the project places on the network. A project with significant demands that can be absorbed
by existing transport infrastructure can score, whereas a more-modest project that requires additional transport
infrastructure will not.

Enhanced operational transport outcomes (8.1.5)

Suitable evidence would be where departures from standards have been sought from the regulatory authorities, or
where a novel technique or approach has been adopted that does not feature as standard industry practice.
Community consultation on the design objectives (8.1.6)

Community consultation on the design objectives Community engagement in the project specification may be
demonstrable from the identification of projects within local plans or consultation with the community on the
design objectives to be applied before the design process commences. Hence, consultation events would need to be
held at the project inception rather than at the optioneering or project consent stage.
Resilience of the transport network (8.1.7)

Resilience and recovery of the transport network is to be considered in terms of the ability of the asset to return to
normal levels of service following severe weather, terrorism and unusual events.
Adaptability of the transport network (8.1.8)

This seeks to recognise that enhancements to the transport network may incorporate some level of futureproofing. It
also recognises that a project may deliver benefits for other planned projects such as through financial contributions
or additional capacity.
Futureproofing is to be considered in terms of the project's design life, adaptability, allowance for future provision
and aiding delivery of future projects.
Performance for non-motorised users (8.1.9)

With an increasingly elderly population who will be less mobile, measures that ease their transport needs are to be
recognised. Vulnerable members of the community not only include groups such as the elderly and people with
mobility difficulties but could also include children and women, particularly if road safety or safety at night is a
consideration.
Evidence
8.1.1 Relationship to the Evidence could be found in an Environmental Statement (ES) or Transport
transport network Impact Assessment (TIA).
8.1.2 Transport effects of the Evidence could be found in an ES, TIA, drawings and plans.
completed project
8.1.3 Access for pedestrians and Evidence could include consultation meetings with councils or other local
cyclists groups, or evidence from drawings or other design documents that show
consideration of open space and/or public access.
8.1.4 Need for additional Evidence is likely to be in the report of a TIA or similar.
transport infrastructure
8.1.5 Enhanced operational Evidence is likely to be in the form of minutes of meetings or other reports
transport outcomes documenting consideration of alternative approaches or community
8.1.6 Community consultation engagement.
on the design objectives
8.1.7 Resilience of the transport Evidence would be expected in the ES or TIA Report.
network
8.1.8 Adaptability of the Evidence is likely to be included in the ES or TIA Report.
transport network
8.1.9 Performance for non- Evidence is likely to be in the form of plans, drawings and photographs to
motorised users demonstrate delivery. Consideration of the needs of such members of society
during adverse weather and at night should be part of the evidence provided.

8.2 Construction logistics
Aim
To reduce carbon emissions and avoid negative effects on local health, safety and travel arising from construction
stage transport movements and diversions arising as a result of preparation and construction works.
Assessment scope

8.2.2 Transport effects of Scope out only for self-contained sites that do not require access to public
construction activities highways nor disrupt the rights of way network.
8.2.5 Minimising disruption The decision to scope out will depend on the nature, scale, location and context
from construction traffic of the project.
8.2.6 Success in minimising Scope out for projects with little in the way of construction traffic.
construction traffic impacts
8.2.8 Movement of construction This may be scoped out if the analysis used to answer 8.2.7 shows that no such
materials - implementation alternatives are either available or would be appropriate on the project.
Credit summary
8.2.1 Planning construction traffic movements (fixed) 15
8.2.2 Transport effects of construction activities 19 (up to)
8.2.3 Reducing risks for vulnerable road users (fixed) 20 (up to)
8.2.4 Responsible fleet operations (fixed) 22
8.2.5 Minimising disruption from construction traffic 8 25
8.2.6 Success in minimising construction traffic impacts 18 (up to)
8.2.7 Movement of construction materials (fixed) 6
8.2.8 Movement of construction materials - implementation 9
8.2.9 Workforce travel planning (fixed) 5 5 5
8.2.10 Workforce travel planning – implementation (fixed) 5 5 5
Assessment criteria
(fixed)
8.2.1 Planning construction traffic movements Str Des Con
8.2.1.1 Construction traffic movements have been reviewed or considered by 15
the project team prior to the construction stage commencing.
8.2.2 Transport effects of construction activities Str Des Con

8.2.2.1 The project team has incorporated measures that deliver improved 19 (up to)
performance on the following effects of construction activities on the local
community.


(i) Ease of use of signs and other communications 4
(ii) Reduction of available parking spaces 4
(iii) Reduced congestion 5
(iv) Reducing severance 6
(fixed)
8.2.3 Reducing risks for vulnerable road users Str Des Con
8.2.3.1 The project team have incorporated measures that improve safety for 20 (up to)
vulnerable road users.

(i) The construction site entrance has been managed to minimise the risks to vulnerable 4 for each
road users arising from vehicles approaching and leaving the site.
(ii) The site is accessible for delivery vehicles fitted with safety features (e.g. side under run
protection).
(iii) Access routes to the site, including for heavy vehicles, have been managed to minimise
risks to vulnerable road users.
(iv) All fleet operator(s) have undertaken regular driver training and awareness to promote
safety within the site and off site.
(v) The fleet operator(s) have captured and investigated any road incidents and near misses
and reported them back to the principal contractor for analysis.
(fixed)
8.2.4 Responsible fleet operations Str Des Con
8.2.4.1 All fleet operators travelling to or from the construction site have used 22
a compliant organisational, local, or national considerate fleet operations
scheme and their performance against the scheme has been confirmed by
independent assessment and certification or verification.
8.2.4.2 The fleet operators have achieved the relevant level of performance for the compliant scheme.
8.2.5 Minimising disruption from construction traffic Str Des Con

8.2.5.1 Measures have been included in the project specification and 8 25
construction management that minimise disruption caused by construction
traffic, whether on the public network, from construction vehicles on site, or on
both.

stage
(a1) Measures included in the project design 5 Design
(a2) Measures delivered during the construction stage 25 Construction
8.2.6 Success in minimising construction traffic impacts Str Des Con

8.2.6.1 There is evidence available at the end of the construction stage to 18 (up to)
demonstrate that measures to minimise the impacts of construction traffic have
been monitored and been successful.
Outcome Credits
(a) Monitored 7
(b) Monitored and successful 18

(fixed)
8.2.7 Movement of construction materials Str Des Con
8.2.7.1 The project team has considered possible use of other, more- 6
sustainable transport routes (other than road), such as rail and/or water, for the
movement of construction materials and/or waste.
8.2.8 Movement of construction materials - implementation Str Des Con

8.2.8.1 The outcome of the assessment in 8.2.7 has implemented some or all 9
of the measures.
8.2.9 Workforce travel planning (fixed) Str Des Con

8.2.9.1 There is a travel plan in place for each of the organisations responsible 5 5 5
for delivering the project that is aimed at an appropriate balance of
effectiveness for the travellers, and at minimising adverse environmental and
social impacts associated with the travel involved.
a. Client organisation
b. Design teams
c. Lead construction Contractor
8.2.10 Workforce travel planning – implementation (fixed) Str Des Con

8.2.10.1 For each travel plan identified in 8.2.9, the plans have been 5 5 5
successfully implemented for each of the project team organisations.
a. Client organisation
b. Design teams
c. Lead construction Contractor
Guidance
Planning construction traffic movements (fixed) (8.2.1)
The consequences of construction traffic upon all modes of transport, including on cycling and walking as well as
vulnerable members of society, must be part of the consideration to score. Evidence could be baseline study data (a
stand-alone report or produced as part of an EIA) but, where appropriate, could also be minutes of meetings where
the issue has been actively considered.
Transport effects of construction activities (8.2.2)

This can be achieved, for example, by assessing the transport impacts of materials delivery and construction staff
travel, considering options for site access and transport routes. Consideration of alternative means of transport for
materials (other than by road) is considered in 8.2.7.
Reducing risks for vulnerable road users (fixed) (8.2.3)

In the UK, the Construction Logistics and Community Safety (CLOCS) Standard may be used by clients and principal
contractors to help manage and reduce risks to vulnerable road users from construction vehicles. For more
information about the CLOCS Standard visit www.clocs.org.uk.
In the UK, fleet operators may use the Fleet Operators Recognition Scheme (FORS) to demonstrate how they are
managing their operations to reduce work related road risks. For more information about FORS visit
https://www.fors-online.org.uk.
Responsible fleet operations (fixed) (8.2.4)

Compliant considerate fleet operations schemes are listed in the table below, along with the minimum required level
of performance. If you would like another scheme to be evaluated for recognition, please contact BRE Global with
'Infrastructure: Responsible fleet operation - New scheme evaluation' in the subject header ([email protected]).

Location Scheme name Minimum level

UK Fleet Operators Recognition scheme (FORS) FORS Silver
Minimising disruption from construction traffic (8.2.5)

This focuses upon the movement of construction materials and waste rather than the movement of the construction
teams, which is considered in 8.2.9 and 8.2.10. In addition, it is important to recognise that noise and dust nuisance
may be caused by internal haul roads as well as by the effects of construction traffic upon the transport network.
Measures by the Client or Contractor could include a contractual ability to impose sanctions on the company causing
an infringement or hard enforcement measures, such as local liaison and/or cameras. Further measures at
construction stage could include direction signage, and route planning to avoid particular roads.
Success in minimising construction traffic impacts (8.2.6)

This is focused on successful implementation of the measures outlined in 8.2.5.
Metric guidance
Monitoring and measurement of success in minimising construction traffic impacts could be done through
recording and auditing of construction transportation movements, to and from site. Possible calculations and
reporting methods include:
Total number of commercial vehicle movements onto site per £100k construction value, using a formula such as:
Total distance (km) due to commercial movements to site per £100k construction value, using a formula such as:
Total distance travelled (km) per tonne of construction material, using a formula such as:
Percentage of carbon emissions due to construction vehicle movements, using the formula:
Movement of construction materials (fixed) (8.2.7)

The project team needs to demonstrate that appropriate alternatives have been considered, even if they are
apparently extreme. For example, the use of helicopters to transport materials and or equipment to a remote,
sensitive site to avoid building of a temporary haul road may be acceptable but needs to be fully justified.
In considering this criterion, the movement of materials not just to and from the construction site should be
considered, but also the effect that the supply chain may have on the movement of major elements of the project
components.
Movement of construction materials - implementation (8.2.8)

Even if movements by the Client organisation or design team are modest compared to those at the construction
stage, these travel plans are felt to be helpful in not only reducing adverse impacts but in setting a tone for the
project team.
Distance and carbon emissions are both significant, so distance and form of travel are relevant, and, hence, executive
travel by air would be considered a potentially a very significant movement.
Appropriate measures may include, for example, access to public transport links, provision of a minibus, provision of
temporary accommodation, encouraging car-pooling or prescribing specific routes for journeys (including access
arrangements, compounds, parking and public transport).

Metric guidance
Workforce travel may be managed and controlled by implementing systems to monitor and record travel movements
during the construction of works.
A workforce transport survey or travel diaries may be used to record:
l The different transportation modes used.

l Frequency of and distance of movements to and from site.
Minimising and monitoring of workforce transport movements may be reported through calculation of:
The total number of workforce vehicle or transportation movements (individual round trips) to site per £100k
construction value, using a formula such as:
The total distance (km) due to workforce movements to and from site (total distance of each individual round trip)
per £100k construction value, using a formula such as:
Average distance travelled per person to and from site, using a formula such as:
Percentage use of local public transport modes, using the formula:
Evidence
8.2.1 Planning construction Evidence is likely to be found in a Transport Impact Assessment (TIA),
traffic movements (fixed) Environmental Statement (ES), Construction Logistics Plan (CLP), or contract
documentation.
8.2.2 Transport effects of Evidence is likely to be in the form of drawings, plans or photographs that
construction activities demonstrates the incorporation of measures that reduce the effects upon local
communities.
8.2.3 Reducing risks for Evidence could include site inspection reports, relevant sections of a
vulnerable road users (fixed) Construction Management Plan (CMP), training records, or near miss reporting
and analysis.
8.2.4 Responsible fleet Evidence is likely to include contractual requirements and records or reports
operations (fixed) from monitoring during construction.
8.2.5 Minimising disruption Evidence is likely to be drawn from the commitments made in the ES, the
from construction traffic evidence supporting the planning application, the specifications or terms and
conditions that the tendering Contractors are operating under, or the transport
sections of a Construction Environmental Management Plan (CEMP) or similar
document.


8.2.6 Success in minimising It is accepted that proving success in these situations is difficult because there is
construction traffic impacts no control project running alongside the one with the measures in place, and
because of the challenge of proving that an issue has been minimised.
However, a combination of demonstrating the measures were aimed at
minimising impacts and that they have been achieved (for example using video
clips and photographs) is what is being sought here. In addition, a signed
statement by the Project Director to confirm the absence of complaints may also
be appropriate.
Evidence of monitoring and measuring transportation movements may be from
security or gate records, material order/receipts or waste transfer notes etc in
order to record number/frequency of vehicle movements and the average
distance of round trip to site. Evidence could alternatively include the
calculation and reporting of the metric-based guidance.
8.2.7 Movement of construction Evidence will need to be shown in the Client's requirements or in design and/or
materials (fixed) site records to demonstrate consideration of alternative transport methods.
8.2.8 Movement of construction
materials - implementation
8.2.9 Workforce travel planning Evidence is required that demonstrates that the need for travel plans has been
(fixed) considered rather than evidence of the number of movements by particular
transport modes. For implementation, evidence could be reports on numbers of
workforce travelling to work by car as opposed to public transport, car counts
8.2.10 Workforce travel planning compared to total number of workforce employed on site or similar. Evidence
– implementation (fixed) could alternatively include the calculation and reporting of the metric-based
guidance.
CLOCS – Construction Logistics and Community Safety Standard
The Construction Logistics and Community Safety (CLOCS) Standard is a UK construction industry standard for
reducing work related road risk. It promotes good practice beyond legal compliance by defining primary
requirements for key stakeholders associated with a construction project. For more information about the CLOCS
Standard visit https://www.clocs.org.uk/.
FORS – Fleet Operators Recognition Scheme

The Fleet Operators Recognition Scheme (FORS) is a voluntary accreditation scheme for fleet operators, which aims to
raise standards of safety, efficiency, and environmental protection within fleet operations in the UK. FORS
membership and accreditation allows fleet operators to demonstrate their performance against three levels in the
FORS Standard: Bronze, Silver, and Gold. For more information about FORS visit https://www.fors-online.org.uk.

Innovation CEEQUAL Version 6 | International Projects
Innovation
Summary
The Innovation category provides opportunities for exemplary performance and innovation to be recognised that are
not included within, or go beyond, the requirements of the standard assessment criteria. This includes exemplary
performance credits where the exemplary performance criteria in an issue have been met. It also includes innovative
products and processes for which an innovation credit can be claimed, where they have been approved by
BRE Global Limited.
The cost-saving benefits of innovation are fostered and facilitated by helping encourage, drive and publicise
accelerated uptake of innovative measures.

CEEQUAL Version 6 | International Projects Innovation
Innovation
Aim
To support innovation within the construction industry through the recognition of sustainability-related benefits
which are not rewarded by standard CEEQUAL issues.
Assessment scope

- -
Credit summary
(up to)
Exemplary level of performance in existing issues 500
Approved Innovations
Assessment criteria
Exemplary level of performance in existing issues
The project has demonstrated exemplary performance by meeting the exemplary performance criteria in one or more
of the following assessment issues:
a. 7.2 Reducing whole life carbon emissions
Innovation credits can be awarded for each innovation application approved by BRE Global Limited, where the
project has complied with the criteria defined within the approved innovation application form.
Guidance
Innovation applications can be submitted to BRE Global Limited by a qualified CEEQUAL Assessor using the
Approved Innovation Application Form (BF1033).
Evidence
Exemplary level of performance See guidance in CEEQUAL assessment issues.
in existing issues
Approved Innovations A copy of the Approved Innovation Application Form (BF1033) and a copy of
the Innovation Application Report that confirms the application has been
approved. Relevant documentary evidence that demonstrates the project has
achieved or installed the approved innovation as detailed in the innovation
application form and report.

Innovation CEEQUAL Version 6 | International Projects
Definitions
Approved innovations
Any new technology, design, construction, operation, maintenance or demolition method, or process that can be
shown to improve the sustainability performance of a building and is of demonstrable benefit to the wider industry
in a manner that is not covered elsewhere in CEEQUAL. In addition, the innovation has been approved by BRE Global
in accordance with its published innovation credit procedures.

CEEQUAL Version 6 | International Projects Glossary
Glossary
BAP ISO 14001
Biodiversity Action Plan International Standard for Environmental Management
Systems
BIM
Building Information Modelling IT
Information Technology
BSI
British Standards Institution IUCN
International Union for Conservation of Nature
CABERNET
Concerted Action on Brownfield and Economic LCA
Regeneration Network Life-Cycle Assessment
CEMP LI
Construction Environmental Management Plan Landscape Institute
CIWEM LMS
Chartered Institution of Water and Environmental Landscape Management Strategy
Management
LWP
CMP Landscape Works Plan
Construction Managment Plan
PEMP
CSR Project Environmental Management Plan
Corporate Social Responsibility
RMP
EIA Resource Managment Plan
Environmental Impact Assessment
SEMP
EMS Site Environmental Management Plan
Environmental Management System
SMART
ES Specific, Measureable, Attainable, Realistic, Timely
Environmental Statement
SuDS
EU Sustainable Drainage Systems
European Union
SWMP
HAZOP Site Waste Management Plan
Hazard and Operability Studies
TIA
HER Transport Impact Assessment
Historic Environment Record
UK GBC
HIA UK Green Building Council
Health Impact Assessment
VOC
ICE Volatile Organic Compound
Institution of Civil Engineers
WFD
IEMA Water Framework Directive
Institute of Environmental Management and
Assessment WRAP
Waste & Resources Action Programme
IES
The Institution of Environmental Sciences

CEEQUAL v6 - International Projects Technical Manual-0.1

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

CEEQUAL v6 - International Projects Technical Manual-0.1

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

CEEQUAL v6 - International Projects Technical Manual-0.1

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

CEEQUAL Version 6

Technical Manual | International Projects

© BRE Global Ltd 2020

Terms and conditions

The Scheme Document may be downloaded and reproduced only where:

l the reproduction is for academic and other non-commercial purposes;

SD6053 | Issue: 0.1 | Issue date: 19/11/2020 Page 3 of 187

l Spårväg City - Linje 7 (courtesy of Skanska Sverige AB)

Right column, top to bottom:

l Northern Line Extension (courtesy of Transport for London)

Page 4 of 187 SD6053 | Issue: 0.1 | Issue date: 19/11/2020

Terms and conditions 3

About BRE Global Limited 7

About this document 8

Other CEEQUAL schemes 9

Other BREEAM schemes 9

Using this document 10

Categories and assessment issues in CEEQUAL 11

Verification and certification points 14

Scoring and rating 16

Assessment issues and credits 17

Calculating a CEEQUAL rating 19

1.1 Sustainability leadership 21

1.2 Environmental management 26

1.3 Responsible construction management 32

1.4 Staff and supply chain social governance 34

1.5 Whole life costing 37

SD6053 | Issue: 0.1 | Issue date: 19/11/2020 Page 5 of 187

2.1 Risk assessment and mitigation 39

2.2 Flooding and surface water run-off 46

2.3 Future needs 50

3 Communities and stakeholders 54

3.1 Consultation and engagement 55

3.2 Wider social benefits 60

3.3 Wider economic benefits 65

4 Land use and ecology 68

4.1 Land use and value 69

4.2 Land contamination and remediation 75

4.3 Protection of biodiversity 81

4.4 Change and enhancement of biodiversity 89

4.5 Long-term management of biodiversity 93

5 Landscape and historic environment 95

5.1 Landscape and visual impact 96

5.2 Heritage assets 103

6.1 Water pollution 112

6.2 Air, noise and light pollution 116

7.1 Strategy for resource efficiency 123

7.2 Reducing whole life carbon emissions 130

7.3 Environmental impact of construction products 134

7.4 Circular use of construction products 140

7.5 Responsible sourcing of construction products 150

7.6 Construction waste management 154

7.7 Energy use 160

7.8 Water use 167

8.1 Transport networks 174

8.2 Construction logistics 178

Page 6 of 187 SD6053 | Issue: 0.1 | Issue date: 19/11/2020

About BRE Global Limited

BRE Global Limited's mission is to 'Protect People, Property and the Planet'.